欲界善法的句分别注释巴利
Kāmāvacarakusalapadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
1 “Appetuṃ”的意思是“为了引入”。有人主张“句分别里没有说”,于是就用句分别的说法来证明这种引入是有限定范围的;接着为了说明句分别那句话的理由,又说了“以自性”等话。其中,在“有触”这类句子里,“有”(hoti)这个词和“存在”(atthi)这个词意思相同,基于这个意图,所以说“以第二个hoti词”。先按照注释书的意图讲完之后,为了表明自己的意图——也就是所引巴利文段落中引入的限定已经成立——又说了“以简略”等话。巴利
1.Appetunti nigametuṃ. ‘‘Padabhājanīyaṃ na vutta’’nti padabhājanīyāvacanena appanāvarodhaṃ sādhetvā padabhājanīyāvacanassa kāraṇaṃ vadanto ‘‘sarūpenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘phasso hotī’’tiādīsu hoti-saddo atthi-saddena anānatthoti adhippāyena vuttaṃ ‘‘dutiyena hoti-saddenā’’ti. Pubbe aṭṭhakathādhippāyena vatvā yathāvuttassa pāḷippadesassa appanāvarodho samatthitoti attano adhippāyaṃ dassento ‘‘saṅkhepenā’’tiādimāha.
“想要知道”这句话,是为了显示所问之相的特征才说的。“以任何方式”是指与见等特殊方式相应,或者以其他方式。因为智的状态差别就是见、衡量和审察。在“于未见”等语句中,应当接上“说”,而且在一切处都应接上“相”,因为在这里,相是主要的。“未见依此而照亮”,意思是“所见与此相合”就是“见合”;“依此断除疑惑”就是“断疑”——这些词的词义也是依照理趣显示出来的,但从义理上说,应当知道所有这些都是在如此情形下生起的言说,或者是产生它的心生起。巴利
Ñātuṃicchitoti lakkhaṇassa pucchāvisayataṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yena kenacīti dassanādivisesayuttena, itarena vā. Avatthāviseso hi ñāṇassa dassanatulanatīraṇāni. ‘‘Adiṭṭhata’’ntiādīsu āhāti yojetabbaṃ, sabbattha ca lakkhaṇassāti. Tañhettha adhikatanti. Adiṭṭhaṃ jotīyati etāyāti etena diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandati etāyāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanā. Vimatiṃ chindati etāyāti vimaticchedanāti etāsampi saddattho nayato dassito, atthato pana sabbāpi tathāpavattaṃ vacanaṃ, taduppādako vā cittuppādoti veditabbaṃ.
互相区分开来,就是差别、特殊,凭借这种差别。虽然由于时、地、生处、所缘、自性等而作无余差别的把握,所以说“诸法的开示”就是解说开示,但这里所意指的差别,只是包含在善等论母句中的特殊,因此说“差别……开示”。所以注释书中说:“善……阐明之后,有触……无散乱”。而“触是触”等,正是以差别详尽解说了具有差别者,这并非论母中所说的差别,所以显示具有差别者即是解说。以“此所说者”等,说出了“为了显示差别……”这句话的概括义。如果诸法本身就是应问、应答的,为何说出善等差别之语?为此说“然而他们……”。因为离开差别就没有具有差别者。以“这些法是善”等,通过“有触”、“触是触”等,已解答了所列举、所解说诸法的善性,基于此意趣而说“在‘这些法是善’的解答中”。此中的“hi”字是原因义。由此,因为应开示的正是法,而它们应开示为善等差别,所以如此连接。以“正是诸法”显示简别的结果,即“从言说开示”。以“及诸义”的“及”字,包含了“触是触”等这样的自性词源,以及如前所说的法智等。“如是,此应令转起、应令回转”,如此种种应被施设,与彼相应即“如……相应”,即“于该应施设者”之义,意趣在于差别为能简别。巴利
Aññamaññato pabhijjatīti pabhedo, viseso, tena pabhedena. Dhammānaṃ desananti kiñcāpi samayabhūmijātiārammaṇasabhāvādivasena anavasesappabhedapariggahato niddesadesanāva vattuṃ yuttā, tathāpi kusalādimātikāpadasaṅgahitavisesoyeva idha pabhedoti adhippetoti vuttaṃ ‘‘pabheda…pe… desanaṃ āhā’’ti. Tenevāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kusala…pe… dīpetvāti phasso hoti…pe… avikkhepo hotī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. dhammuddesavāra phassapañcamakarāsivaṇṇanā). ‘‘Phasso phusanā’’tiādinā ca pabhedavantova sātisayaṃ niddiṭṭhā, na pana mātikāyaṃ vuttappabhedoti pabhedavantadassanaṃ niddeso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hotītiādinā ‘‘pabhede…pe… dassanattha’’nti imassa vākyassa piṇḍatthamāha. Yadi dhammā eva pucchitabbā vissajjetabbā ca, kasmā kusalāti pabhedavacananti āha ‘‘te panā’’tiādi. Na hi pabhedehi vinā pabhedavanto atthīti. ‘‘Ime dhammā kusalā’’ti etena ‘‘phasso hotī’’ti, ‘‘phasso phusanā’’ti ca ādinā uddiṭṭhaniddiṭṭhānaṃ dhammānaṃ kusalabhāvo vissajjito hotīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘ime dhammā kusalāti vissajjanepī’’ti āha. Imasmiñhīti hi-saddo kāraṇattho. Tena yasmā dhammāva desetabbā, te ca kusalā…pe… bhedā desetabbā , tasmāti evaṃ vā yojanā. Dhammānamevāti avadhāraṇaphalaṃ dasseti ‘‘avohāradesanāto’’ti. Atthānañcāti ca-saddena ‘‘phasso phusanā’’ti evamādisabhāvaniruttiṃ yathāvuttadhammādiñāṇañca saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Iti evaṃ ayaṃ pavattetabbo nivattetabbo cā’’ti tathā tathā vidhetabbabhāvo itikattabbatā, tāya yutto iti…pe… yutto, tassa vidhetabbassāti attho, visesanattā pabhedassāti adhippāyo.
解说必须与“应如此作”相应,又必须被简别,而解说以法为主,所以在这里,由于法必须被简别,就形成了“善法”这样的词序。提问则以疑惑为主,因为它是为了让不愿作出决断的人转起而说的。由此表明:即使对已在一切法中断除疑随眠的人,提问也把应被开示的有情所生起的疑惑归到自己身上,表现得就像陷入疑惑的人一样。就像欲界等的分类一样,善等的分类依善等性而确定,但依法性则没有决断,所以说“法”时,因为缺乏决断,就会有“是善呢,还是不善呢”这样的疑惑,因此说“然而善等分类是可疑的”。但法性在善等中是一向确定的,所以是已决断的,因此说“而法性不是可疑的”。由此表明:在这里,可疑的、以应被决断的状态为主的是善性,法性则不是这样,所以说“法、善”。巴利
Itikattabbatāyuttassa visesitabbattā uddeso dhammappadhāno, tasmā tattha dhammassa visesitabbattā ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti ayaṃ padānukkamo kato. Pucchā saṃsayitappadhānā anicchitanicchayanāya pavattetabbattā. Tena sabbadhammesu samugghāṭitavicikicchānusayānampi pucchā desetabbapuggalagatasaṃsayāpattiṃ attani āropetvā saṃsayāpannehi viya pavattīyatīti dasseti. Kāmāvacarādibhedo viya kusalādibhāvena kusalādibhedo dhammabhāvena niyatoti dhammāti vutte nicchayābhāvato ‘‘kusalā nu kho akusalā nu kho’’tiādinā saṃsayo hotīti āha ‘‘kusalādibhedo pana saṃsayito’’ti. Dhammabhāvo pana kusalādīsu ekantikattā nicchitoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘na ca dhammabhāvo saṃsayito’’ti. Tena saṃsayito nicchetabbabhāvena padhāno ettha kusalabhāvo, na tathā dhammabhāvoti dhammā kusalāti vuttanti dasseti.
“心生起时”是指心正在生起的时候。在“然后,当存在时”这句话里,解释了“然后”这个词的意思是“之后”。先通过吃饭、行走等说明时间有部分不同,为了再说明其余的不同,所以说了“集合等”。“被简别”这句话,是用来说明“被限定”这个词的含义。因此,意思是:因为应当由前面所说的心来加以区别,所以叫“时”。所谓“如所意指的”,是指与欲界等差别相应的。在“那时”中,应当由心生起来简别的“时”,被那正在生起的心所简别;而那颗心本身在“在何时”这句话里,则成为能简别的状态。同样,在“那时”中,作为能简别的心,为了帮助应由自己来简别的“时”,在“在何时……心”中就成了应被简别的状态。所谓“帮助”,应当理解为互相成为能限定和所限定的关系。前法灭去的同时,或者灭去之后紧接着,后法就生起,这就是前后没有间断,不被任何东西隔开。由于存在这一方面的力量强,非存在那一方面就像被遮住了一样显现不出来,所以凡夫大多执着“那就是这个”,产生颠倒认识,这个道理用火轮的比喻就非常清楚。因此说“像成为一体一样”。以同一个集合而像成为一体那样生起,是集合密集;以难以了知的作用差别而像成为一体那样生起,是作用密集——应当这样连接理解。在这里,以缘和缘所生的状态而现起的众多法,因为以时间、自性、作用、所缘而难以了知其差别,所以应当像已成为一体那样来把握;应当知道,依次是相续密集等。巴利
Cittuppādasamayeti cittassa uppajjanasamaye. ‘‘Atha vijjamāne’’ti ettha atha-saddassa atthamāha ‘‘pacchā’’ti. Bhojanagamanādīhi samayekadesanānattaṃ dassetvā avasesanānattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘samavāyādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Visesitāti etena ‘‘niyamitā’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivarati, tasmā yathāvuttacittavisesitabbato samayatoti attho. Yathādhippetānanti kāmāvacarādivisesayuttānaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ samaye’’ti cittuppattiyā visesitabbopi samayo yena cittena uppajjamānena visesīyati, tasseva cittassa ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye’’ti ettha sayaṃ visesanabhāvaṃ āpajjati. Tathā ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti ettha visesanabhūtaṃ cittaṃ attanā visesitabbasamayassa upakāratthaṃ ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye…pe… citta’’nti visesitabbabhāvaṃ āpajjati. Upakāroti ca aññamaññaṃ avacchedakāvacchinditabbabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimadhammānaṃ bhaṅgasamakālaṃ, bhaṅgānantarameva vā pacchimadhammānaṃ uppatti purimapacchimānaṃ nirantaratā kenaci anantaritatā. Yāya bhāvapakkhassa balavabhāvena paṭicchādito viya hutvā abhāvapakkho na paññāyatīti tadevetanti gahaṇavasena pacurajano vipariyesito, soyamattho alātacakkena supākaṭo hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘ekībhūtānamivā’’ti . Ekasamūhavasena ekībhūtānamiva pavatti samūhaghanatā, dubbiññeyyakiccabhedavasena ekībhūtānamiva pavatti kiccaghanatāti yojanā. Ettha ca paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ anekesaṃ dhammānaṃ kālasabhāvabyāpārārammaṇehi dubbiññeyyabhedatāya ekībhūtānamiva gahetabbatā yathākkamaṃ santatighanatādayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“与共助因一起审察、和合”所以叫“时”(samaya),意思是“集合”。为了说明 samaya 这个词有“集合”的意思,所以说“诸缘的聚合”。梵行之道和承载它的补特伽罗在这里会合、聚集,所以叫“时”,也就是刹那。诸法在这里、或依这个而会合、聚集,与俱生法以生起等方式相遇,所以叫“时”,也就是时间。因为仅仅就法的运转来说,时间即使并非真实存在,也被假立为法运转的依处,就像器具一样,只是以施设所成的形态而被称说。诸支分平等地、或共同地运行、转起、安住,所以叫“时”,也就是集合,比如“集起”这个说法。集合,就是诸支分平等地安住。果在其他缘和合时依此而生起、运转,所以叫“时”,也就是因,比如“集起”这个说法。结缚与此结合,在自境中运转;或者诸结依此而行,所以叫“时”,也就是见。因为众生被见结极度地系缚。和合、交会、融合叫“时”,也就是获得。作为平等灭尽的乘,或者正乘、离去、不转起,所以叫“时”,也就是断除。以现前的方式应当被正确了知、现证、通达,即不颠倒的自性,这就是“现等觉”。或者以现前的方式正确地前往、了知,即不错失地觉了诸法不颠倒的自性,这就是“现等觉”。在这里,由于前缀只是起显明作用,所以即使带上前缀,所说的仍然是 samaya 这个词本身。所谓“那些”,就是指“逼恼”等。以自在的状态而广大,在诸作用中以勤奋而成就。巴利
Sahakārīkāraṇasannijjhaṃ sametīti samayo, samavetīti atthoti samaya-saddassa samavāyatthataṃ dassento ‘‘paccayasāmaggi’’nti āha. Sameti samāgacchati ettha maggabrahmacariyaṃ tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Samenti ettha, etena vā, samāgacchanti dhammā sahajātadhammehi uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ karaṇaṃ viya ca parikappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūho. Paccayantarasamāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti sambandho eti savisaye pavattati, sambandhā vā ayanti etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samayanaṃ saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samassa nirodhassa yānaṃ, sammā vā yānaṃ apagamo appavattīti samayo, pahānaṃ. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā etabbo abhisametabbo adhigantabboti aviparīto sabhāvo abhisamayo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā vā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, avirādhetvā dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvāvabodho. Ettha ca upasaggānaṃ jotakamattattā tassa tassa atthassa vācako samaya-saddo evāti saupasaggopi vutto. Tānevāti pīḷanādīneva. Vipphārikatā seribhāvena kiriyāsu ussāhanaparinipphanno.
在某些不善异熟等法当中。刹那不存在,就是没有那个东西,所以经文说“难道不是”等等。所谓“唯以法”,是指没有其他任何差别。正是通过这个限定,排除了差别,从而显示出“那不是它生起的地方”等等。无论以哪种方式——世间有时生起、有时息灭,所以叫做“时间”;或者,以生起为特征、为诸法的生起提供场所的存在,就叫做“时间”——不管怎样都好。在这里,最根本的因根本就不存在,所以否定的是因、因的共有因以及一般的因。否定彼缘性、多缘性。巴利
Kesucīti akusalavipākādīsu. Khaṇassa asambhavo tena vinābhāvoti āha ‘‘nanū’’tiādi. Dhammenevāti visesantararahitena. Taṃyeva hi avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ visesaṃ dasseti ‘‘na tassa pavattitthā’’tiādinā. Yathā vā tathā vāti kālena loko pavattati nivattatīti vā kālo nāma bhāvo vattanalakkhaṇo bhāvānaṃ pavattiokāsadāyakoti vā yena tena pakārena. Idha uttamahetuno sambhavo eva natthīti hetuhetusādhāraṇahetūyeva paṭisedheti. Tappaccayataṃ anekapaccayataṃ.
把“自然论、自在天论”的提出,应当理解为只是举例。“生主论”“原人论”“时间论”等,也属于“一因论”。通过“或”这个字,也应当理解成这些都被包括在内。支分等之所以被称为“给予者”,是因为总聚要依靠支分法来指称,就像说“等量的粉末”“装饰过的提婆达多”一样。不成就,就是没有成就、没有因。对于根本没有能力成就的事物来说,即使上千种其他条件都聚集起来,也完全没有能力,所以说“具有成就能力的”。在这里,果的生起要依靠共同作用的因,诸缘法彼此互相观待,所以说为“观待”,应当理解为就像观待一样。巴利
Pakatissaravādaggahaṇaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pajāpatipurisakālavādādayopi ‘‘ekakāraṇavādo’’ti. Vā-saddena vā tesampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Avayava…pe… dāyo vutto avayavadhammena samudāyassa apadisitabbattā, yathā ‘‘samaṃ cuṇṇaṃ, alaṅkato devadatto’’ti ca. Anipphādanaṃ nipphādanābhāvo ahetubhāvo. Nipphādetuṃ asamatthassa pana paccayantarānaṃ sahassepi samāgate nattheva samatthatāti āha ‘‘nipphādanasamatthassā’’ti. Ettha ca sahakārīkāraṇāyattā phaluppādanā paccayadhammānaṃ aññamaññāpekkhāti vuttāti apekkhā viyāti apekkhā daṭṭhabbā.
在没有作用、没有参与的人当中。在“一一”这个词上,注释书显示了重复词被省略而指代的用法。如果重复了,多数的含义就能成立。“百盲者见”这句,是把反身表达按简择转为处格,所以说成“于百盲中”。同样,用“一一”这个词,就点明了各自没有能力,因此“百盲者见”就是合集而见,这个意思自然成立,所以说“意思是百盲者合集而见”。否则的话,就是按字面来理解意思了。因为……在抬轿等事上成立,所以这个意思不需要再论证。现在,为了说明这个意思非常明显、不需要再论证,就说了“各别”等话。巴利
Nibyāpāresu abyāvaṭesu. Ekekasminti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āmeḍitavacanassa luttaniddiṭṭhataṃ dasseti. Sati ca āmeḍite siddho bahubhāvoti. Andhasataṃ passatīti ca paccattavacanaṃ niddhāraṇe bhummavasena pariṇāmetvā ‘‘andhasate’’ti āha. Tathā ekekasminti iminā visuṃ asamatthatā jotitāti andhasataṃ passatīti samuditaṃ passatīti atthato ayamattho āpannoti āha ‘‘andhasataṃ sahitaṃ passatīti adhippāyo’’ti. Aññathāti yathārutavasena atthe gayhamāne. Yasmā asā…pe… siddho sivikubbahanādīsu, tasmā nāyamattho sādhetabbo. Idāni tassatthassa supākaṭabhāvena asādhetabbataṃ dassento ‘‘visu’’ntiādimāha.
用这个方式,也就是这个被称为“刹那”的时机,显示出善法的生起极为难得。在“由于自身难得”这一句中,或者“时”这个词是“刹那”的意思,也就是被称为“刹那”的时机,这个意思已经说过了。以这个作为方式,作为理路。应当这样连接。这里的连接是:“和合”……显示出转起,因为它自身就是诸缘聚合的状态;或者“时”这个词是“和合”的意思,也就是被称为“和合”的时机。它通过阐明“当那样的诸缘聚合存在时”这个含义,显示出诸法由多种原因而转起。“时节”……显示出极其短暂,因为它自身极其短暂。“聚集”……显示出共同生起,因为它自身就是诸法的集合体。“因”……显示出依彼而转起,因为只有在自身存在时,自己的果才可能产生。在义理方面和词义方面,为了让人了解“在极其短暂的时间里、在某个诸法聚集体中、在某个因存在时”这个含义,就显示出依于彼、依赖于彼的善法转起难以通达,以及许多法共同生起、依赖于他者而产生。巴利
Etenupāyenāti yoyaṃ khaṇasaṅkhāto samayo kusaluppattiyā dullabhabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Attano dullabhatāyāti ettha khaṇattho vā samaya-saddo khaṇasaṅkhāto samayoti attho vutto. Etena upāyabhūtena nayabhūtena. Yojanā kātabbāti etthāyaṃ yojanā – samavāya…pe… vuttiṃ dīpeti sayaṃ paccayasāmaggibhāvato, samavāyattho vā samaya-saddo samavāyasaṅkhāto samayo. So yāya paccayasāmaggiyā satīti imassa atthassa pakāsanavasena dhammānaṃ anekahetuto vuttiṃ dīpeti. Kāla…pe… parittataṃ dīpeti attano atiparittatāya. Samūha…pe… sahuppattiṃ dīpeti sayaṃ dhammānaṃ samudāyabhāvato. Hetu…pe… vuttitaṃ dīpeti sati eva attani attano phalānaṃ sambhavatoti. Atthapakkhe ca saddapakkhe ca yasmiṃ atiparitte kāle yasmiṃ dhammasamudāye yamhi hetumhi satīti etassa atthassa ñāpanavasena tadādhārāya tadadhīnāya ca kusaladhammappavattiyā duppaṭivijjhataṃ anekesaṃ sahuppattiṃ parādhīnappattiñca dīpetīti.
“弓法坚固的弓箭手”,是指弓力坚固的射手。所谓弓力坚固,说的是具有两千弓力的弓。所谓两千弓力,是说把弓装上弦、挂上铅头等重物后,握住弓身举起,直到与箭一样高时,弓才从地面被提起。已经学成,是指在师父门下学了十年或十二年技艺。手法纯熟,是指对弓已经练到运用自如。有些人只学了技艺,手法并不纯熟,这里就说明这些人不是那样。已经展示过技艺,是指曾在王室等场合展示过本领。站在四方,意思是:不是只在一个地方,而是依靠柱子、树木或任何一物,站在一处而面向四方。所谓像这样所说的神速之人,除了菩萨以外,过去不曾有这样的人。因为他在神速天鹅之时,就曾这样做过。不过在经中,这是以非真实的假想作为譬喻而引用的。所谓“彼之支配状态”,是指从“彼之支配状态”这一原因来说,显示被称为因的时节是随他支配而转的,意思是说它完全是专注一境的性质。然而那些读作“tapparabhāvo”的人,则认为:由于显示了随缘而转,所以“tapparabhāvo”是指被称为因的时节,因此说它显示了彼之随他支配而转。若显示随全体而转,则是“tapparo”;若显示随其一分而转,则不是“tapparo”,所以说“atapparabhāvato”。巴利
Daḷhadhammā dhanuggahāti daḷhadhanuno issāsā. Daḷhadhanu nāma dvisahassathāmaṃ vuccati. Dvisahassathāmanti ca yassa āropitassa jiyābaddho lohasīsādīnaṃ bhāro daṇḍe gahetvā yāva kaṇḍappamāṇā ukkhittassa pathavito muccati. Sikkhitāti dasadvādasavassāni ācariyakule uggahitasippā. Katahatthāti dhanusmiṃ ciṇṇavasībhāvā. Koci sippameva uggaṇhāti, katahattho na hoti, ime pana na tathāti dasseti. Katupāsanāti rājakulādīsu dassitasippā. Catuddisā ṭhitā assūti ekasmiṃyeva padese thambhaṃ vā rukkhaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci ekaṃyeva nissāya catuddisābhimukhā ṭhitā siyunti attho. Evaṃ vuttajavanapurisassāti na evarūpo puriso koci bhūtapubbo aññatra bodhisattena. So hi javanahaṃsakāle evarūpamakāsi. Sutte pana abhūtaparikappanavasena upamāmattaṃ āhaṭaṃ. Tapparabhāvāti tapparabhāvato hetusaṅkhātassa samayassa parāyattavuttidīpane ekantabyāvaṭasabhāvatoti attho. Ye pana ‘‘tapparabhāvo’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ paccayāyattavuttidīpanato tapparabhāvo hetusaṅkhātassa samayassa, tasmā tassa parāyattavuttidīpanatā vuttāti yojanā. Samudāyāyattatādīpane tapparo, tadekadesāyattatādīpane tapparo na hotīti āha ‘‘atapparabhāvato’’ti.
难道不是:依于这这(各种条件)而施设的时间只是世俗言说而已,它怎么能成为那里所说诸法的所依呢?所以(作者)说“时间也确实……”等。如果说行为以另一种行为为特征、存在以存在为特征,那么这里什么是作为特征的行为呢?所以(作者)说“这里也……”等。“与作为特征的存在相结合”中的“iti”一词是表示原因的意思。这里说的是:因为被称为众生的、作为特征的行为与时间相结合,所以那里是对地的解说。巴利
Nanu ca taṃ taṃ upādāya paññatto kālo vohāramattako, so kathaṃ ādhāro tattha vuttadhammānanti āha ‘‘kālopi hī’’tiādi. Yadi kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, kā panettha lakkhaṇakiriyāti āha ‘‘ihāpī’’tiādi. Lakkhaṇabhūtabhāvayuttoti iti-saddo hetuattho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā sattāsaṅkhātāya lakkhaṇakiriyāya yutto samayo, tasmā tattha bhūminiddesoti.
关于“摄颂”一句,意思是:如果按简略的方式来说。难道不是这样吗——就像其余烦恼等一样,烦恼欲也因为可以被享受,所以被归入事欲;就像智与所知一样,因此按简略来说,应该只有一种欲。针对这个问难,说了“烦恼欲”等话。“俱行”是指以境与有境的关系而存在。虽然“按摄颂说有两种欲”已经总摄了一切欲,但由于以“四恶趣”等对境作了区分,所以这里把属于下分烦恼的欲贪取为烦恼欲,因此说了“因此”等话。问难者不了解他的意思,就用“难道不是”等话来追问。另一方则用“多烦恼者”等话阐明自己的意思。巴利
Uddānatoti yadi saṅkhepatoti attho. Nanu ca avasiṭṭhakilesādayo viya kilesakāmopi assādetabbatāya vatthukāme samavaruddho ñāṇaṃ viya ñeyyeti saṅkhepato ekoyeva kāmo siyāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kilesakāmo’’tiādi. Sahitassāti visayavisayibhāvena avaṭṭhitassa. ‘‘Uddānato dve kāmā’’ti kiñcāpi sabbe kāmā uddiṭṭhā, ‘‘catunnaṃ apāyāna’’ntiādinā pana visayassa visesitattā orambhāgiyakilesabhūto kāmarāgo idha kilesakāmoti gahitoti ‘‘tenā’’tiādimāha. Codako tassa adhippāyaṃ ajānanto ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādinā anuyuñjati. Itaro pana ‘‘bahalakilesassā’’tiādinā attano adhippāyaṃ vivarati.
在欲界诸法中,或者指天宫、如意树等种类,或者指微小的善法等。难道不是因为以“四恶趣”限定了范围,所以不可能包含色界和无色界吗?不是的,因为“从摄颂来说有两种欲”已经毫无遗漏地总摄了一切欲。虽然已经总摄,但在欲的总体中,怎样只取其中一部分呢?为了说明这一点,才说了“有两种……”等话。欲贪是对五种欲乐的贪。欲爱是以欲界诸法为对象的渴爱。灭爱是与断见相应的贪。这里是指在十一种处。如果指的是毫无遗漏地现行,那就不该说“这有两种”,因为事欲的一部分在这里并不现行。针对这个质问,为了说明由于大多数情况如此而说为无余,或者说显示为类似无余,所以说了“事欲也……”等话。这里说与无余相似,是因为某一法在本质上不同而说为无余。这样说的意思是:烦恼欲和事欲是以无余圆满的方式被标示的。把“ca”字缩短,是为了显示“欲界”这个词中已经包含了表因的含义。巴利
Kāmāvacaradhammesu vimānakapparukkhādippakāresu parittakusalādīsu vā. Nanu ca ‘‘catunnaṃ apāyāna’’nti visayassa visesitattā rūpārūpadhātuggahaṇassa asambhavoyevāti? Na, ‘‘uddānato dve kāmā’’ti niravasesato kāmānaṃ uddiṭṭhattā. Uddiṭṭhepi hi kāmasamudāye yathā tadekadesova gayhati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘duvidho’’tiādimāha. Kāmarāgo pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo. Kāmataṇhā kāmāvacaradhammavisayā taṇhā. Nirodhataṇhā ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo. Idhāti ekādasavidhe padese. Yadi anavasesappavatti adhippetā, ‘‘duvidhopeso’’ti na vattabbaṃ vatthukāmekadesassa idha appavattanatoti anuyogena yebhuyyabhāvato anavaseso viya anavasesoti vā attho gahetabboti dassento ‘‘vatthukāmopī’’tiādimāha. Anavasesasadisatā cettha sabhāvabhinnassa kassaci anavasesato. Evañca katvāti kilesakāmavatthukāmānaṃ anavasesaparipuṇṇabhāvena abhilakkhitattāti attho. Cāsaddassa rassattaṃ katanti kāmāvacarasadde hetukattuattho antonītoti dasseti.
“于境”是指在所依之处,也就是所诠之义。通过“无相”这一说法,是要表明:在惯用语中,这是为了区分作用,而不是指自作用。“善性”是指按《本生经》《婆希提经》和阿毗达摩的教法所说的善性。“彼”是指乐异熟性。为了说明它的现起,指出在“无过乐异熟相”中,“乐”这个词是可爱的意思。想与慧的作用是标记和通达,远离这两者而获得所缘,就称为“了别”,所以说“想……略……执取”。难道心不是有不同于触等作用的特殊作用吗?确实如此。但那种特殊并不像想、慧、识那样难以理解,因此以不同于想和慧作用的特相来说明识的特相。以作为无间诸法之熟练强盛状态的原因而转起,称为“积聚相续”。而这样的转起就是习行缘性,所以说“以习行缘性而积聚”。巴利
Visayeti vatthusmiṃ abhidheyyattheti attho. Nimittaviraheti etena ruḷhīsu kiriyā vibhāgakaraṇāya, na attakiriyāyāti dasseti. Kusalabhāvanti jātakabāhitikasuttaabhidhammapariyāyena kathitaṃ kusalattaṃ. Tassāti sukhavipākabhāvassa. Tassa paccupaṭṭhānataṃ vattukāmatāyāti etena ‘‘anavajjasukhavipākalakkhaṇa’’nti ettha sukhasaddo iṭṭhapariyāyo vuttoti dasseti. Saññāpaññākiccaṃ saññāṇakaraṇapaṭivijjhanāni, tadubhayavidhurā ārammaṇūpaladdhi ‘‘vijānātī’’ti iminā vuccatīti āha ‘‘saññā…pe… gahaṇa’’nti. Nanu ca phassādikiccatopi visiṭṭhakiccaṃ cittanti? Saccametaṃ, so pana viseso na tathā duravabodho, yathā saññāpaññāviññāṇānanti saññāpaññākiccavisiṭṭhalakkhaṇatāya viññāṇalakkhaṇamāha. Anantaradhammānaṃ paguṇabalavabhāvassa kāraṇabhāvena pavattamāno santānaṃ cinoti nāma. Tathāpavatti ca āsevanapaccayabhāvoti āha ‘‘āsevanapaccayabhāvena cinotī’’ti.
“只是心所造作的”意思是:只是行与识所造作的。“种种差别等的确定”在这里,“确定”应当分别搭配。确定就是界定、不相混杂。由于它,法才被称为“已确定的”,所以说“已确定性”。“性别等种种”在这里,依女人、男人的形体而有了性别的种种差别。依天、人、畜生等而有了女性性别的多样性,男性性别也是如此。在天等种种差别中,对女性性别,应依被称为种种身、彼此性质不同、因处所等而差别各异的殊胜,了知它的分类;男性性别也是如此。或者,依令性别产生的业,按前面所说的种种差别等方式,来搭配性别的种种差别等。由于想等在性别种种差别等中运作,所以有想等的种种差别。因此说:“它们确实是由业的种种差别等所产生的。”通过无性等不同情况的展示,已经显示了性别的种种差别。在显示了那之后,想的种种差别等也就已经显示了,这样就归入轮回;为了显示这一点,所以说“未来……中略……结合”。女性性别、男性性别等,是识所依止的色蕴的安布殊胜。以想为首,说了其余四蕴。并且以世俗言说,显示了五蕴依世俗施设而运作,那是以渴爱、见、执著为因的;为了显示这个道理,所以说“性别等……中略……他们种种”。巴利
Cittakatamevāti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇakatameva. Nānattādīnaṃ vavatthānanti ettha vavatthānaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Vavatthānaṃ paricchedo asaṅkarabhāvo. Tena ca dhammo nicchito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘nicchitatā’’ti. Liṅganānattādīnīti ettha itthipurisasaṇṭhānavasena liṅganānattaṃ. Devamanussatiracchānādivasena itthiliṅgassa puthuttaṃ, tathā purisaliṅgassa. Devādibhede itthiliṅge paccekaṃ nānattakāyatāsaṅkhātassa aññamaññavisadisasabhāvassa desādibhedabhinnassa ca visesassa vasena pabhedo veditabbo. Tathā purisaliṅge. Liṅganibbattakassa vā kammassa yathāvuttanānattādivasena liṅgassa nānattādīni yojetabbāni. Liṅganānattādīsu pavattattā saññādīnaṃ nānattādīni. Tenevāha ‘‘kammanānattādīhi nibbattāni hi tānī’’ti. Apadādinānākaraṇadassanena liṅganānattaṃ dassitaṃ. Tasmiñca dassite saññānānattādayo dassitā evāti āvattati bhavacakkanti dassento āha ‘‘anāga…pe… ghaṭento’’ti. Itthiliṅgapurisaliṅgādi viññāṇādhiṭṭhitassa rūpakkhandhassa sannivesaviseso. Saññāsīsena cattāro khandhā vuttā. Vohāravacanena ca pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ voharitabbabhāvena pavatti dīpitā, yā sā taṇhādiṭṭhiabhinivesahetūti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘liṅgādi…pe… yosānānī’’ti āha.
比丘们,凡是那些不善的、属于不善的法,这一切都以心为先导;又说诸法以心为先导。从这类经文可以看出,业是以心为因的,所以说业是由心所生起的。如其次第,意思是从业产生性别特征,从性别特征产生想。这不像前面第一种分类那样,说从业产生性别之想、从性别产生性别之想,这里显示的是两方面都在运作。所谓此女或此男将差别,因为对差别作了特指,以女性等状态可被称呼的那种存在,在这里就叫做差别,所以说到达女性、男性等称呼。依两种时间,就是依过去和现在两种时间。功德遍满而扬名,所以说声誉广布。如果没有业的差别,就不会有从业所生的种种差别,所以说由业……乃至……差别。没有成熟的机会,就是不可能之处,或者也指趣与时间。欲界的行业识生起色界的眼识等,因为没有余地,不生起彼所缘,在这里应当指出。因为这里指的是偶尔生起的心作用,当眼根等不具足时,不生起眼识等的业识,在其余条件不具足时,应看作没有落脚之处。那也包括了死时、趣、加行等,由等字所涵盖。在这里他们说:俱作因不具足时,果报毕竟得不到余地;另一种则得到果报一部分的余地,这就是它们之间的差别。这是就果报得到余地时,不存在俱作因不具足这一点而说的。巴利
‘‘Ye keci, bhikkhave, dhammā akusalā akusalabhāgiyā, sabbete manopubbaṅgamā’’ti (a. ni. 1.56-57), ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti (dha. pa. 1, 2) ca evamādivacanato cittahetukaṃ kammanti āha ‘‘kammañhi cittato nibbatta’’nti. Yathāsaṅkhyanti kammato liṅgaṃ liṅgato saññāti attho. Na purimavikappe viya kammato liṅgasaññā liṅgato liṅgasaññāti ubhayato ubhayappavattidassanavasena. ‘‘Bhedaṃ gacchanti itthāyaṃ purisoti vā’’ti bhedassa visesitattā itthādibhāvena voharitabbabhāvo idha bhedoti ‘‘itthipurisādivohāraṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Addhadvayavasenāti atītapaccuppannaddhadvayavasena. Guṇābhibyāpanaṃ kittīti āha ‘‘patthaṭayasata’’nti. Kammanānākaraṇena vinā kammanibbattanānākāraṇābhāvato ‘‘kammajehi…pe… nānākaraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Avipaccanokāso aṭṭhānabhūtā, gatikālopi vā. Kāmāvacaraṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ rūpadhātuyā cakkhuviññāṇādiṃ janetvā anokāsatāya tadārammaṇaṃ ajanentaṃ ettha nidassetabbaṃ. Ekaccacittakaraṇassa adhippetattā cakkhādivekallena cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ ajanakaṃ kammaviññāṇaṃ avasesapaccayavikale anogadhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tadapi kālagatipayogādīti ādi-saddena saṅgahitanti. Ettha ca ‘‘sahakārīkāraṇavikalaṃ vipākassa accantaṃ okāsameva na labhati, itaraṃ vipākekadesassa laddhokāsanti, idametesaṃ nānatta’’nti vadanti, taṃ vipākassa okāsalābhe sati sahāyakāraṇavikalatāva natthīti adhippāyena vuttaṃ.
先让“已经存在而后离去”叫“存在已去”;那么,体验之后离去又该怎么说呢?所以他说“已体验的存在”等等。这里要显示的是:由“已体验”这个词所表达的意义,只有“存在”这个词才能真正表达它,而不是“随”这个词;“随”这个词只是起照亮、修饰的作用。因为前缀词和不变词就像树枝折断一样。再者,前缀词有多种意义,它们通过照亮词根所要说出的差别,来划定词根所能表达的种种差别义;这些差别义中的共通部分是无差别,而安立在各自差别中的,就是照亮每一种差别。所以说“共通……中略……殊异”。“已体验”这个词大多数情况下出现在业处(受格)的意义上,为了显示这里它具有作者(主格)的意义,所以说了“又,‘已体验’一词”等。虽然一切心的生起都有应被感受的性质,都能体验所缘,但在颠倒的相续中,由于心行的运作,善与不善的所缘体验方式比无记法更殊胜。这就是这里所要表达的意思,为了显示这一点,所以说了“依所意欲而说”。以“存在已去之性”这一说法的意趣,说明了善与不善的牵引方式。巴利
Bhavatu tāva bhavitvā apagataṃ bhūtāpagataṃ, anubhavitvā apagataṃ pana kathanti āha ‘‘anubhūtabhūtā’’tiādi. Tena anubhūta-saddena yo attho vuccati, tassa bhūta-saddoyeva vācako, na anu-saddo, anu-saddo pana jotakoti dasseti. Sākhābhaṅgasadisā hi nipātopasaggāti. Kiriyāvisesakattañca upasaggānaṃ anekatthattā dhātusaddānaṃ tehi vattabbavisesassa jotanabhāveneva avacchindananti yattakā dhātusaddena abhidhātabbā atthavisesā, tesaṃ yaṃ sāmaññaṃ aviseso, tassa visese avaṭṭhāpanaṃ tassa tassa visesassa jotanamevāti āha ‘‘sāmañña…pe… visesīyatī’’ti. Anubhūta-saddo bahulaṃ kammatthe eva dissatīti tassa idha kattuatthavācitaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘anubhūtasaddo cā’’tiādimāha. Satipi sabbesaṃ cittuppādānaṃ savedayitabhāvato ārammaṇānubhavane, savipallāse pana santāne cittābhisaṅkhāravasena pavattito abyākatehi visiṭṭho kusalākusalānaṃ sātisayo visayānubhavanākāroti ayamattho idhādhippetoti dassento ‘‘vattuṃ adhippāyavasenā’’ti āha. Bhūtāpagatabhāvābhidhānādhippāyenāti kusalākusalassa ākaḍḍhanupāyamāha.
因为完成了已生起的作用,又和已生起的状态相似,所以称为“已起”。说“已开始生起”,是因为即使对未来的法也用“已生”这个词来表达,这里就说明了它的理由。在这里,以贪染等方式对所缘之味的体验是殊胜的,而不善法和善法在生起之后又灭去这一点上是共同的,所以说“一切有为法都已存在而离去”。不过在《迷惑消散》中说:“由于异熟体验的缘故,那是彼所缘。未成熟的异熟在一切情况下都还没有离去,只是因为具有已离去的性质,业才被称为存在已去。”因此在那里只说了依地而起的异熟。但在这里,也说了业。由于成为所缘的缘故,这里存在的烦恼类就是地,所以说为取蕴。就像被火执取一样,这是在显示获得地之后应当说的方法。“此”指的是业。“于此”说的是异熟,应当这样理解。巴利
Uppatitakiccanipphādanato uppatitasadisattā ‘‘uppatita’’nti vuttaṃ. Uppajjituṃ āraddhoti anāgatassapi tasseva uppanna-saddena vuttatāya kāraṇamāha. Ettha ca rajjanādivasena ārammaṇarasānubhavanaṃ sātisayanti akusalañca kusalañca uppajjitvā niruddhatāsāmaññena ‘‘sabbasaṅkhataṃ bhūtāpagata’’nti vuttaṃ. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ pana ‘‘vipākānubhavanavasena tadārammaṇaṃ. Avipakkavipākassa sabbathā avigatattā bhavitvā vigatatāmattavasenakammañca bhūtāpagata’’nti vuttaṃ. Teneva tattha okāsakatuppannanti vipākamevāha. Idha pana kammampīti. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena bhavati ettha kilesajātanti bhūmīti vuttā upādānakkhandhā. Aggiāhito viyāti bhūmiladdhanti vattabbatāya upāyaṃ dasseti. Etenāti kammaṃ. Etassāti vipāko vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“未被镇伏”是指未被去除。“自地”是指自己的地。“断绝”是指不再让它生起。把“刹那三时中的一部分”说成“刹那三时”,这是在说明前面所说的譬喻只是近似的说法。由此表明,“已生起的法就是现在法”这个譬喻在这里是合适的。“以精勤”是指以精勤的状态。为了说明“开示时,心为先导”,也就是说,世尊在开示世间法时,是以心为先导来开示的,这是恰当的。或者说,这是就世间法的自性而言——这些法以心为首、以心为先导而生起。由此说明了这样开示的理由,意思是:一切不善法都以心为过失。有些注释者认为这里指的是诵者。“触等”中的“等”字,把贪等也包含进来了。即使没有时间上的差别,由于作为缘而被期待的法,被说成好像先前已经完成一样,所以说“如同最初生起”。为了表明它的前导性不是近行,而说了“无间缘意”等。因为有“渴爱之网已尽”等语句,与作为网的渴爱相应的心被称为引导者,所以说“或者与渴爱相应”。巴利
Avikkhambhitattāti avinoditattā. Sabhūmiyanti sakabhūmiyaṃ. Vicchinditvāti puna uppajjituṃ adatvā. Khaṇattayekadesagataṃ khaṇattayagatanti vuttanti yathāvuttassa udāharaṇassa upacārabhāvamāha. Tena uppannā dhammā paccuppannā dhammāti idamettha udāharaṇaṃ yuttanti dasseti. Padhānenāti padhānabhāvena. Desanāya cittaṃ pubbaṅgamanti lokiyadhamme desetabbe cittaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā desanā bhagavatā ucitāti dasseti. Dhammasabhāvaṃ vā sandhāyāti lokiyadhammānaṃ ayaṃ sabhāvo yadidaṃ te cittajeṭṭhakā cittapubbaṅgamā pavattantīti dasseti. Tena tesaṃ tathādesanāya kāraṇamāha, sabbe akusalā dhammā cittavajjāti attho. Kecīti padakārā. Phassādayopīti pi-saddena rāgādayo sampiṇḍeti. Kālabhedābhāvepi paccayabhāvena apekkhito dhammo purimanipphanno viya voharīyatīti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ uppanno viyā’’ti. Anupacaritamevassa pubbaṅgamabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘anantarapaccayamana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Khīṇā bhavanettī’’tiādivacanato (dī. ni. 2.155; netti. 114) nettibhūtāya taṇhāya yuttaṃ cittaṃ nāyakanti āha ‘‘taṇhāsampayuttaṃ vā’’ti.
因为“那时,凡是心的乐”这一表述已经指明,喜受的本性就是乐,所以说“这是依本性而说”。从直接、非引申的意义上说,“甘美”一词是某种特别味道的同义词;这里是因为它和可喜的状态有共同性,所以用近似的说法来讲,因此说“如同甘美”。从究竟意义上看,并不存在脱离渴爱的喜贪,也不存在喜贪这种状态本身,所以说“这里并没有以相应为意义的俱行状态”,而仍然说“喜贪俱行”。由此可以知道:“俱行”这个词是在表明渴爱具有喜贪的性质。或者,“俱”这个词是表示状态差别的,就像在“有见”等说法中那样;这是为了说明,在一切状态下都不舍弃喜贪的本性,所以渴爱被称为已经达到喜贪状态,即“喜贪俱行”。又或者,像在“见取”等说法中那样,“去”这个词并没有别的含义,因此具有喜贪本性的渴爱就被称为“喜贪俱行”,意思就是它以喜贪为本性。这里也是如此。在“喜俱行”这个说法中也是这样。这个意思就是“相应”。这里所引的、出现在注释中的“相应”一词,正如已经显示的那样,是在解释意义时从圣典中引来的“相应”一词。“俱生”,就是俱生的意思。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cetasikaṃ sāta’’nti niddiṭṭhattā somanassavedanā sātasabhāvāti āha ‘‘sabhāvavasena vutta’’nti. Nippariyāyena madhura-saddo rasavisesapariyāyo, iṭṭhabhāvasāmaññena idha upacārena vuttotiāha ‘‘madhuraṃ viyā’’ti. Paramatthato taṇhāvinimutto nandirāgo nandirāgabhāvo vā natthīti ‘‘na ettha sampayogavasena sahagatabhāvo atthī’’ti, ‘‘nandirāgasahagatā’’ti ca vuccati. Tena viññāyati ‘‘sahagatasaddo taṇhāya nandirāgabhāvaṃ jotetī’’ti. Avatthāvisesavācako vā saha-saddo ‘‘sanidassanā’’tiādīsu viya, sabbāsupi avatthāsu nandirāgasabhāvāvijahanadīpanavasena nandirāgabhāvaṃ gatā nandirāgasahagatāti taṇhā vuttā. Gata-saddassa vā ‘‘diṭṭhigata’’ntiādīsu viya atthantarābhāvato nandirāgasabhāvā taṇhā ‘‘nandirāgasahagatā’’ti vuttā, nandirāgasabhāvāti attho. Idhāpīti imissaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Imasmimpi padeti ‘‘somanassasahagata’’nti etasmimpi pade. Ayamevatthoti saṃsaṭṭho eva. Yathādassitasaṃsaṭṭhasaddoti atthuddhārappasaṅgena pāḷito aṭṭhakathāya āgatasaṃsaṭṭhasaddo. Sahajāteti sahajātatthe.
为了说明“不观待时间差别、以业为成就的ābhaṭṭha一词是‘已说’的同义词”,他说“未被说的状态就是未被引述的状态”。在圣典中,也就是在这第一心生起的圣典中。正因为未被说,也就是因为无行的状态没有被说出来。由于vatthu一词是原因的同义词,从缘的状态这一共同性来说,作为门的诸法也可以有vatthu这个同义词,所以他说“门被称为vatthu”。由此说明:门就像vatthu一样,也是vatthu。作为意门的诸法大多数与心所依处一同生起,因此通过门……乃至……说了心所依处,就像说“矛在行进”一样。以自作用的状态,就是以自己作用的状态,或者以具有作用。不与其他共通的,这说明了sa-这个词的意义。因为自己的味就是自味。巴利
Kālavisesānapekkho kammasādhano ābhaṭṭha-saddo bhāsitapariyāyoti dassento āha ‘‘abhāsitabbatā anābhaṭṭhatā’’ti. Pāḷiyanti imissā paṭhamacittuppādapāḷiyaṃ. Abhāsitattā evāti asaṅkhārikabhāvassa avuttattā eva. Kāraṇapariyāyattā vatthusaddassa paccayabhāvasāmaññato dvārabhūtadhammānampi siyā vatthupariyāyoti āha ‘‘dvāraṃ vatthūti vutta’’nti. Tena vatthu viya vatthūti dasseti. Manodvārabhūtā dhammā yebhuyyena hadayavatthunā saha carantīti dvārena…pe… hadayavatthu vuttanti āha yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti. Sakiccabhāvenāti attano kiccabhāvena, kiccasahitatāya vā. Aññāsādhāraṇoti sa-saddassa atthamāha. Sako hi raso sarasoti.
心识以无间心为因,所以说它只有一种生起方式;心所法以俱生心触为因,所以说它们有两种生起方式。正如经中所说:依心而生起的诸法,比丘们,接触了才感受,接触了才认知,接触了才思虑。巴利
Anantaracittahetukattā cittassa ekasamuṭṭhānatā vuttā, sahajātacittaphassahetukattā cetasikānaṃ dvisamuṭṭhānatā. ‘‘Cittasamuṭṭhānā dhammā, phuṭṭho bhikkhave vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) hi vuttaṃ.
“微细尘等色”,说的是极微细的色。至于极微色,根本没什么可说的。所谓“依处有限”,是用来说明:许多色处由多个色聚聚合起来,靠协同作用,像抬轿子那样,成为眼识的所缘缘,而不是一个或少数几个色处。那么这样一来,眼识岂不是以聚合体为所缘了吗?不会,因为聚合体本身根本不存在。在胜义上,没有任何东西叫聚合体。实际上,凡是安住在适当位置的色处,当其他缘和合时,就按上面说的方式成为眼识的所缘缘,因为眼识没有分别。可是由它引生的意识多次生起时,依据先前已经成立的假立,以集合的形态、形状等样子运转。所以不该追问:眼识的所缘是一个色处还是多个?因为在现量境中,套用推理是不合适的。再者,一弹指间就有数千万心识生起,心识转变极快,所以即使瓶、碗等色安住在适当位置,依照先前的作意,首先由某一意识相续把它限定为“瓶”或“碗”,随后另一个才被眼识路隔开而限定。由于不了解这种差别,就误以为对瓶、碗等的认知没有差别。应知这里看似有诘难,其实算不上诘难。所谓“刹那有限”,是指相续刹那的短暂。因为就相续而言,诸色法与非色法在相违或不相违的缘和合时,有快灭有慢灭,所以有短时、长时之分;但依自性相来说,都只有一个限定。色处如此,其余诸处也一样。因为声等也以“依处有限”等状态而得以成立。“过近等”的“等”字,包含不省察、被某物遮蔽等。“境”是因为特别地执取、系缚所缘之法,所以叫境,是就“不依于他处”之义而说,所以说“境是不依于他处之性”。因为眼识等不会在色处等之外的所缘上生起。“行处”是因为牛在这里行走,所以叫行处,又“如行处”而叫行处,是就“多处行走”之义而说,所以说“行处是以行走于彼处”。因为色等多为眼识等所取,而不是那样为意识所取。“彼等”是指被意识所取的色处等。“因为言语不成立”为什么这样说?难道不是针对在五门转起的意识界,说彼等“经历行处与所缘”的言语是成立的吗?不,因为没有决定。因为这里所说的“意”并非只指由五门引生的意,没有这样的决定因。或者,正是考虑到这种诘难,才说天眼智等。由“如是色”等语,前世、过去、未来等智也在此处涉及。“否则”是指“色、声”等语。巴利
Sukhumarajādirūpanti aṇutajjārirūpamāha. Paramāṇurūpe pana vattabbameva natthi. Vatthuparittatāyāti etena anekakalāpagatāni bahūniyeva rūpāyatanāni samuditāni saṃhaccakāritāya sivikubbahanañāyena cakkhuviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayo, na ekaṃ katipayāni vāti dasseti. Nanu ca evaṃ sante cakkhuviññāṇaṃ samudāyārammaṇaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati samudāyasseva abhāvato. Na hi paramatthato samudāyo nāma koci atthi. Vaṇṇāyatanameva hi yattakaṃ yogyadese avaṭṭhitaṃ, sati paccayantarasamāyoge tattakaṃ yathāvuttena ñāyena cakkhuviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayo hoti avikappakattā tassa. Tadabhinihaṭaṃ pana manoviññāṇaṃ anekakkhattuṃ uppajjamānaṃ purimasiddhakappanāvasena samūhākārena saṇṭhānādiākārena ca pavattatīti kiṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa ekaṃ vaṇṇāyatanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ, udāhu anekānīti na codetabbametaṃ. Na hi paccakkhavisaye yuttimagganā yuttā. Kiñca bhiyyo accharāsaṅghātakkhaṇena anekakoṭisaṅkhāya cittuppattiyā pavattanato cittassa lahuparivattitāya samānepi ghaṭasarāvādivaṇṇānaṃ yogyadesāvaṭṭhāne purimamanasikārānurūpaṃ ‘‘ghaṭo’’ti vā ‘‘sarāvo’’ti vā paṭhamaṃ tāva eko manoviññāṇasantānena paricchijjati, pacchā itaro cakkhuviññāṇavīthiyā byavahitenāti avisesavidutāya pana ghaṭasarāvādibuddhiyā abhedāpattiparikappanāti. Īdisīpettha codanā acodanāti daṭṭhabbā. Khaṇaparittatāyāti pabandhakkhaṇassa ittaratāya. Pabandhavasena hi paccekaṃ rūpārūpadhammā virodhiavirodhipaccayasamāyoge lahuṃ dandhañca nirujjhanato parittakālā dīghakālā ca honti, sabhāvalakkhaṇavasena pana ekaparicchedā evāti. Yathā ca rūpāyatanaṃ, evaṃ itarānipi. Saddādayopi hi vatthuparittatādibhāvena labbhantīti. Accāsannāditāyāti ādi-saddena anāvajjanaṃ kenaci paṭicchannatāti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Visayidhammaṃ visesato sinoti bandhatīti visayoti anaññatthabhāvāpekkho visayoti āha ‘‘visayo anaññatthabhāvenā’’ti. Na hi cakkhuviññāṇādayo rūpāyatanādito aññasmiṃ ārammaṇe pavattantīti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viyāti gocaroti sambahulacāritāpekkho gocaroti āha ‘‘gocaro tattha caraṇenā’’ti. Bahulañhi cakkhuviññāṇādīhi rūpādayo gayhanti, na tathā manoviññāṇenāti. Tesanti manoviññāṇena gayhamānānaṃ rūpāyatanādīnaṃ. ‘‘Vacanassa anupapattito’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pañcadvāre pavattamanoviññāṇadhātuṃ sandhāya tesaṃ gocaravisayaṃ paccanubhotīti vacanaṃ upapajjatiyevāti? Na, niyamābhāvato. Na hi pañcadvārābhinihaṭaṃyeva mano idha ‘‘mano’’ti vuttanti niyamahetu atthīti, etaṃyeva vā codanaṃ manasi katvā dibbacakkhuñāṇādiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃvaṇṇotiādivacanato pubbenivāsaatītānāgataṃsañāṇādayopi idha sambhavanti. Itarathāti rūpaṃ saddantiādinā.
“食物……等等……以及精进等”,这是为了说明:依靠什么样的适业性,色身才能变得堪任好用,这里就是在指出它的缘。因为当食物正确消化,时节所生的食物也适宜,并且被正确运用,也就是被称为身心精进的努力已经发起时,由于轻快性等状态,身体就能胜任工作,随顺一切行动。或者,“食物……等等……以及精进等”这句话,也是在说明身体堪用和身体出问题这两方面的原因。因为饮食不均衡、不消化等,就会生起风等损害身体的因素。“随转者”这个词,应该像“胜利者招来怨恨”等句子那样,从表示原因的意义来理解。因为这里所说的“随转”,指的是觉醒的原因。或者,“随转者”是在显示:以平常所见等为方式而进入眼前的所缘,以及由亲依止缘所产生的堪用性等和身体上的快乐等,这些确实存在。因为对于不随转身心堪用性等的人来说,由于缺少上述亲依止和作意,就不会有那种进入眼前的状态。把心安放在所经验过的色等对象上,就是转向、把心朝向那里。与所经验过的色等相似或不相似,以及同它们相关联的相似或不相似,对这些的看见等,就是相似不相似关联的看见等;把心朝向与相似不相似关联的看见等,以及把心朝向看见等,这些就是缘,应当这样连接起来。“界扰动等”中的“等”字,还包括天神附身等情况。与那相似,就是与所见所闻相似。与那相应,就是系属于所见所闻。由某人所说,这是表示从信仰而来的传闻。“观察行相”,就是对各种意义的现起行相进行观察。在某些意义上。巴利
Bhojana…pe… ussāhādīhīti idaṃ yāya kammaññatāya rūpakāyassa kallatā hoti, tassā paccayanidassanaṃ. Bhojane hi sammāpariṇate sappāye ca utubhojane sammupayutte sammāpayogasaṅkhāte kāyikacetasikavīriye ca samāraddhe lahutādisabbhāvena kāyo kammakkhamo hoti sabbakiriyānukūloti. Atha vā bhojana…pe… ussāhādīhīti idaṃ kāyassa kalyatāya viya upaddutatāyapi kāraṇavacanaṃ. Visamabhojanāpariṇāmādito hi kāyassa upaddavakarā vātādayo uppajjantīti. Anuvattantassāti padaṃ ‘‘jayaṃ veraṃ pasavatī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 201) viya hetuatthavasena veditabbaṃ. Jāgaraṇanimittañhi idha anuvattanaṃ adhippetanti. Atha vā anuvattantassāti idaṃ pakatiyā diṭṭhādivasena āpāthagamanupanissayānaṃ kalyatādinibbattānaṃ kāyikasukhādīnaṃ sambhavadassanaṃ. Kāyakalyatādiṃ ananuvattantassa hi yathāvuttaupanissayābhogābhāvena vuttappakāraṃ āpāthagamanaṃ na siyāti. Yathānubhūte rūpādivisaye cittassa ṭhapanaṃ āvajjanaṃ cittapaṇidahanaṃ. Yathānubhūtena rūpādinā sadisaṃ asadisaṃ sambandhañca sadisāsadisasambandhaṃ, tassa dassanādi sadisāsadisasambandhadassanādi, cittapaṇidahanañca sadisāsadisa…pe… dassanādi ca citta…pe… dassanādayo te paccayāti yojetabbaṃ. Dhātukkhobhādīti ādi-saddena devatūpasaṃhārādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Taṃsadisatā diṭṭhasutasadisatā. Taṃsampayuttatā diṭṭhasutapaṭibaddhatā. Kenaci vutteti iminā saddhāya anussavanibbattataṃ āha. Ākāravicāraṇanti tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ upaṭṭhānākāravicāraṇaṃ. Katthaci atthe.
已经决定,就是指这样决定:我只应该生起善法。没有净信、没有爱润,是因为嗔心太重,所以说粗躁的人嗔心重。巴利
Niyamitassāti kusalameva mayā uppādetabbanti evaṃ niyamitassa. Pasādasinehābhāvo dosabahulatāya hotīti lūkhapuggalā dosabahulāti āha.
从处的意义上说,就是从因的意义上说。巴利
Āyatanabhāvatoti kāraṇabhāvato.
对于“有施物存在时”这句话,它是为了挡住某些人的过度主张:“就算没有真正把布施之物舍出去,仅仅凭心里生起念头,就已经积集了布施所成的善。”巴利
Vijjamānavatthusminti etena ‘‘vināpi deyyadhammapariccāgena cittuppādamatteneva dānamayaṃ kusalaṃ upacitaṃ hotī’’ti kesañci atidhāvanaṃ nivattitaṃ hotīti.
“法的听闻之宣告”就是“法听闻的宣告”。这里的“它”指的是:为了“我要布施声音”而设置场所、击鼓等,让这些发声之物运作起来。“思惟”就是一次又一次地生起心念。“在别处”是指在经里。“在他处”是指在阿毗达摩的篇章里。“不摄”这个词的义解,像“受用味”等解释,在后来的许多书里都有写到,但应该只在合适的地方引用。其中,从胜义来说,因为相施设并不存在,因为是其他处,所以相施设和六内处都不被法处所摄,应该这样来连接理解。巴利
Dhammasavanassa ghosanaṃ dhammasavanaghosanaṃ. Tassāti ‘‘saddadānaṃ dassāmī’’ti saddavatthūnaṃ ṭhānakaraṇabheriādīnaṃ sasaddappavattikaraṇassa. Cintanaṃ tathā tathā cittuppādanaṃ. Aññatthāti suttesu. Aparatthāti abhidhammapadesu. Apariyāpannāti padassa atthavaṇṇanā ‘‘paribhogaraso’’tiādikāya atthavaṇṇanāya parato bahūsu potthakesu likhīyati, yathāṭhāneyeva pana ānetvā vattabbā. Tattha paramatthato avijjamānattā lakkhaṇapaññattiyo aññāyatanattā cha ajjhattikāyatanāni asaṅgahitā dhammāyatanenāti yojetabbaṃ.
有人问:既然说“单门业在别的门生起”,那为什么还要说这句话呢?难道不是这样吗——就像在色等所缘中,一个心只取一个所缘,不会再去取别的所缘,因为这里指的是某一类特定的心;同样,当指的是某一种特定的业时,在身门等生起的单门业,就在那里完成,不会在别的门生起。那么,如果指的是笼统的业,那“在色等中,心只取一个所缘”这个例子就不成立了吗?不是的,因为这个例子是为了说明不相似的性质才举的。否则的话,作为意识的心能在六种境界中活动,那就该说“所缘不固定”,这样一来,门也会像所缘一样被说成“不固定”了。然而,虽然业确实也有在不同门之间活动的情况,但这里主要是依据多数情况下生起的模式、以及以哪个门为主,来说明身门业等的确定界限。因此,从杀生等状态这个共同层面,以统一的方式把握业时,由于业在语门等中也有生起,所以说“业不固定”,并据此说“在身门等中,单门业并非不在别的门生起”。至于在色等所缘中,心只取一个所缘,就是被那个所缘所限定,这是被当作特殊情况来把握的,所以说“所缘是固定的”。这里把握的是特定的心,而不是笼统的心。有人引经文说:“难道不是‘或以色为所缘……乃至以法为所缘,或无论何种’吗?”——所缘本身也是不确定地说的。确实如此。但在这里,在色等中只取一个所缘的心,离开那个所缘就无法生起;而业则分为身门业等不同类型,在语门等中并非不能生起。为了说明这个差别,经文中只取了“所缘”,没有取“门”,因此通过“所缘是固定的”等说法来表达这个意思。也就是说,在语门中也有杀生等业生起。巴利
‘‘Ekadvārikakammaṃ aññasmiṃ dvāre uppajjatī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu rūpādīsu ekārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ yathā na aññārammaṇaṃ hoti cittavisesassa adhippetattā, evaṃ kammavisese adhippete kāyadvārādīsu ekadvārikakammaṃ aññasmiṃ dvāre na uppajjati tattheva pariyositattā, atha kammasāmaññaṃ adhippetaṃ, rūpādīsu ekārammaṇanti idaṃ udāharaṇaṃ na siyāti? Na, asadisabhāvavibhāvanavasena udāhaṭattā, itarathā manoviññāṇabhūtaṃ idaṃ cittaṃ chasupi visayesu pavattanato anibaddhārammaṇanti ārammaṇaṃ sadisūdāharaṇabhāvena vucceyya ārammaṇaṃ viya dvārampi anibaddhanti. Yasmā pana satipi kammānaṃ dvārantaracaraṇe yebhuyyena vuttiyā tabbahulavuttiyā ca dvārakammānaṃ aññamaññaṃ vavatthānaṃ vakkhati, tasmā pāṇātipātādibhāvasāmaññena kammaṃ ekattanayavasena gahetvā tassa vacīdvārādīsu pavattisabbhāvato kammassa anibaddhattāti vuttanti āha ‘‘kāyadvārādīsu ekadvārikakammaṃ aññasmiṃ dvāre na nuppajjatī’’ti. Rūpādīsu pana ekārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ tenevārammaṇena paricchinnanti visiṭṭhameva gahitanti ārammaṇameva nibaddhanti vuttanti cittaviseso eva gahito, na cittasāmaññaṃ. ‘‘Nanu ca rūpārammaṇaṃ vā…pe… dhammārammaṇaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ vā panā’’ti ārammaṇampi aniyameneva vuttanti? Saccametaṃ, tattha pana yaṃ rūpādīsu ekārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ tena vinā nappavattati, kammaṃ pana kāyadvārikādibhedaṃ vacīdvārādīsu na nappavattatīti imassa visesassa jotanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ārammaṇameva gahitaṃ, dvāraṃ na gahitanti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘ārammaṇameva nibaddha’’ntiādinā. Vacīdvāre uppajjamānampi pāṇātipātādīti attho.
身业门的解说巴利
Kāyakammadvārakathāvaṇṇanā
用“业门等”这段话,既说明了应当阐明的内容本身,也说明了阐明的方法。依确定色与非确定色,是指依照《法集论》中所说的确定色与非确定色。否则,由业所生的身体中,心所依处也可能被纳入其中。这里所取的,是属于同一相续的执受身。因此,当说到“眼处等”时,不能说已摄入一种性根与心所依处,因为“眼处等,乃至以命根为限”这一表述已经明确了其组合方式。巴利
Kammadvārānantiādinā pakāsetabbassa sarūpaṃ pakāsanupāyañca dasseti. Niyatarūparūpavasenāti dhammasaṅgahe niddiṭṭhaniyatarūparūpavasena. Aññathā kammasamuṭṭhānikakāye hadayavatthupi gahetabbaṃ siyā. Ekasantatipariyāpanno upādinnakakāyo idha gahitoti cakkhāyatanādīti vuttesu eko bhāvo hadayavatthu ca gahitanti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘cakkhāyatanādīni jīvitapariyantānī’’ti sannivesassa vibhāvitattā.
在执取颤动之相后,因为想接着执取表色,有时会怀疑:呈现运动相的风界,是不是同时也带有表色的变化?为了断除这种怀疑,所以说“由第一速行等起”。以成为他处生起的因这种方式使它动转——这句话表明:他处生起就是运动,而在那个因上,所谓“作者”的作用只是假说。否则,诸法的刹那性和无作用性就都无法成立。“具有朝向彼方的变化状态”中,朝向彼方就是面向彼方,这种状态就是朝向彼方的状态,这本身就是变化;具有这种变化的风界,就是“具有朝向彼方之变化”。现在,为了显示这种朝向彼方的变化就是表色性,所以说“与意图俱生”等。通过“如是作已”等语句,显示了这段义释所获得的功德。其中,“转向”指意门转向。通过“因为三十二”等语句,表明不能否定它是表色的等起者。巴利
Vipphandamānavaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ viññattiggahaṇassa icchitattā calanākārāva vāyodhātu viññattivikārasahitāti kadāci āsaṅkeyyāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭhamajavanasamuṭṭhitā’’ti āha. Desantaruppattihetubhāvena cāletunti etena desantaruppatti calanaṃ, taṃnimitte ca kattubhāvo upacaritoti dasseti, aññathā khaṇikatā abyāpāratā ca dhammānaṃ na sambhaveyyāti. Tadabhimukhabhāvavikāravatīti taṃdisamabhimukho tadabhimukho, tassa bhāvo tadabhimukhabhāvo, so eva vikāro, taṃsamaṅginī vāyodhātu tadabhimukhabhāvavikāravatī. Idāni tadabhimukhabhāvavikā rassa viññattibhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘adhippāyasahabhāvī’’tiādi. Evañca katvātiādinā imissā atthavaṇṇanāya laddhaguṇaṃ dasseti. Tattha āvajjanassāti manodvārāvajjanassa. Yato bāttiṃsātiādinā tassa viññattisamuṭṭhāpakatā na sakkā paṭisedhetunti dasseti.
“能成为缘”——这句话是在说明:在完成前面所说的风界那种称为坚住与运动的作用时,那种行相的特殊性只是起辅助作用的条件。就像“无见有对”等说法一样,那种行相的特殊性只是大种的一种特定状态,从胜义上说并不是什么实有,所以说“显示了胜义上的不存在”。这样就否定了胜义上的心等起性。至于业等起性等,更是根本不可能存在。因此,如果前面所说的变化在胜义上是实有的,那它就会变成无因生,因为它不是从任何事物等起的。色法不可能无因,如果无因,就会变成常恒;而除了涅槃之外,没有任何真实法是常恒的。就像心等起性一样——以此表明:表色的心等起所造色性,是依假说而成立的。巴利
Paccayo bhavituṃ samatthoti etena yathāvuttavāyodhātuyā thambhanacalanasaṅkhātakiccanipphādane tassa ākāravisesassa sahakārīkāraṇabhāvamāha. Anidassanasappaṭighatādayo viya mahābhūtānaṃ avatthāvisesamattaṃ so ākāravisesoti paramatthato na kiñci hotīti ‘‘paramatthato abhāvaṃ dassetī’’ti āha. Paramatthato cittasamuṭṭhānabhāvo paṭisedhito. Kammasamuṭṭhānādibhāvassa pana sambhavoyeva natthīti yathāvuttavikārassa paramatthato sabbhāve nakutocisamuṭṭhitattā appaccayattaṃ āpannaṃ. Na hi rūpaṃ appaccayaṃ atthi, appaccayatte ca sati niccabhāvo āpajjati, na ca nibbānavajjo attho sabhāvadhammo nicco atthi. Cittasamuṭṭhānabhāvo viyāti viññattiyā cittasamuṭṭhānaupādārūpabhāvo upacārasiddhoti dasseti.
作为造作的表色。所谓“造作”,就是心的作用、心的运作。“因表色而被认知”——也就是“这个人做出这个”这种意图的显示,这在没有表色变化的树动等事物上看不到,但在手动等动作中可以看到。因此可以知道:存在一种不同于颤动之色的变化,它被称为身造作,是意图的令知者。而令知者作为因,是自身先了知之后,才让所应令知的意义被了知,并不是仅仅凭存在就能令知。所以,在执取颜色之后,也能执取变化。正如声音只有成为所缘境时才能显示意义,否则就不能。因此说“因为表色并非……”等。如果心等起色的运动形相就是表色,那么眼识缘取颤动之色时,也可能执取到表色。为了排除这个疑问,所以说“眼识的……”等。巴利
Viññattiyā karaṇabhūtāya. Yaṃ karaṇanti yaṃ cittakiriyaṃ cittabyāpāraṃ. Viññattiyā viññātattanti idamesa kāretīti yadetaṃ adhippāyavibhāvanaṃ, etaṃ viññattivikārarahitesu rukkhacalanādīsu na diṭṭhaṃ, hatthacalanādīsu pana diṭṭhaṃ, tasmā vipphandamānavaṇṇavinimutto koci vikāro atthi kāyikakaraṇasaṅkhātassa adhippāyassa ñāpakoti viññāyati. Ñāpako ca hetu ñāpetabbamatthaṃ sayaṃ ñātoyeva ñāpeti, na sabbhāvamattenāti vaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ vikāraggahaṇampi viññāyati. Tathā hi visayabhāvamāpanno eva saddo atthaṃ pakāseti, netaro. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi viññattī’’tiādi. Yadi pana cittajarūpānaṃ calanākāro viññatti, cakkhuviññāṇassa vipphandamānavaṇṇārammaṇattā tenapi sā gahitā siyāti āsaṅkāya nivattanatthaṃ āha ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇassā’’tiādi.
“像棕榈叶等色”这类说法,也表明表色是可由意识所了知的,而且唯由意识才能了知。以它来了知,所以叫“想”;对水等的想,就是“彼想”;彼想的相状,就是“彼想相”;它既是与水等俱行的方式,又是彼想相,所以叫“水……相”,即执取、了知那个相。“彼相”,就是显示水等的相。如果仅仅把握所说的变化就是把握意图的原因,那么,为什么没有把握先前约定的关联时,就不能把握意图呢?并非仅仅把握变化就是把握意图的原因,那又是什么呢?所以说“然而对此”等。巴利
Tālapaṇṇādirūpānītiādināpi viññattiyā viññātabbataṃ manoviññāṇeneva ca viññātabbataṃ dasseti. Sañjānāti etenāti saññāṇaṃ, tassa udakādino saññāṇaṃ taṃsaññāṇaṃ, tassa ākāro taṃsaññāṇākāro, udakādisahacārippakāro ca so taṃsaññāṇākāro cāti udakā…pe… kāro, taṃ gahetvā jānitvā. Tadākārassāti udakādiñāpanākārassa. Yadi yathāvuttavikāraggahaṇaṃyeva kāraṇaṃ adhippāyaggahaṇassa, atha kasmā aggahitasaṅketassa adhippāyaggahaṇaṃ na hotīti? Na kevalaṃ vikāraggahaṇameva adhippāyaggahaṇassa kāraṇaṃ, kiñcarahīti āha ‘‘etassa panā’’tiādi.
接着,“然而”等话,是通过推理让人明白表色应当被把握。所谓“与意图……无间”,是指在伴随意图的变化之后,紧接着生起的、被称为执取俱生色处的眼门识相续。“把握意图”,是指第三速行中确定意图的速行心。因为如果没有伴随意图的变化,就不会有对意图的把握,所以由这一点可以推知前面所说的变化。接着用“如是存在时”等话,以总结的方式显示所推知的意义。其中,“仅以执取水等”,是指执取棕榈叶等色之后,依靠先前已经建立的联系,仅仅由了知水等存在于那里。就像棕榈叶等与水等俱行的方式这一想相确实被了知,并不是因为无间缘;同样,执取颤动的色之后,依靠先前已经建立的联系,仅仅由了知想要去等意图,表色就被了知。如果没有那个表色,就不会有对这种意图的了知——这就是譬喻的配合。巴利
Atha panātiādinā viññattiyā anumānena gahetabbataṃ dasseti. Sādhippāya…pe… nantaranti adhippāyasahitavikārena sahajātavaṇṇāyatanaggahaṇasaṅkhātassa cakkhudvārikaviññāṇasantānassa anantaraṃ. Adhippāyaggahaṇassāti adhippāyavavatthāpakassa tatiyavāre javanassa. Adhippāyasahabhū vikārābhāve abhāvatoti etena yathāvuttavikāraṃ adhippāyaggahaṇena anuminoti. Evaṃ satītiādinā yathānumitamatthaṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Tattha udakādiggahaṇenevāti tālapaṇṇādīnaṃ vaṇṇaggahaṇānantarena purimasiddhasambandhānuggahitena udakādīnaṃ tattha atthibhāvavijānaneneva. Yathā tālapaṇṇādīnaṃ udakādisahacārippakārataṃ saññāṇākāro viññātoyeva hoti nānantariyakattā, evaṃ vipphandamānavaṇṇaggahaṇānantarena purimasiddhasambandhānuggahitena gantukāmatādiadhippāyavijānaneneva viññatti viññātā hoti tadabhāve abhāvatoti upamāyojanā.
“自性存在”是指随其含义而存在。“二种”是指从令知和所知两方面来说。为了说明:当身表这样生起时,那被称为“思”的业,其作为“身业”的性质就得以成立,因为应当以这身表为特征来认知,而不是以二十四缘中的任何一种缘作为缘,所以论中说“于彼门成立”等。由此也包含了在语门生起的杀生等,显示它们也被包含在内。或者,依于身门生起、成为身业的思,说“由彼门应被了知”;依于那思在其他门生起,说“由彼门而得名”。由于也确定了意门转向具有令表色生起的作用,所以说“十一种唯作心”。巴利
Sabhāvabhūtanti anvatthabhūtaṃ. Dvidhāti viññāpanato viññeyyato ca. Kāyaviññattiyā tathāpavattamānāya cetanāsaṅkhātassa kammassa kāyakammabhāvo nipphajjati tāya upalakkhitabbattā, na pana catuvīsatiyā paccayesu kenaci paccayabhāvatoti dassento ‘‘tasmiṃ dvāre siddhā’’tiādimāha. Tena vacīdvāruppannāpi pāṇātipātādayo saṅgahitāti tesaṃ saṅgahitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Atha vā kāyadvāruppannāya kāyakammabhūtāya cetanāya vasena ‘‘tena dvārena viññātabbabhāvato’’ti vuttaṃ, tassāyeva dvārantaruppannāya vasena ‘‘tena dvārena nāmalābhato’’ti. Manodvārāvajjanassapi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakabhāvo nicchitoti ‘‘ekādasannaṃ kiriyacittāna’’nti āha.
“行于门之间者”,是指以门与门之间的状态而转起。“门的混杂”,是指诸门互相混淆。因为一旦诸门取得门与门之间的状态,身门就会变成语门等,语门也会变成身门等,于是各自门所生的业也会混杂。因此说“业的混杂也是”。这样一来,身业……乃至……就无法确定。如果诸业行于其他业之间,由于身业等会变成语业等,那么“业的混杂就是门的混杂”——身业就是身业门,这样的互相区分就不可能。为了说明这个意思,说“诸业行于其他业之间时,也是同样的道理”。“行于其他业之间”,就是以其他业的样貌为特征。因此说“以门的状态”。“行于门之间”,就是在门与门之间生起。“于门”,是指在自己的门。“于其他”,是指在别的门。“诸业”,是指各门各自的业。“其他的”,是指其他门的业。“门不在门中行”,是指不以门与门之间的状态转起,或者不混杂到别的门里去。虽然表色在二十四缘中,不论以哪一种缘,都不成为思的缘,但只有当表色这样转起时,才有杀生等事,否则就没有,所以可以说表色是思的因,因此说“以诸门为因”。或者说,这是就身业、语业的确定而说的,所以讲“以诸门为因”。虽然说的是“以门确定业”,但因为也说了“互相确定”,所以“以业也确定门”这个意思同样成立。为了显示这一点,说了“不仅”等。“不行于门”,是说自己本身已被门所确定,并不是说不确定,意思正是确定。现在就用“观待业”等来说明这种确定。其中,就像被时间限定的心一样,诸门也被各门限定的业所限定,这就是简要的意思。巴利
Dvārantaracārinoti dvārantarabhāvena pavattanakā. Dvārasambhedāti dvārānaṃ saṅkaraṇato. Dvārānañhi dvārantarabhāvappattiyā sati kāyadvārassa vacīdvārādibhāvo, vacīdvārassa ca kāyadvārādibhāvo āpajjatīti taṃtaṃdvāruppannakammānampi saṅkaro siyā. Tenāha ‘‘kammasambhedopī’’ti. Evaṃ sati kāyakammaṃ…pe… vavatthānaṃ na siyā. Yadi kammāni kammantaracārīni honti, kāyakammādikassa vacīkammādikabhāvāpattito ‘‘kammasambhedā dvārasambhedopī’’ti kāyakammaṃ kāyakammadvāranti aññamaññavavatthānaṃ na siyāti imamatthamāha ‘‘kammānampi kammantaracaraṇe eseva nayo’’ti. Kammantaracaraṇaṃ kammantarūpalakkhaṇatā. Tenevāha ‘‘dvārabhāvenā’’ti. Dvārantaracaraṇaṃ dvārantaruppatti. Dvāreti attano dvāre. Aññasminti dvārantare. Kammānīti taṃtaṃdvārikakammāni. Aññānīti aññadvārikakammāni. Dvāre dvārāni na carantīti dvārantarabhāvena nappavattanti, dvārantaraṃ vā na saṅkamanti. Kiñcāpi viññattiyā catuvīsatiyā paccayesu yena kenaci paccayena cetanāya paccayabhāvo natthi, tathā pana viññattiyā pavattamānāya eva pāṇātipātādi hoti, nāññathāti siyā viññattiyā hetubhāvo cetanāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘dvārehi kāraṇabhūtehī’’ti. Kāyakammaṃ vacīkammanti kammavavatthānasseva vā kāraṇabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘dvārehi kāraṇabhūtehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadipi ‘‘dvārehi kammānī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘aññamaññaṃ vavatthitā’’ti pana vuttattā kammehipi dvārāni vavatthitānīti ayamatthopi siddhoyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Advāracārīhīti dvārānaṃ sayaṃ vavatthitabhāvamāha, na pana avavatthānaṃ, vavatthānamevāti adhippāyo. Idāni taṃ vavatthānaṃ vibhāveti kammānapekkhātiādinā. Tattha samayaniyamitena cittena samayo viya dvāraniyamitehi kammehi dvārāni niyamitānīti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho.
“如是自性故”,是指以作为门的身等为特征的自性。“令知……意”,是说身业和语业应当通过语表和身表来显示。“以身等”,是指以身表和语表。“因此”,是因为即使行于其他门的业,也仍然只以自己那一门为特征而转起。“业也不是门所有的”,是说业并不属于它所行于的那个其他门。“就是各自那一门”,是指唯独自己的门。“业之”,是指各自各自的业。如果门是由业来确定的,那么“业没有固定”这句话又怎么能成立呢?所以说“然而先前”等。巴利
Evaṃsabhāvattāti dvārabhūtehi kāyādīhi upalakkhaṇīyasabhāvattā. Āṇatti…pe… mānassāti kāyavacīkammānaṃ vacīkāyaviññattīhi pakāsetabbataṃ āha. Kāyādīhīti kāyavacīviññattīhi. Tasmāti yasmā dvārantare carantānipi kammāni sakena dvārena upalakkhitāneva caranti, tasmā. Nāpi kammaṃ dvārassāti yasmiṃ dvārantare kammaṃ carati, tassa dvārassa anattaniyassa. Taṃtaṃdvāramevāti sakadvārameva. Kammassāti sakasakakammassa. Yadi kammehi dvārāni vavatthitāni, ‘‘kammassa anibaddhattā’’ti idaṃ kathaṃ nīyatīti āha ‘‘pubbe panā’’tiādi.
“有表”,就是表色。“它的”,指业的。“以某种方式”,指以二十四种缘当中的某一种方式。“与它俱生”等这句话,是用来说明:只有身表存在时,身业才存在,不是别的样子;这是间接地说明表色是业的因。所以他说“以生起和住立的状态而说”。“依照所说的决定”等,是说明业以生起和住立为状态时没有偏差。其中,“依照所说的决定”,指依照注释书中所说的、称为确定规则的那种决定。“于门行”,指在其他门而行。巴利
Sāti viññatti. Tassāti kammassa. Kenaci pakārenāti catuvīsatiyā paccayappakāresu kenaci pakārena. Taṃsahajātāti etena kāyaviññattiyā sabbhāveyeva kāyakammassa sabbhāvo, nāññathāti pariyāyena viññattiyā kammassa kāraṇabhāvaṃ vibhāveti. Tenevāha ‘‘uppattiṭṭhānabhāvena vuttā’’ti. Yathāvuttaniyamenātiādinā kammassa uppattiṭṭhānabhāve byabhicārābhāvamāha. Tattha yathāvuttaniyamenāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttappakārena vavatthānayuttisaṅkhātena niyamena. Dvāracaraṇeti aññadvāracaraṇe.
语业门的讨论注释巴利
Vacīkammadvārakathāvaṇṇanā
这里说“以四支”,是为了说明经中提到的那些支——也就是“只说善语,不说恶语;只说法,只说可爱语,只说真实语,不说虚妄语”(《相应部》1.213;《经集·善语经》)——它们的思心所自性,所以才说“善语之说”等。“如是转起”,就是依善语之说等方式而转起。“俱生”,就是一同生起,因为语表若离开声音就不可能存在。正如说“由彼语而有表”。先说了“语”“言”“路”等(《法集论》636)并非极微细的声音之语,然后以“由彼语而有表”把语表和那声音结合起来说明。因此,声处就像色处一样,由于依处有限等缘故,也有非根所行的境界;正是基于这个意思,才说“由彼语……而表”。巴利
Catūhi aṅgehīti ettha ‘‘subhāsitaṃyeva bhāsati, no dubbhāsitaṃ. Dhammaṃyeva, piyaṃyeva, saccaṃyeva bhāsati, no alika’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.213; su. ni. subhāsitasutta) yāni aṅgāni sutte vuttāni, tesaṃ cetanāsabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘subhāsitabhāsanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathāpavattāti subhāsitabhāsanādibhāvena pavattā. Saha sambhūtattāti saheva uppannattā. Na hi vacīviññatti saddarahitā atthi. Tathā hi ‘‘yā tāya vācāya viññattī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vācāgirā byapatho’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 636) nātisukhumaṃyeva saddavācaṃ vatvā ‘‘yā tāya vācāya viññattī’’ti, tāya saddhiṃ yojetvā vacīviññattiyā vuttattā rūpāyatanaṃ viya vatthuparittatādinā saddāyatanampi anindriyagocaro atthīti ca adhippāyena ‘‘yā tāya…pe… viññāyatī’’ti āha.
现在,为了显示《大注》的主张——即“寻的扩散之声不是耳识所能认识”——与圣典相违,因为圣典中已经通说心等起之声是耳识的所缘,所以说了“心等起”等话。这样,先站在结集者的意趣上,显示《大注》的主张应当被否定,然后现在站在自己的意趣上,为了会通它,而说了“然而在《大注》中”等话。诸大种以撞击的方式生起,而成为声音的依处,所以声音与撞击一同生起。“彼缘之状态”,就是指对所执受之物的撞击成为缘的状态。在心等起的大种中,存在一种特殊的行相,能够成为心所生的地界对所执受之物加以撞击的缘。正因为具有那种行相,那地界才撞击所执受之物。这个道理应当依照前面所说的方式来理解,所以说了“应依所述之理而了知”之后,又用“他们之变异”等话来说明所述之理。其中,“互相为缘的状态”就是所说的“彼缘之状态”。其他一切方法,就是自己所说的“非心等起者,以此显示胜义上的不存在”等方法。而注疏中所说的方法,就是“应依前文所述之理而了知”,也就是注疏中已经说过的。巴利
Idāni avisesena cittasamuṭṭhānasaddassa sotaviññāṇārammaṇatā pāḷiyaṃ vuttāti vitakkavipphārasaddo na sotaviññeyyoti mahāaṭṭhakathāvādassa pāḷiyā virodhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cittasamuṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ saṅgahakārassa adhippāye ṭhatvā mahāaṭṭhakathāvādassa paṭisedhetabbataṃ dassetvā idāni attano adhippāye ṭhatvā taṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Saṅghaṭṭanākārena pavattānaṃ bhūtānaṃ saddassa nissayabhāvato saṅghaṭṭanena saheva saddo uppajjati. Tappaccayabhāvoti upādinnakaghaṭṭanassa paccayabhāvo. Cittajapathavīdhātuyā upādinnakaghaṭṭane paccayo bhavituṃ samattho cittasamuṭṭhānamahābhūtānaṃ eko ākāraviseso atthi. Tadākārattā hi tesaṃ pathavīdhātu upādinnakaṃ ghaṭṭetīti imamatthaṃ vuttānusārena veditabbattā ‘‘vuttanayeneva veditabbo’’ti vatvā tameva vuttanayaṃ ‘‘tabbikārāna’’ntiādinā vibhāveti. Tattha aññamaññassa paccayabhāvo tappaccayabhāvo vuttoti attho. Aññampi sabbaṃ vidhānanti ‘‘na cittasamuṭṭhānāti etena paramatthato abhāvaṃ dassetī’’tiādinā attanā vuttavidhānaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttavidhānaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabba’’nti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttamevāti.
各个法依靠各自的缘生起,再在别处辗转生起,这叫“他处辗转生起性”。“已得习行”,就是已经得过先前的加行。“唯以心”,就是唯以第一心。他们驳斥“七个速行心生起七个字母”的说法,而主张属于一个速行轮转的诸心只生起一个字母。虽然以第一心也能完成撞击,但仅一个心多次生起就有某种差别,因此不能说:由前速行等起的诸撞击已得习行,由第七速行等起的撞击生起清晰的字母,这并没有支持作用。然而,由于已得加行,即使以第一心,撞击也有力,所以注疏中或许说“没有支持作用”;这一切都应审察之后才接受。巴利
Attano attano paccayuppannassa desantare pārampariyena uppādanaṃ desantaruppādanaparamparatā. Laddhāsevanenāti laddhapubbābhisaṅkhārena. Cittenevāti paṭhamacitteneva. ‘‘Satta javanāni satta akkharāni nibbattentīti vādaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ekajavanavārapariyāpannāni cittāni ekamakkharaṃ nibbattentī’’ti vadanti. Kiñcāpi paṭhamacittenapi ghaṭṭanā nipphajjati, ekasseva pana bahuso pavattanena atthi koci visesoti purimajavanasamuṭṭhitāhi ghaṭṭanāhi paṭiladdhāsevanena sattamajavanena samuṭṭhitā ghaṭṭanā paribyattamakkharaṃ nibbattetīti upatthambhanaṃ natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Laddhābhisaṅkhārena pana paṭhamacittenapi ghaṭṭanā balavatī hotīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘upatthambhanakiccaṃ natthī’’ti vuttaṃ siyā, sabbametaṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
意业门论注释巴利
Manokammadvārakathāvaṇṇanā
为了说明“正如一切身表、语表都有身门、语门的状态,一切心也都有可能有意门的状态”,注疏中先说了“不应说‘这个意不是意门’”,然后为了显示以意为门的那类法,又说了“这个名为思”等等,因此论师说“是为了显示那以意为门者”。然而,就像三种、四种身业和语业因为是门,所以被称为身业门、语业门一样,由于所说的贪欲等是门,作为轮回之因的世间善和不善相应的心,就被确定为意业门,应当这样理解。当思开始执行自己的作用时,与它相应的诸法也各自开始执行自己的作用,所以说思让它们在各各自的作用中运转起来。当它们这样运转时,思又让相应法在同一所缘上不散乱,并使它们发挥各自的作用。为了显示相应法这种所说的不散乱、聚合、聚集、令发挥作用、使起作用——也就是聚集和思之间的差别,论师说了“触等诸法”等话。所谓“如是作”,就是像触等诸法各自致力于各自作用那样去作。正是通过如上所说的不散乱、起作用的方式,应当理解这就是对相应法的作和运转。所谓“由于是业灭尽者”,意思是说,业已灭尽的心具有业门的状态是不合理的。因此他们说“业道论只是世间性的”。巴利
‘‘Sabbāyapi kāyavacīviññattiyā kāyavacīdvārabhāvo viya sabbassapi cittassa manodvārabhāvo sambhavatī’’ti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ nāma mano manodvāraṃ na hotīti na vattabbo’’ti vatvā taṃdvāravantadhammadassanatthaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ nāma cetanā’’tiādi vuttanti āha ‘‘yassa dvāraṃ mano, taṃ dassanatthaṃ vutta’’nti. Yathā pana tividhacatubbidhakāyavacīkammānaṃ dvārabhāvato kāyakammadvāravacīkammadvārāni vuttāni, evaṃ manokammanti vuttaabhijjhādīnaṃ dvārabhāvato vaṭṭahetubhūtalokiyakusalākusalasampayuttamano eva manokammadvāranti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cetanāya attano kiccaṃ āraddhāya sampayuttāpi taṃ taṃ sakiccaṃ ārabhantīti sā ne sakicce pavatteti nāma, tathā pavattentī ca sampayutte ekasmiṃ ārammaṇe avippakiṇṇe karoti byāpāreti cāti vuccati, tathā sampayuttānaṃ yathāvuttaṃ avippakiṇṇakaraṇaṃ sampiṇḍanaṃ āyūhanaṃ byāpārāpādanaṃ byāpāraṇaṃ cetayananti āyūhanacetayanānaṃ nānattaṃ dassento ‘‘phassādidhammehī’’tiādimāha. Tathākaraṇanti yathā phassādayo sakasakakicce pasutā bhavanti, tathā karaṇaṃ. Teneva yathāvuttena avippakiṇṇabyāpāraṇākārena sampayuttānaṃ karaṇaṃ pavattananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kammakkhayakarattāti kammakkhayakaramanassa kammadvārabhāvo na yujjatīti adhippāyo. Yato ‘‘kammapathakathā lokiyā evā’’ti vadanti.
因果作用即使发生在同一时刻,也完全可以像有前后时间那样来表述。比如在缘起中,为了说明“依于眼和诸色而生起眼识”,就说了“或者”等话。所谓“推动作用”,说的是两种表色。因为这种作用必须由心等起的身业和语业——也就是身表和语表——来推动,或者说由前前的身表和语表来推动,所以说“以身和语作推动作用”,这是因为那些被推动的四大种就是这样生起的。或者,“以身和语”指的是身表和语表。“推动作用”指的是使色身僵硬、移动的作用,以及对所执受色的撞击作用。因为这种作用被说成“能成为使色身僵硬、移动的缘”,以及“能成为撞击所执受色的缘”,所以它是由身表和语表产生的。这样一来,“作为推动作用所依的身和语”以及“以身体等作为工具,作推动、贪欲等作用,就像用斧头等来砍伐等”这个说法也就成立了。为了显示不只是维持的状态下才有存在,而是在道还没有断除的情况下也存在,所以说“在未灭尽时”。应当知道,身体等的未断除,正是因为以它们为所依的烦恼没有被断除。“以身体等作为工具,作推动、贪欲等作用”这句话,是通过推动、贪欲等作用的生起来说明思的生起。基于这个意图,就说“这样……是合理的”。这样说来,有身体就有语言等等说法也就顺理成章了。至于“以哪种思”这个工具的说法,则是为了显示身体等以及推动、贪欲等作用都以思为因。巴利
Samānakālāpi kāraṇaphalakiriyā pubbāparakālā viya vattuṃ yuttāyeva. Seyyathāpi paṭiccasamuppāde ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Copanakiriyanti viññattidvayaṃ āha. Tassā hi cittasamuṭṭhānakāyasaddavācāhi kāyavacīviññattīhi eva vā purimapurimāhi pavattetabbattā ‘‘kāyavācāhi copanakiriyaṃ karotī’’ti vuttaṃ tabbikārānaṃ bhūtānaṃ tathāpavattanato. Atha vā kāyavācāhīti kāyavacīviññattīhi . Copanakiriyanti rūpakāyassa thambhanacalanakiriyaṃ upādinnakaghaṭṭanakiriyañca. Esā hi kiriyā ‘‘rūpakāyaṃ thambhetuṃ cāletuṃ paccayo bhavituṃ samattho’’ti, ‘‘upādinnakaghaṭṭanassa paccayabhūto’’ti ca vuttattā kāyavacīviññattīhi nipphajjatīti. Evañca katvā ‘‘copanakiriyānissayabhūtā kāyavācā’’ti, ‘‘kāyādīhi karaṇabhūtehi copanābhijjhādikiriyaṃ karonti vāsiādīhi viya chedanādi’’nti ca idampi vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ bhavati. Na kevalaṃ dharamānatāva sabbhāvo, atha kho maggena asamucchinnatāpīti dassento ‘‘anirodhitevā’’ti āha. Asamucchinnatā ca kāyādīnaṃ tadupanissayakilesāsamucchedenevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Kāyādīhi karaṇabhūtehi copanābhijjhādikiriyaṃ karontī’’ti etena copanābhijjhādikiriyānibbattidvārena cetanānibbattiyeva vuttāti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘evañca…pe… yujjantī’’ti āha. Evañca katvā kāye sati vācāya satītiādivacanaṃ anulomitaṃ hoti. Yāya cetanāyāti karaṇaniddeso pana kāyādīnaṃ copanābhijjhādikiriyāya ca cetanāhetukattadassanatthaṃ vuttoti.
从自性、助益作用以及道存在时的状态来看,觉支都包含在道中,所以说“并非不可能”等等。巴利
Sabhāvato upakārakato magge sati sabbhāvato ca bojjhaṅgā magge antogadhāti āha ‘‘na ca na sakkā’’tiādi.
有人说:未达到业道的(不善思等)也在各自的门中归类。也就是说,就像已达到业道的那样,未达到业道的(不善思等)虽然在别的门中生起,也仍然只在各自的门中得到名称。如果这样说的话,就与注释书相违,而且第二种含义也就不存在了。因此,“在各自的门中归类”的意思是:未达到业道的不善思等在哪个门中生起,就通过那个门来给它们命名。说它们在那里被摄属,是因为使它们成为属于各自那一门的。就像已达到业道的、称为身业等的思,即使在别的门中生起,也仍然只得到身业等的名称,未达到业道的不善思等则不是这样。它们在哪个门中生起,就通过那个门得到“身恶行”“语恶行”等名称。这样,给它们命名就是说使它们成为属于各自那一门的。正因如此,注释书中说:“虽然在语门中达到了推动的业道,但由于未达到,所以不是身业,仅仅名为语恶行。”巴利
Kammapathaṃ appattānampi taṃtaṃdvāre saṃsandananti yathā kammapathaṃ pattānaṃ, evaṃ kammapathaṃ appattānampi satipi dvārantaruppattiyaṃ yathāsakaṃ dvāreheva nāmaggahaṇanti vadanti, evaṃ sati aṭṭhakathāya virodho. Dutiyatthassa ca abhāvo siyā, tasmā taṃtaṃdvāre saṃsandananti yasmiṃ yasmiṃ dvāre kammapathaṃ appattā akusalacetanādayo pavattā, tāsaṃ tena teneva dvārena nāmaggahaṇaṃ. Taṃ pana taṃtaṃdvārapakkhikabhāvakaraṇato tattha avarodhananti vuttaṃ. Yathā hi kammapathaṃ pattā kāyakammādisaṅkhātā cetanā dvārantare uppannāpi kāyakammādināmameva labhanti, na evaṃ kammapathaṃ appattā. Tā pana yattha yattha dvāre uppajjanti, tena teneva dvārena kāyaduccaritaṃ vacīduccaritantiādināmaṃ labhanti. Evaṃ nāmaggahaṇameva hi tesaṃ taṃtaṃdvārapakkhikakaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kiñcāpi vacīdvāre copanappattaṃ kammapathaṃ, appattatāya pana kāyakammaṃ na hoti, kevalaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ nāma hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.
虽然杀生等思也能在语门等其他门中生起,但按照前面所说的,以多分和常行的情况来运作,从而判定它属于身业等,并判定身等属于各自的门,这就是业门的不混杂。因为这是以不混杂的方式确立诸业门。针对这一点,注释书将在“由命令而生起的当中”加以说明。不过有些人说:“在每个门中显示多种业的运作,也是一种门的结合。”为了显示如同已运作的瞋恚就成为业道,这里显示了“愿这些有情被杀害”这样的瞋恚运作。由于它是身门思的辅助因,所以获得身业的称呼;而贪欲等是以将他人之物归为己有的方式运作,并不是以“愿这些有情被杀害”等方式运作,所以没有意业的称呼;或者,由于它不是思的自性,因此不以杀生等来称呼——意思是,不应以杀生等的性质来说。此处,就是指在不予称呼的状态中。巴利
Satipi pāṇātipātādicetanāya vacīdvārādīsu pavattiyaṃ yathāvuttayebhuyyatabbahulavuttiyā kāyakammādibhāvavavatthāpanaṃ kāyādikassa taṃtaṃdvārabhāvavavatthāpanañca kammadvārābhedanaṃ. Tañhi kammadvārānaṃ asaṃkiṇṇabhāvena patiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘āṇattisamuṭṭhitesū’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vakkhati. Keci pana ‘‘ekekasmiṃ dvāre anekesaṃ kammānaṃ pavattidassanampi dvārasaṃsandana’’nti vadanti. Yathā pavatto byāpādo kammapatho hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ime sattā haññantū’’ti pavatti byāpādassa dassitā. Kāyadvārikacetanāya sahakārīkāraṇabhāvato kāyakammavohāralābhā, abhijjhādīnaṃ parasantakassa attano pariṇāmanavasena ‘‘ime sattā haññantū’’tiādinā ca appavattattā manokammavohāravirahā, acetanāsabhāvato vā pāṇātipātādivasena abbohārikā, pāṇātipātādibhāvena na vattabbāti attho. Etthāti abbohārikabhāve.
十种神变……详细解释就是这里的意思。巴利
Dasavidhā iddhi…pe… tabbā vitthārenāti adhippāyo.
因此,所谓“所意指的是”,是指说“不善语业在意门中生起”的人所意指的内容。为什么说“不是在布萨犍度中所说”呢?难道他不是从布萨犍度中引用了经文吗?虽然引用了,但那里其实并没有说,而他却以为那里说了。为了说明这一点,所以说“正是在那里没有说”等等。巴利
Tenādhippetanti ‘‘akusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ manodvāre samuṭṭhātī’’ti vadantena adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Na uposathakkhandhake vutta’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tena uposathakkhandhakato suttaṃ āhaṭanti? Kiñcāpi āhaṭaṃ, tattha avuttoyeva pana so tena vuttoti gahitoti dassento ‘‘tattha avuttamevā’’tiādimāha.
他们说:有人主张,往生善趣或恶趣并不是由所造的善业和恶业决定的,而是由五蕴等造成的;他们执取这种观点,并借着“没有布施”等说法来坚持邪见,因此才说“邪见……乃至做出各种争论”。所谓“以贪等为主”,是为了说明:即使嗔恚等烦恼也存在,但当身门和语门中的思特别强而有力,其他烦恼没有那么强时,这时的思因为处于主导地位,就得到了身业和语业的名称。而这种主导地位,可以通过杀生等业道的完成来辨认。反过来,当身门和语门中贪等烦恼特别强而有力,思没有那么强时,这时虽然思也存在,但因为不处于主导地位,就不能得到身业和语业的名称。至于贪等烦恼,因为处于主导地位,即使它们也伴随身门和语门的动作,仍按照它们自身的界定而被称为意业——这一点也是在说明这个道理。有些人说:“因为在这三门中还没有达到业道的程度,而且意业和在三门中生起的思是同时进行的,所以这里的思不被称为业。”这种说法应该只是就贪等以自身为主导的性质而言的。或者也可以说,因为思在直接意义上就是业,所以不应被摄入间接之业中,因此说它是“不共的”。然而,就思自身的本性来说,在这里它也被称为业。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,我说思就是业。”注释书里也用“在那门中完成的思”等说法,把思当作主要因素来讲。因此又说“依其自性,它本身就是意业”等等。或者,与已经达到业道程度的贪等一同生起在身门、语门中的思,就身业和语业而言是不共的,因为它属于名为思的意业。如果贪等是主导,思不是主导,那么照这样说,在这里业就是贪等,而不是思,或者思只是贪等的同党——针对这个疑问,所以经中说“诸比丘,有三种……”等。“思……乃至只在意门中生起”这句话,是为了显示在意门中,思和贪等在意业这一点上没有差别,因此说“思……乃至意趣”。思就是思业,贪等是与思相应的业,这里面的差别仅此而已。在这里应当看到:因为思并没有被怀疑具有身业和语业的性质,而且不善的身业和语业不会在意门中生起,所以“不共”并不是针对这一点说的。巴利
‘‘Sugatiduggatīsu upapajjanaṃ sukatadukkaṭakammato na hoti, khandhasivādīhi pana hotīti gahetvā ‘natthi dinna’ntiādinā parāmasantassa vasena ‘micchādiṭṭhi…pe… paribhaṇḍādīni karotī’ti vutta’’nti vadanti. Abhijjhādipadhānattāti etena vijjamānesupi byāpādādīsu yadā kāyavacīdvāresu cetanā balavatī hoti, na tathā itare, tadā padhānabhāvato cetanā kāyakammaṃ vacīkammanti ca vohāraṃ labhati. So kho panassā padhānabhāvo pāṇātipātādisiddhiyā viññāyati. Yadā pana tesuyeva dvāresu abhijjhādayo balavanto honti, na tathā cetanā, tadā tattha vijjamānāpi cetanā apadhānabhāvato kāyakammaṃ vacīkammanti ca vohāraṃ na labhati. Abhijjhādayo pana padhānabhāvato satipi kāyaṅgavācaṅgacopane sakena vavatthānena manokammantveva vuccantīti dasseti. Ye pana ‘‘tīsupi dvāresu kammapathabhāvena appattiyā dvārattayepi kammapathappattamanokammena saha pavattiyā ca cetanā ettha kammanti na vuccatī’’ti vadanti, tehi abhijjhādīnaṃ padhānasabhāvaṃyeva sandhāya vuttaṃ siyā. Atha vā cetanāya nippariyāyakammabhāvato pariyāyakamme anavarodhetabbattā ‘‘abbohārikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Attano sabhāveneva pana sā etthāpi kammanti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘cetanāhaṃ, bhikkhave, kammaṃ vadāmī’’tiādi (kathā. 539). Aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘tasmiṃ dvāre siddhā cetanā’’tiādinā cetanāyeva padhānaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sabhāveneva sā manokamma’’ntiādi. Atha vā kammapathappattaabhijjhādīhi kāyavacīdvāre sahajātā cetanā kāyavacīkammavasena abbohārikā cetanāsaṅkhātamanokammattāti. Yadi abhijjhādayo padhānā, na cetanā, evaṃ sati abhijjhādayo cettha kammaṃ, na cetanā, abhijjhādipakkhikā vā sā siyāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘tividhā, bhikkhave’’tiādi. ‘‘Cetanāpi…pe… manodvāre eva samuṭṭhahantī’’ti idaṃ manodvāre cetanāya abhijjhādīhi manokammabhāve nibbisesabhāvadassananti katvā ‘‘cetanā…pe… adhippāyo’’ti āha. Cetanā cetanākammaṃ, abhijjhādayo cetanāsampayuttakammanti ettakameva hi ettha visesoti. Ettha ca cetanāya kāyavacīkammabhāvo siyāti āsaṅkāya abhāvato manodvāre akusalakāyavacīkammānaṃ anuppattito ca abbohārikāti na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“以离为殊胜”这句话,是就“离”而说明思才是主要的。其中,在“诸比丘,有三种身思”等经文中,显示了它是杀生等的对治。又因为在《发趣论》中,只有思被称为“业缘”,而不是离,也不是贪等,所以应当知道:从直接意义上说,业就是“思”;而无贪等则被说为“属于思一类的”。在无混淆地界定业门时,说“守护”;反过来则说“破坏”,意思是说:不论舍弃还是不舍弃守护与破坏,都是就思而说的。巴利
Virativisiṭṭhāti viratito cetanāya padhānabhāvamāha. Tattha ‘‘tividhā, bhikkhave, kāyasañcetanā’’tiādinā (kathā. 539) āgamamhi ‘‘pāṇātipātādipaṭipakkhabhūtā’’ti yuttiṃ dasseti. Yasmā ca paṭṭhāne cetanāva ‘‘kammapaccayo’’ti vuttā, na virati, abhijjhādayo vā, tasmā nippariyāyena kammaṃ ‘‘cetanā’’ti anabhijjhādayo ‘‘cetanāpakkhikā vā’’ti vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Asaṅkarato kammadvārāni vavatthapento ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti, vipariyāyena ‘‘bhindatī’’ti vuttoti rakkhaṇabhindanāni anāsetvā nāsetvā ca kathananti vuttānīti.
第三种分类只在第一和第四识门中可得,在其他地方则不可得,因为没有说到“耳、鼻”等;或者换个说法,在未加区分的略说中也可得到。由于律仪防护而转起的巴帝摩卡戒,若被破坏就是恶行,所以说“恶行是杀生等的思”。其余的不善法则是脱离了律仪防护、与贪和忧相应、以它们为主导,或者与念相对立的不善法。以对所缘的心放舍而转起的不善心生起,就是放逸。因为具有被精进驱除的性质,所以称昏沉睡眠为“懈怠”;或者说,以昏沉睡眠为主导的心生起,就是懈怠。巴利
Tatiyo vikappo paṭhamacatutthaviññāṇadvāresuyeva labbhati, na itarattha ‘‘sotaṃ ghāna’’ntiādinā avuttattā, itarathāpi vā avibhattike niddese labbhati. Yato saṃvaravasena pātimokkhasīlaṃ pavattati, taṃ dussīlyanti āha ‘‘dussīlyaṃ pāṇātipātādicetanā’’ti. Itarā saṃvaravinimuttā abhijjhādomanassayuttā tappadhānā vā akusaladhammā satipaṭipakkhā akusalā dhammā. Ārammaṇe cittavossaggavasena pavatto akusalacittuppādo pamādo. Vīriyapanodanabhāvato thinamiddhaṃ ‘‘kosajja’’nti vuttaṃ, thinamiddhappadhāno vā cittuppādo.
“不纯净”就是不完备,被别的东西混进来了。因为一个门作为另一个门中间之业的门时,就好像被那个门混进来了。所以论中说:“妄语等也有在身门转起的性质。”不过有些人说:“因为无法认知的中间门心并不在中间间隙中转起,所以说是‘纯净’。”这种说法是考虑到:即使有许多速行心的系列,也会以身业等状态持续不断地转起。“不相违”的意思是:先确定它是不善的身业等,然后说它是不律仪,接着又说它能在语不律仪门等中生起;即使生起于其他门,以身门特征来说的不律仪也仍然是“身门的”,这样解说时并不矛盾。现在,用“不律仪”等来说明那不矛盾的方式。“在自门”就是在自己的门中。即使不律仪生起于其他门,也说它是在自门生起的。由此应当知道:即使生起于语不律仪门,身不律仪也是就其所依的身不律仪门来说生起的。其他情况也是同样的道理。“业在其他门”是为了让业在其他门中运作的情形变得明显而说的。巴利
Asuddhatāti akevalatā aññena sammissatā. Dvārañhi dvārantarikakammassa dvāraṃ hontaṃ tena missitaṃ viya hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘musāvādādinopi kāyadvāre pavattisabbhāvā’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘aviññeyyamānantarānaṃ dvārantaracittānaṃ antarantarā appavattito suddhanti vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ anekassapi javanavārassa kāyakammādibhāvena pabandhanavasena pavatti atthīti katvā vuttaṃ. Aviruddhaṃ hotīti akusalakāyakammādibhāvena avadhāretvā asaṃvaraṃ vatvā puna tasseva vācāasaṃvaradvārādīsu uppattivacanaṃ kāyadvārūpalakkhito asaṃvaro dvārantare pavattopi kāyadvāriko evāti evaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya sati na virujjhatīti attho. Idāni taṃ avirujjhanākāraṃ ‘‘asaṃvaro hī’’tiādinā vibhāveti. Sadvāreti attano dvāre. Asaṃvaro dvārantare uppajjamānopi sadvāravasena uppannoti vuccatīti etena vācāasaṃvaradvāre uppannopi kāyiko asaṃvaro copanakāyaasaṃvaradvāravasena uppannotveva vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo itaratthāpi. Kammaṃ aññadvāreti kammassa dvārantaracaraṇaṃ pākaṭanti katvā vuttaṃ.
当“如是”一词被这样理解时,只是在“称为动摇的身不防护门”这一点上执取了“不防护”。注释书里说,只有达到业道状态的才成为业,所以他说“由于达到业道状态,而成为语业、意业”。“其余”指的是没有被其他门标识出来的部分。“不如此说”的意思是不称为身业。将在那里——也就是在业道相摄的讨论中——再说明。因为在“那在身门中达到动摇的不善就是身业”等说法中,以及在“依动摇的身不防护门而生起的不善就是身业”等说法中,当那些已达业道、成为不防护的语业等到达身业等状态时,是通过“四种语恶行就是不善的语业”这类排除性的表述来否定的,应当这样理解。他这样说,是有所指的。其意图是:应当看到它们被包含在内,因为依止于资具的活命遍净戒,是要靠智与精进来成就的。巴利
Evaṃsatīti copanasaṅkhāte kāyaasaṃvaradvāre asaṃvaroti ettake eva gahite. Kammapathabhāvappattasseva kammabhāvo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttoti āha ‘‘kammapathabhāvappattatāya vacīmanokamma’’nti. Sesanti dvārantarānupalakkhitaṃ. Tathā na vuccatīti kāyakammanti na vuccatīti attho. Tattheva vakkhāmāti kammapathasaṃsandane vakkhāma. ‘‘So hi kāyadvāre copanappatto akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. aṭṭha. kammapathasaṃsandanakathā) ‘‘copanakāyaasaṃvaradvāravasena uppanno akusalaṃ kāyakammameva hotī’’tiādinā ca vacīkammādīnañca kammapathappattānaṃ asaṃvarabhūtānaṃ kāyakammādibhāve āpanne ‘‘catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ akusalaṃ vacīkammameva hotī’’tiādinā apavādena nivatti daṭṭhabbāti evaṃ vakkhamānataṃ sandhāyāha. Antogadhatā daṭṭhabbā paccayasannissitaājīvapārisuddhisīlānaṃ ñāṇavīriyehi sādhetabbattāti adhippāyo.
不善业道论的注释巴利
Akusalakammapathakathāvaṇṇanā
以他自己的本质来说,就是依其自性。当思正在运作时,对于作为命根之缘的诸大种,如果以加行为因,使得那些依这些大种为缘而生起的大种不再生起,那么这种促成如此加行的思,就叫作杀生。因为已经受过加行的大种,不再像先前的大种那样清明,所以不能成为同类大种的因。即使只有一次加行,由于速行心多次生起而完成任务,又因反复串习,依那使行为完成的思,加行就成为重大。有时即使对微小和巨大的有情,加行是一样的,但杀害巨大有情者的思会生起得更强烈,这就是所缘的重大。这两者都是因为思的力量强大才成立的,所以说“依加行……等”。所谓“即使如所说的缘反过来时”,就是说加行、所缘等缘不重大时。所谓“由种种缘”,就是由具德等缘。在这里,被杀者具有功德而导致大罪,应当看作和所缘重大一样。依烦恼和加行二者的软弱与强烈,可以配合小罪与大罪。有情、有情的想、杀心、前分资具,以及由杀思所发起的加行——具足这五支的杀生思,应当看作不离这五支。这个道理也适用于不与取等。巴利
Sarasena attano sabhāvena. Yāya cetanāya pavattamānassa jīvitindriyassa paccayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetu taṃmahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipāto nāma. Laddhupakkamāni hi bhūtāni na purimabhūtāni viya visadānīti samānajātiyānaṃ bhūtānaṃ kāraṇaṃ na hontīti. Ekassapi payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena kiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya vasena payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbatarā uppajjatīti vatthussa mahantabhāvoti tadubhayaṃ cetanāya balavabhāveneva hotīti āha ‘‘payoga…pe… bhāvato’’ti. Yathāvuttapaccayavipariyāyepīti payogavatthuādipaccayānaṃ amahattepi. Taṃtaṃpaccayehīti guṇavantatādipaccayehi. Ettha ca hantabbassa guṇavantatāya mahāsāvajjatā vatthumahantatāya viya daṭṭhabbā. Kilesānaṃ upakkamānaṃ dvinnañca mudutāya tibbatāya ca appasāvajjatā mahāsāvajjatā ca yojetabbā. Pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacittañca pubbabhāgasambhārā, upakkamo vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito, pañcasambhāravatī pāṇātipātacetanāti sā pañcasambhāravinimuttā daṭṭhabbā. Esa nayo adinnādānādīsupi.
用咒语夺取别人的东西,属于明咒所成;不用咒语,而是通过身体和语言的行为去牵引别人的东西,或者依靠某种神通力去牵引,属于神通所成的加行。同样地,不与取也有亲手做等六种加行,应当知道。巴利
Mantaparijappanena parassa santakaharaṇaṃ vijjāmayo, vinā mantena parasantakassa kāyavacīpayogehi ākaḍḍhanaṃ tādisaiddhiyogena iddhimayo payogoti adinnādānassapi cha payogā sāhatthikādayo veditabbā.
以强力征服而违犯时,邪淫是大罪;双方情投意合时就不是这样。有人说:“因为说有四支,所以即使以强力征服而违犯,只要被征服者对于以道非道而行予以忍受,由于没有先前生起的受乐、欲求和加行,被征服者不构成邪淫。”然而,只要有受乐的心,加行的缺失并不能作为判定标准,因为女人大多数情况下本来就没有主动的受乐加行。实际上,大多数情况下只有男人才有主动的受乐加行。如果女人先起了受乐心才躺下,也不构成邪淫,那就会导致过失。因此应当知道,从男人的角度出发,以最高标准来说有四支。否则,当女人主动做男人的事情时,男人也没有主动的受乐加行,那就不构成邪淫了。有些人则说:“依自己意愿而发生的,有三支;以强力而发生的,有三支;这样,以未摄与摄的方式合计,共有四支。”这应当审察之后再接受。巴利
Abhibhavitvā vītikkamane micchācāro mahāsāvajjo, na tathā ubhinnaṃ samānacchandabhāve. ‘‘Cattāro sambhārāti vuttattā abhibhavitvā vītikkamane satipi maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsane purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato micchācāro na hoti abhibhuyyamānassā’’ti vadanti. Sevanacitte sati payogābhāvo na pamāṇaṃ itthiyā sevanappayogassa yebhuyyena abhāvato. Purisasseva hi yebhuyyena sevanappayogo hotīti itthiyā puretaraṃ sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā nipannāyapi micchācāro na siyāti āpajjati, tasmā purisassa vasena ukkaṃsato cattāro sambhārā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā itthiyā purisakiccakaraṇakāle purisassapi sevanappayogābhāvato micchācāro na siyāti. Keci pana ‘‘attano ruciyā pavattitassa tīṇi aṅgāni, balakkārena pavattitassa tīṇīti sabbāni aggahitaggahaṇena cattārī’’ti vadanti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
以嗔恨心、无意令对方死,能引发粗暴的身业和语业加行的粗暴思,就是粗恶语。但如果意图让对方死,那么随着目的达成或不达成,就分别成为杀生和嗔恚。粗恶语是针对面前的人而发起的。有人说:“对不在面前的人,也可以有粗恶语。”巴利
Duṭṭhacittassa amaraṇādhippāyassa pharusakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā pharusacetanā pharusavācā. Maraṇādhippāye pana sati atthasiddhitadabhāvesu pāṇātipātā byāpādā ca hontīti. Yaṃ pati pharusavācā payujjati, tassa sammukhāva sīsaṃ eti. ‘‘Parammukhepi pharusavācā hotī’’ti vadanti.
如果因为思并非任何时候都具有业道性,它的业道性就不确定,所以不在业道这一类里说它,那么贪等法也存在尚未达到业道的情况,它们的业道性同样不确定,岂不是也不该在业道这一类里说它们吗?并非如此。因为贪等在那里是依业道性和同类性而被说到的。如果这样,思也应该在那里被说到吗?确实如此。不过,思就是杀生等,它的业道性很明显,所以可能就没有说它。因为通过“比丘们,我说思就是业”“比丘们,有三种身思是不善的身业”等说法,已经表明了思的业性。而业本身就是作为通往善趣、恶趣以及由它们所生的苦乐的道路而运作,所以称为业道,它的业道性很明显。然而贪等法是以思的策动而成为善行或恶行,并以由思所生的系缚而成为通往善趣、恶趣以及由它们所生的苦乐的道路,它们的业道性并不那么明显,所以它们才以业道这一类的形式被说到。或者,由于种类不同,思可能就不和它们一起被说到。应当审察之后再接受。巴利
Yadi cetanāya sabbadā kammapathabhāvābhāvato aniyato kammapathabhāvoti kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ, nanu abhijjhādīnampi kammapathaṃ appattānaṃ atthitāya aniyato kammapathabhāvoti tesampi kammapatharāsiyaṃ avacanaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, kammapathatātaṃsabhāgatāhi tesaṃ tattha vuttattā. Yadi evaṃ cetanāpi tattha vattabbā siyāti? Saccametaṃ, sā pana pāṇātipātādikāti pākaṭo tassā kammapathabhāvoti na vuttaṃ siyā. Cetanāya hi ‘‘cetanāhaṃ, bhikkhave, kammaṃ vadāmi,’’‘‘tividhā, bhikkhave, kāyasañcetanā akusalaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādivacanehi kammabhāvo dīpito. Kammaṃyeva ca sugatiduggatīnaṃ taduppajjanasukhadukkhānañca pathabhāvena pavattaṃ kammapathoti vuccatīti pākaṭo tassā kammapathabhāvo. Abhijjhādīnaṃ pana cetanāsamīhanabhāvena sucaritaduccaritabhāvo, cetanājanitataṃbandhatibhāvena sugatiduggatitaduppajjanasukhadukkhānaṃ pathabhāvo cāti na tathā pākaṭo kammapathabhāvoti te eva kammapatharāsibhāvena vuttā. Atathājātiyattā vā cetanā tehi saddhiṃ na vuttā siyā. Vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ.
有人用“杀生等的所缘,就是远离这些的所缘,所以五学处只是有限所缘”这句话,来指责“不与取等以有情为所缘”的说法有矛盾。因为接下来会说:“所谓离,确实只是远离应当违犯的事。”而“自己将会避免”这句话,是就《学处分别》中《问难注释》而说的。因为在那里说:“由于它只把被执为‘有情’的诸行作为所缘,所以被称为有限所缘。”巴利
Pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva tabbiratiārammaṇānīti pañca sikkhāpadā parittārammaṇā evāti vacanena adinnādānādīnaṃ sattārammaṇatāvacanassa virodhaṃ codeti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi veramaṇī nāma hotī’’ti. Sayameva pariharissatīti sikkhāpadavibhaṅge pañhapucchakavaṇṇanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha hi ‘‘yasmā sattoti saṅkhyaṃ gate saṅkhāreyeva ārammaṇaṃ karoti, tasmā parittārammaṇāti vuccantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“贫困等”中的“等”字,涵盖了这些情况:得不到利养、已得到的又失去、想要的财物很难得到、财物要与国王等人共享、生活痛苦、生活充满恐惧等等。不过有些人说:现世中财富损失之类,是等流果。巴利
Duggatatādīnīti ādi-saddena ‘‘aladdhālābho laddhavināso icchitānaṃ bhogānaṃ kicchapaṭilābho rājādīhi sādhāraṇabhogatā dukkhavihāro sāsaṅkavihāro’’ti evamādayo saṅgahitā. Keci pana ‘‘diṭṭheva dhamme bhogajāniādayo nissandaphala’’nti vadanti.
善业道论的注释巴利
Kusalakammapathakathāvaṇṇanā
那些远离因为与思相应,所以通过思这一门径,善趣、恶趣以及它们当中苦乐具有基础,这是合理的——这就是这里的意旨。巴利
Tāsañca viratīnaṃ cetanāsampayuttattā cetanādvārena sugatiduggatitaduppajjanasukhadukkhānaṃ pathabhāvo yuttoti adhippāyo.
业道对照论的注释巴利
Kammapathasaṃsandanakathāvaṇṇanā
“如是”是指达到业道的情况。“有些人”是针对法喜长老说的。因为他主张:对于达到业道者的恶戒等和善戒等,从义理上显示它们与业道并无差别,或者说明它们通过触门等而互不相违,这就是业道的对照。用“没有业道性”这句话,显示前面所说的未防护和防护在他的主张中并未被纳入业道对照。至于那些被纳入的,为了显示执取它们没有意义,所以说了“三种……略……以显示”。这样先简略指出前一种主张的过失之后,为了说第二种主张,又说了“并非恶行”等话。由此显示:那些被随行的恶行、善行、未防护、防护,被规定为身业等。因为经中说过:“由五触门生起的未防护,就是不善的意业”等等。用“如果”等话,说明并非无余地全部含摄。不应说生起:对于主张“业道……略……”的人来说,不应说“意业由六触门生起”,这是意思。或者,如果注释师们说达到业道者的恶戒等是依身业等名称而说的,那么注释师们就不应说意业由六触门生起,这是意思。因为已经说了各种业的状态,即“三种身恶行就是不善的身业”等。巴利
Tathāti kammapathappattānaṃ. Kecīti dhammasirittheraṃ sandhāyāha. So hi kammapathappattānameva dussīlyādīnaṃ susīlyādīnañca kammapathehi atthato nānattābhāvadassanaṃ, tesaṃ vā phassadvārādīhi avirodhabhāvena dīpanaṃ kammapathasaṃsandananti vadati. Kammapathatā natthīti etena yathāvuttānaṃ asaṃvarasaṃvarānaṃ tesaṃ vāde kammapathasaṃsandane asaṅgahitataṃ dasseti. Ye pana saṅgahaṃ labhanti, tesaṃ gahaṇe payojanābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tividha…pe… dassanenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ purimapakkhe saṅkhepato dosaṃ vatvā dutiyapakkhepi vattuṃ ‘‘na ca duccaritāna’’ntiādimāha. Tena ye duccaritasucaritaasaṃvarasaṃvarā anucarīyanti, tesaṃ kāyakammāditā vidhīyatīti dasseti. ‘‘Pañcaphassadvāravasena uppanno asaṃvaro akusalaṃ manokammameva hotī’’tiādinā hi vuttanti. Yadi cātiādinā anavasesapariyādānābhāvamāha. Uppatti na vattabbāti kammapatha…pe… vadantehi ‘‘manokammaṃ chaphassadvāravasena uppajjatī’’ti na vattabbanti attho. Atha vā yadi kammapathappattāneva dussīlyādīni kāyakammādināmehi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttānīti evaṃ vadantehi aṭṭhakathācariyehi manokammassa chaphassadvāravasena uppatti na vattabbāti attho. Taṃtaṃkammabhāvassa vuttattāti ‘‘tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammameva hotī’’tiādiṃ (vibha. 913) sandhāyāha.
“其他业”也可能就是属于该门的业本身,因此有人怀疑杀生等是否成了语业等。所谓“因此”,意思是:因为某些未防护和防护并不具有业道性;显示身恶行等与业道没有差别也没有意义;恶行等并没有依触门而得到说明;这一规定也不是毫无遗漏地涵盖一切;诸业还会混杂;而且注释书中有前后矛盾。同名,就是同为身业等。不放弃通名,就是不放弃身业等状态。“两者”指业道和非业道。“因为不存在生起方式的表达”:以此说明,虽然触门、未防护门等以及属于该门的业在义理上没有差别,但仍应依各种转起的教说方式来考察。“不善的身业不由五触门生起”等,是第二项决断。巴利
Kammantarampi taṃdvārikakammameva siyāti pāṇātipātādikassa vacīkammādibhāvamāsaṅkati. Tasmāti yasmā kesañci asaṃvarānaṃ saṃvarānañca kammapathatā natthi, kāyaduccaritādīnañca kammapathehi nānattābhāvadassanena payojanaṃ natthi, na ca duccaritādīnaṃ phassadvārānaṃ vasena uppatti dīpitā, na cāyaṃ vidhi niravasesasaṅgāhikā, kammānañca saṅkaro āpajjati, aṭṭhakathāyañca pubbāparavirodho, tasmāti attho. Samānanāmatā kāyakammāditā. Sāmaññanāmāvijahanaṃ kāyakammādibhāvāvijahanaṃ. Ubhayesanti kammapathākammapathānaṃ. Uppattipariyāyavacanābhāvatoti etena phassadvāraasaṃvaradvārādīnaṃ taṃdvārikakammānañca atthato nānattābhāvepi tathā tathā pavattadesanāvasena te vicāritāti dasseti. ‘‘Akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ pañcaphassadvāravasena na uppajjatī’’tiādiko dutiyavinicchayo.
在身体和语言方面……成就:通过这句话,为了把已经达到现行的不善意业和还没有达到现行的区分开来加以说明,所以说了“身语业”,但并不是说它就是身语业的性质。因此应当看到,这里提到身和语,正是为了说明前面所说的已经达到现行的情况。所以他说:“已经达到现行的不善,在身门和语门就是意业。”当说“那”这个词时,由于“所”这个词表示不偏离的关联,所以说了“所生起”。以仅仅限定为生起,就是指六触门的业。用“仅仅”这个词,以遮遣差别的含义,遮遣了意业性的差别。因为没有用“唯”这个词来限定,所以没有说“唯是身语业”。现在,为了显示由于不作限定而得到的功德,说了“然而并非一切”等。巴利
Kāye vācāya ca…pe… siddhitoti etena copanappattaṃ akusalaṃ manokammaṃ copanaṃ appattato visesetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kāyavacīkamma’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana kāyavacīkammabhāvatoti dasseti. Tena kāyavacīgahaṇaṃ yathāvuttacopanappattaṃ eva vibhāvetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘copanappattaṃ akusalaṃ kāyadvāre vacīdvāre ca manokammaṃ hotī’’ti. Taṃ-sadde vutte yaṃ-saddo abyabhicāritasambandhatāya vuttoyeva hotīti katvā ‘‘yaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppādamattaparicchinnenāti chaphassadvārikakammenāti attho. Matta-saddena visesanivattiatthena manokammatāvisesaṃ nivatteti. Niyamassa eva-saddassa akatattā ‘‘kāyavacīkammameva hotī’’ti avuttattā. Idāni niyamākaraṇena laddhaguṇaṃ dassento ‘‘na pana sabbampī’’tiādimāha.
“因为未作限定”等,指的是前面那种说法。“随顺所说之义而转起的声音”,意思是:在复合词中,即使只是一部分,也会因为主题的关系而被牵引过来,所以就说“只是拿业这个字来建立关联”。“然而有些人说”等,则是显示在这里死抠字眼的人是不合理的。其中,“属于思那一类的”,是指属于作为身业和语业的那种思。“存在”,是指相同的那些。“以及各各门的业道”,这是就这个心以业道的方式生起的那段时间来说的,并不是说一切时候都这样,因为它就是以业道的方式生起的。或者,通过“及”这个字,应当知道也包含了非业道。又或者,“各各门”和“各各门的业道”合起来就是“各各门的业道”,通过“各各门”这个词,应当知道也包含了非业道的防护。“以那种自性”,是指以意业为门,而不是以自己为门,这是要表达的意思。同样,在这里也是:由心生起、与心相应的业,它的门性也假立在心里,这就是含义。不用说:因为不存在作为无间缘的、离开心而存在的心。巴利
‘‘Niyamassa akatattā’’tiādi purimanayoti adhippeto. Vattuadhippāyānurodhinī saddappavattīti samāsapade ekadesopi ākaḍḍhīyati adhikāravasenāti adhippāyena ‘‘kamma-saddamattena sambandhaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vadantītiādinā ettha padakāramatassa ayuttataṃ dasseti. Tattha cetanāpakkhikānanti kāyavacīkammabhūtacetanāpakkhikānaṃ. Satanti samānānaṃ. Taṃtaṃdvārakammapathānañcāti idaṃ imassa cittassa kammapathabhāvena pavattaṃ kālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sabbadā, kammapathabhāveneva pavattanato. Ca-saddena vā akammapathasaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā taṃtaṃdvārā ca taṃtaṃdvārakammapathā ca taṃtaṃdvārakammapathāti ‘‘taṃtaṃdvārā’’ti padena akammapathānaṃ saṃvarānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tena sabhāvenāti manokammassa dvārabhāvena, na attanoti adhippāyo. Evamidhāpīti cittajanito cittasampayuttassa kammassa dvārabhāvo cittepi upacaritoti attho. Vattabbameva natthi anantarapaccayabhūtamanorahitassa cittassa abhāvatoti.
当欲有的规定不存在时,一切所缘等:这里用“等”这个字把其余的都收摄进来。因为……不存在,所以在主要的东西不可能时,说明非主要的被作为所依。巴利
Kamābhāvaniyamābhāve sabbārammaṇatādīti ādi-saddena saṅgaṇhāti. Na hi…pe… atthīti padhāne asambhavato appadhānaṃ adhikarīyatīti dasseti.
法宣说者论巴利
Dhammuddesavārakathā
触等五法聚的解说巴利
Phassapañcamakarāsivaṇṇanā
“那时有触”等圣典文句,在显示触等属于欲界等性质时,并不是以显示这一点为主要目的;只有在显示它们各自的自性时,才说明并非以显示这一点为主要目的。所以说“因为触等并不是……”等等,就是在说明这个道理。巴利
‘‘Tasmiṃ samaye phasso hotī’’tiādikāya pāḷiyā phassādīnaṃ kāmāvacaratādidassane na tapparabhāvo, sabhāvadassane eva pana tapparabhāvoti dasseti ‘‘na hi phassādīna’’ntiādinā.
“心的作用现起”是指心的活动状态。触的生起,就是觉知本身的生起。所谓“成为聚合而转起的缘”,这里是在说明:触是心与所缘聚合的原因,所以说“心与所缘的聚合”。触确实是以接触的方式,在心面对所缘时生起,因此被称为使所缘聚合而转起的缘。而触这种以接触方式生起的情形,在以下例子中会变得明显:看见站在树枝上的人,站在地面的胆怯无勇之人小腿会晃动;看见别人吃酸芒果等,自己口中就生津;有悲悯心的人看见别人被伤害,身体会颤抖。所谓“其殊胜的色法”,就像在依撞击而生起、彼此更为靠近的殊胜色法中,“撞击”是触的同义语;同样地,心与所缘之间能缘与所缘关系的达成,也是以撞击的方式发生。那个依于心、以撞击为同义语所说的殊胜法,也就是“如是”等语所说明的。不过有些人说:“触的作用是撞击,只限于五门,其他情况没有,因为没有所依与所缘的撞击。”这并不合理,因为“撞击”只是方便说法。否则,连五门的触也不可能有撞击的作用了。当根与作意照常生起时,识就在各自的所缘上生起,它们这样生起本身,就是识对境的达成。巴利
Cittakiriyābhāvenāti cittabyāpārabhāvena. Phassassa sampajjanamuppajjanameva. Sannipatitappavattiyā paccayo hotīti etena cittārammaṇasannipātakāraṇaṃ phasso cittārammaṇasannipātoti vuttoti dasseti. Phasso hi cittassa ārammaṇe phusanākāreneva pavattito tassa ārammaṇe sannipatitappavattiyā paccayoti ca vuccati. Sā cassa phusanākārappavatti sākhagge ṭhitaṃ disvā bhūmisaṇṭhitassa avīrakapurisassa jaṅghacalanaṃ, ambilaambapakkādiṃ khādantaṃ disvā mukhe kheḷuppatti, dayālukassa paraṃ haññamānaṃ disvā sarīrakampananti evamādīsu paribyattā hoti. Tabbisesabhūtā rūpadhammāti yathā paṭihananavasena aññamaññaṃ āsannataraṃ uppajjamānesu rūpadhammavisesesu saṅghaṭṭanapariyāyo, evaṃ cittārammaṇānaṃ visayakaraṇavisayabhāvappatti paṭihananākārena hoti. So ca cittanissito dhammaviseso saṅghaṭṭanapariyāyena vutto, yadāha ‘‘eva’’ntiādi. Keci pana ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaraso phasso pañcadvārikova, na itaro vatthārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanābhāvato’’ti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati upacārasiddhattā saṅghaṭṭanassa. Itarathā pañcadvārikassapi taṃ na sambhaveyyāti. Indriyamanasikāresu yathāpavattamānesu taṃtaṃārammaṇe viññāṇaṃ uppajjati, tesaṃ tathāpavattiyeva viññāṇassa visayabhāvakaraṇaṃ.
比丘们,凡是依这五种欲乐而生起的快乐和喜悦,这就叫作对欲乐的贪著滋味。根据这段经文,乐受本身就是贪著滋味,所以注释说“因为是贪著滋味的状态”。以触等方式执取所缘,只是一种部分的体验——这里说的是触等非假立的体验作用。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ kho, bhikkhave, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati kāmānaṃ assādo’’tiādivacanato (a. ni. 9.34) sukhavedanāva assādoti āha ‘‘assādabhāvato’’ti. Phusanādibhāvena ārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ ekadesānubhavananti anupacaritameva phassādīnaṃ anubhavanakiccamāha.
“相”是指蓝色等相以及长等相。“以此方法”是在说明:就像在以智为主的心生起时,想随顺于智;同样地,在以定为主的心生起时,想随顺于定。巴利
Nimittenāti nīlādinā dīghādinā ca nimittena. Etenupāyenāti yathā ñāṇappadhāne cittuppāde saññā ñāṇamanuvattati, evaṃ samādhippadhāne samādhinti dasseti.
“系缚”是指把相应法安置下来,让它们各自安住在自己的作用上。正是为了说明这个意思,才说“令转起”。巴利
Pabandhatīti paṭṭhapeti sampayuttadhamme sakasakakicce paṭṭhapeti. Teneva hi tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘pavattetī’’ti āha.
“存在”这个词是表示“确实有”的。而诸有为法的“确实有”,离开生起就不可能成立,所以说“心并非在意义上像那样不生起”。因此,因为心不是不生起,而是确实生起,所以说“心存在”——这就是这段注释的意思。这样确定之后,“存在”和“生起”这两个词既然意义相同,就看不出有什么作用了。或者也可以说,“有”指的是有情众生,而众生是具备生起等状态的,所以在“触存在”等说法中,是用“存在”这个词来说明触等法是包含在三刹那中的。在那里,凡是具备生起的法,它不可能被称为“不存在”,因此,用“生起”一词所说之义,是可以用“存在”一词来表述的。然而在“已生起而存在”这一说法中,虽然仅以“已生起”一词就说明了具备生起等状态,但为了显示不超出那种状态,由于“已生起”一词在超过三刹那之后仍然适用,所以这里并不像显示“生起”与“存在”意义相同之不存在那样,“生起”的显示也相违,因为它是使明显化的状态。否则,若说“心已生起而存在”,仅以此就已显示了心的存在性,那又何必再以存在性的显示来表述呢?并非不能说,因为依时位的确定而说的心虽有差别,但为了显示它与触等俱生而更善巧无差别地加以阐明,故再次说心。这里,在列举法的分别说部分,只是对已列举的诸法进行分别,不像《分别论》那样在经文中已含摄一切词句,所以说“在列举部分为摄集之义,在分别说部分为分别之义”,这个意思也是确定的。正如在“当某人修习通往色界投生之道时”等说法中,道等法并未被分别。此外,以增上之义,如在诸根中一样,应当理解在触、受、想、思等与一切心识生起共同具备的集合中,依时位确定所说的心,也是在触等五法中说的。巴利
Vijjamānatāvācī hoti-saddo, vijjamānatā ca saṅkhatadhammānaṃ uppajjanena vinā natthīti ‘‘cittaṃ na tathā atthato nuppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena yasmā cittaṃ na nuppajjati uppajjati eva, tasmā cittaṃ hotīti vuttanti ayamettha aṭṭhakathāya attho. Evamavaṭṭhite hoti-uppajjati-saddānaṃ samānatthattena na kiñci payojanaṃ dissati. Atha vā bhavanaṃ nāma sattā, sattā ca uppādādinā samaṅgitāti phassādīnaṃ khaṇattayapariyāpannatā ‘‘phasso hotī’’tiādīsu hoti-saddena vuttā. Tattha yo bhāvo uppādasamaṅgī, na so na hoti nāma, tasmā uppajjati-saddena vuccamānassa atthassa hoti-saddavacanīyatā na na sambhavati. Uppannaṃ hotīti ettha pana kiñcāpi uppanna-saddeneva uppādādisamaṅgitā vuccati, tabbhāvānativatti pana hoti-saddena vuttā khaṇattayavītivattepi uppanna-saddassa vattanato, tasmā na ettha uppajjati-saddena samānatthatāsabbhāvadassanaṃ viya uppajjatidassanampi virujjhati pākaṭakaraṇabhāvato. Itarathā ‘‘cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti imināva cittassa vijjamānabhāvo dassitoti kiṃ puna vijjamānabhāvadassanenāti na na sakkā vattuṃ, samayavavatthānavasena savisesaṃ vuttampi cittaṃ phassādīhi sahuppattiyā suṭṭhutaraṃ nibbisesanti dassetuṃ cittassa puna vacanaṃ. Uddiṭṭhadhammānaṃyeva cettha niddesavāre vibhajanaṃ, na vibhaṅge viya pāḷiyā āruḷhasabbapadānanti ‘‘uddesavāre saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ niddesavāre vibhajanattha’’nti ayampi attho niccalo. Tathā hi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādīsu maggādayo na vibhattā. Apica adhipatibhāvena indriyesu viya phassavedanāsaññācetanāhi saha sabbacittuppādasādhāraṇarāsiyaṃ gahetabbattā samayavavatthāne vuttampi cittaṃ phassapañcamake vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
禅那支的聚集解说巴利
Jhānaṅgarāsivaṇṇanā
“寻”是指寻的活动,而这种活动只是寻依靠自身的诸缘而生起,所以以状态来解说,是为了排除认为它是自在支配的误解。当心投向某个所缘时,寻使那个所缘成为可以执取的状态,就像在敲击、在翻搅一样,因此说它具有“敲击”的特相和“击打”的作用。这个特相是依于作用来说明的。因为诸法不可能脱离自性而另有任何作用,也不可能脱离自性而另有所谓可执取的状态。然而,为了随顺那些应当被觉悟的众生,从胜义上说虽然是同一自性的自性法,却像用同义词一样,以种种安立的方式加以阐明。正因为这样,它才被善巧地阐明了。巴利
Vitakkananti vitakkanakiriyā, sā ca vitakkassa attano paccayehi pavattimattamevāti bhāvaniddeso vasavattibhāvanivāraṇāya hoti. Yasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, taṃ tassa gahaṇayogyaṃ karonto vitakko ākoṭento viya parivattento viya ca hotīti tassa ākoṭanalakkhaṇatā pariyāhananarasatā ca vuttā. Idañca lakkhaṇaṃ kiccasannissitaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Dhammānañhi sabhāvavinimuttā kāci kiriyā nāma natthi, tathā gahetabbākāro. Bodhaneyyajanānurodhena pana paramatthato ekasabhāvopi sabhāvadhammo pariyāyavacanehi viya samāropitarūpehi bahūhi pakārehi pakāsīyati. Evañhi so suṭṭhu pakāsito hotīti.
所谓“波动”,是寻对治昏沉和睡眠的作用,也就是心于所缘不退缩、不蜷缩的状态。不过,因为寻有把心投向所缘的性质,所以它看起来就像在动摇。正是基于这个意思,才说“有波动”即与动摇相应。在近行定和安止定中,寻是随着心相续而转起的——由此说明:就像面对一个从未接触过的所缘、最初把心投向它时,寻是有波动的;但在同一个所缘上以不间断相续的方式转起时,就不是那样了,那时它没有过多的波动,而是处于安止的状态。因此说“成为不动”等等。巴利
Vipphāro nāma vitakkassa thinamiddhapaṭipakkho ārammaṇe anolīnatā asaṅkoco, so pana abhiniropanabhāvato calanaṃ viya hotīti adhippāyena ‘‘vipphāravāti vicalanayutto’’ti vuttaṃ. Upacārappanāsu santānena pavattiyanti etena yathā apubbārammaṇe paṭhamābhinipātabhūto vitakko vipphāravā hoti, na tathā ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe nirantaraṃ anuppabandhavasena pavattiyaṃ, nātivipphāravā pana tattha hoti sannisinnabhāvatoti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘niccalo hutvā’’tiādi.
从“以喜乐浸润”等这句话可以看出,喜的遍满是以身为范围。为了说明它就像那样发生,所以说了“以殊胜的色”。巴利
‘‘Pītisukhena abhisandetī’’tiādivacanato (dī. ni. 1.226; ma. ni. 1.427) pītiyā pharaṇaṃ kāyavisayanti yathā taṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṇītarūpehī’’ti vuttaṃ.
不散乱是散乱与狂乱状态的对立面,是它们相反的本性,而不只是“没有散乱”而已。因为不散乱和不掉举都具有让心专注统一的作用,所以在意义上虽然没有差别,但为了说明这两者是从整体和相应部分两个角度来说的,才说了“不散乱……掉举”。“殊胜”这个词应当理解为“以超越的方式”或“以极致的方式”。因为乐是定的殊胜之因,正如经文所说:“有乐的心能得定。”巴利
Visārassa byaggabhāvassa paṭipakkho sabhāvo avisāro, na visārābhāvamattaṃ. Avisārāvikkhepānaṃ samādhānabhāvato atthato visesābhāvepi samukhena sampayuttamukhena ca ubhayaṃ vuttanti dassetuṃ ‘‘avisā…pe… vikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ. Visesatoti atisayenāti vā attho gahetabbo. Sukhañhi samādhissa visesakāraṇaṃ ‘‘sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.359; a. ni. 3.96; 6.10; 11.12) vacanato.
根聚的解说巴利
Indriyarāsivaṇṇanā
这里说的“于此”,是指被称为“信”的、以胜解为特相的状态。“人信”这句话也说明:那些由信所赋予殊胜作用的、与信相应的心所法,在信的作用中只是被当作行为者来显示。因为局部的作用会被安立在整体上。为了说明:不只是在对可净信的对象上生起不信的行相是不善的不信,而且在对不可净信的对象上生起信的行相也是不善的,所以说了“邪胜解”。由此指出,对富兰那等外道的信也是不信。“是净信”这句话,是用来排除“是不净信的不信”。“依于所缘”这句话,是用来排除邪胜解。而为了把“是净信的决定”这句话已经说明的含义讲得更清楚,就说了“不是或有法中的胜解”。没有混浊就是净信,因为它不可动摇,所以说是“无浊性”。因为信在安住于相应法时,是以无混浊的状态现起的。这样,由于应当以胜解的方式把握,所以是以胜解为现起。“佛等所缘”在这里应当知道,也包含了此世、他世、业与果的关联等。依据“摩诃男,圣弟子有信手”“信是此世人最上的财”“信是种子,苦行是雨”等说法,应当知道:信在执持善法等当中,就像手等一样。巴利
Tatthāti saddahanasaṅkhāte adhimokkhalakkhaṇe. Puggalo saddahatīti imināpi saddhāya āhitavisesānaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammānaṃ saddahanakiriyāya kattubhāvameva vibhāveti. Avayavabyāpāro hi samudāye voharīyatīti. Na kevalaṃ pasādanīyavatthusmiṃ appasādanākārappavattameva akusalaṃ assaddhiyaṃ, atha kho appasādanīyavatthusmiṃ pasādanākārappavattampīti dassetuṃ ‘‘micchādhimokkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena pūraṇādīsu pasādassa assaddhiyatamāha. Pasādabhūtoti etena appasādabhūtaṃ assaddhiyaṃ nivatteti. Vatthugatoti iminā micchādhimokkhaṃ. ‘‘Pasādabhūto nicchayo’’ti iminā pana vibhāvitamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘na yevāpanakādhimokkho’’ti āha. Akālussiyaṃ pasādo, taṃ pana asaṅkhobhabhāvato ‘‘anāvilabhāvo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tañhi sampayuttesu vidahantī saddhā akālussiyapaccupaṭṭhānā. Evametanti adhimuccanākārena pana gahetabbattā adhimuttipaccupaṭṭhānā. Buddhādivatthūnīti ettha idhalokaparalokakammaphalasambandhāpi saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Saddhāhattho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako’’ti, ‘‘saddhīdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 184), ‘‘saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.197; su. ni. 77) evamādivacanato kusaladhammānaṃ ādānādīsu hatthādayo viya saddhā daṭṭhabbā.
在这里,比丘有应当做的事。他心里这样想:我将有应当做的事,可是当我做这件事时,不容易把心放在佛陀的教法上。来吧,我要发起精进,为了获得还没获得的,证达还没证达的,实现还没实现的。巴利
‘‘Idha bhikkhunā kammaṃ kattabbaṃ hoti. Tassa evaṃ hoti ‘kammaṃ kho me kattabbaṃ bhavissati, kammaṃ kho pana me karontassa na sukaraṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’’’ti (dī. ni. 3.335) –
从最初就应作的如理观察。巴利
Ādikā anurūpapaccavekkhaṇā.
“以那为根本”应当理解为:以所应行走的道等为根本。另外在这里,“道应当被行走”这类说法,只是按照注释书的说明方式来讲述的,并不是按照巴利圣典中出现的先后顺序来讲的,应当这样理解。巴利
Taṃmūlakānīti gantabbamaggādimūlakāni. Ettha ca maggo gantabbo hotītiādayo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassanavaseneva vuttā, na pāḷiyaṃ āgatānukkamenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
就像在造作等时候那样,念让长时所作等所缘变得清晰显现而运转起来,它靠近那个所缘并停在那里,而且不放开。如果所缘被忘失了,它就像漂浮而去、像动摇了一样;为了显示与这种情况相反的不忘失,就说“像水中的葫芦”等等。其中,“忆念”这个词,正是要说明“他们依此而忆念”这个意思。因为对于在忆念作用中运转的诸法来说,念是以增上的方式作为它们的缘。当念这样作为缘时,那些法就成了被忆念的、不忘失的、不漂浮的。“依这些因、这些缘,这些法生起”,这是从生起来说;“它们产生这样的果”,这是从果来说。诸法由于生起和成熟,就被称为已成就的。作为基础,是指作为所缘。巴利
Karaṇādikāle viya cirakatādiārammaṇaṃ vibhūtaṃ katvā pavattantī sati taṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhantī anissajjantī ca hoti. Yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ, taṃ pilavitvā gataṃ viya calitaṃ viya ca hoti, tappaṭipakkhabhāvena pana asammuṭṭhanti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘udake alābu viyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāraṇanti etena ‘‘saranti tāyā’’ti imamevatthaṃ vibhāveti. Saraṇakiriyāya hi pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ tattha ādhipaccabhāvena sati paccayo. Tassā hi tathā paccayabhāve sati te dhammā sāritā asammuṭṭhakatā apilāvitāhontīti. ‘‘Imehi nāma hetūhi paccayehi ca ete dhammā sambhavantī’’ti sambhavato. ‘‘Imaṃ nāma phalaṃ nibbattentī’’ti phalato dhammā uppajjanena vipaccanena ca nipphannā nāma hontīti. Vatthubhūtāti ārammaṇabhūtā.
虽然一切有所缘的法在执取所缘时,都不像心那样能分别地执取,所以说“以分别获取的方式而了知”是指心而言。因为在心所当中,有些并不能分别执取所缘,有些则仅仅停留在分别上,并不能像识那样执取所缘;为了说明那些可能被怀疑的心所并不具有这种情形,所以说“非想……非以贯穿的方式”。巴利
Satipi sabbesaṃ sārammaṇadhammānaṃ ārammaṇaggahaṇe na cittaṃ viya pare paricchijjagāhinoti ‘‘paricchinnopaladdhivasena jānātī’’ti cittaṃ vuttaṃ. Cetasikesu hi keci visayaṃ paricchijja gahetuṃ na sakkonti, keci pana paricchedamatteyeva tiṭṭhanti, na viññāṇaṃ viya visayaṃ gaṇhantīti ye āsaṅkitabbā, tesu tadabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘na saññā…pe… vijjhanavasenā’’ti āha.
“喜具有悦的状态”这句话,是就喜和悦两者结合而言的,也就是把喜和悦合在一起称为“喜悦”。但是,就像“良骏车”的说法那样,只有与喜结合的悦才叫“喜悦”,这是从主要方面来说的,并不是说喜本身具有悦的状态。因为主要方面存在时,非主要方面就不被采用;这里提到“喜”,是因为与喜结合的悦大多数情况下都存在,而且作用明显,所以才这样说,并不是不包含没有喜的悦。因为惯用语的作用并不是绝对的。为了说明以喜为标记在这个意义上非常恰当,所以接着说“或以喜为标记的”等等。巴利
Pītiyā ca somanassabhāvo āpajjatīti idaṃ pīti ca somanassañca pītisomanassanti pītisomanassānaṃ tulyayogaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Somanassasseva pana ‘‘ājaññaratho’’ti viya pītiyuttaṃ somanassaṃ pītisomanassanti padhānabhāvo icchitoti na pītiyā somanassabhāvappatti. Na hi padhāne vijjamāne appadhānaṃ upayujjati, pītiggahaṇañcettha pītiyuttassa somanassassa yebhuyyena bhāvato paribyattakiccato ca kataṃ, na ca nippītikasomanassassa asaṅgaho. Ruḷhīsaddesu kiriyāya anaccantikabhāvato. Pītiyā pana upalakkhaṇabhāvena ayamattho suṭṭhu yujjatīti dassento āha ‘‘pītiupalakkhitaṃ vā’’tiādi.
已执取的诸蕴在持续运转。“能长久安住”——这句话说明:命根不只是让应当被守护的诸法刹那住立的因,也是让它们相续不断的因。否则,寿尽而死就不合理了。“无差别地”是指不观待因的差别,只就命根这一共通状态而言。虽然在无色界和无想有情的存在中,色法和非色法并不运转,但以它们在前后的存在中,最后的法和最初的法因为属于同一类而无间隔,所以说“直到般涅槃无间断地运转”。“守护等”说的正是守护、运转、住立。“因为是有情存活差别的缘”——因为对俱生法来说,它是有情存活这一差别的缘。与根结合的色法相较于死色法,业生色法相较于时节生等色法,其差别正是由命根造成的。巴利
Pavattaṃ upādinnakkhandhaṃ. Ciraṭṭhitikaṃ hotīti etena na kevalaṃ anupāletabbadhammānaṃ khaṇaṭṭhitiyāyeva, atha kho pabandhānupacchedassapi jīvitaṃ kāraṇanti dasseti. Aññathā hi āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ na yujjeyyāti. Avisesenāti kāraṇavisesānapekkhena jīvitindriyatāsāmaññena. Yadipi arūpāsaññabhavesu rūpārūpadhammā nappavattanti, tehi pana purimapacchimabhavesu carimapaṭhamadhammā samānajātiyena abyavahitatāya nirantarāyeva nāma hontīti ‘‘yāva parinibbānaṃ avicchinnaṃ pavattatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Anupālanādikassāti anupālanapavattanaṭṭhapanāniyeva vadati. Jīvamānavisesappaccayabhāvatoti sahajātānaṃ jīvamānatāvisesassa paccayabhāvato. Indriyabaddhassa hi matarūpato kammajassa ca utujādito viseso jīvitindriyakatoti.
道支聚的解说巴利
Maggaṅgarāsivaṇṇanā
“以不颠倒且能导出的性质”——这句话是因为“正”这个词与“见”等词具有同一个所指对象,而“见”等词所共有的导出性质需要用“正”这个词来限定,所以才这么说。因为“正”这个词的意思是不颠倒,而不是导出。或者说,“正”这个词的意思就是“不颠倒的导出”。因为虚词有多种含义。同样地,是以不颠倒的导出性质。巴利
Aviparītaniyyānikabhāvenāti idaṃ sammā-saddassa diṭṭhi-ādisaddānañca samānādhikaraṇatāvasena diṭṭhiādīnaṃ avisesabhūtassa niyyānikabhāvassa sammā-saddena visesitabbattā vuttaṃ. Aviparītattho hi sammā-saddo, na niyyānikatthoti. Aviparītaniyyānikattho eva vā sammā-saddo. Anekatthā hi nipātāti. Evamevāti aviparītaniyyānikabhāvena.
“承诺”是指接受言说,这是就“有承诺、成为承诺,以及任何与此同类的恭敬”这个意思而说的。其中,“在各处都明显”是指:对于内在的出身等,以及外在的比丘等,通过如理观察惭与愧,就像在有各种成分的地等当中,地界等的作用清清楚楚一样,它们的作用也是清楚显现的。巴利
Patissavo vacanasampaṭiggahoti adhippāyena ‘‘sappatissavaṃ patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāgañca yaṃ kiñci gārava’’nti āha. Tattha tattha pākaṭabhāvenāti ajjhattabhūtesu jātiyādīsu bahiddhābhūtesu bhikkhuādīsu hirottappānaṃ anurūpapaccavekkhaṇavasena sasambhārapathavīādīsu pathavīdhātuādīnaṃ viya vibhūtakiccabhāvenāti attho.
就像这样,譬喻才能对应得上:好比一个掉进不净物里的人,身体虽然碰到了它,但他的状态是不沾附的;同样,无贪在面对所缘、以执取的方式接触所缘时,也是以不执著的状态——也就是不沾附的状态、不沾附的行相——而现起的。因为这种法本身就是这样的性质。有些恶戒是由嗔引起的,而一切恶戒都以嗔为依靠,所以说“由嗔引起、以嗔为依靠”。这就表明,无嗔正是嗔的直接对立面,并通过这一点,也成为恶戒的对立面。巴利
Evañhi upamāya sametīti yathā asucimhi patitapurisassa satipi kāyena allīyane bhāvo anallīno, evaṃ alobhopi ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gahitepi ārammaṇe alaggabhāvena anallīnabhāvo anallīnākāro eva pavattati. Evaṃsabhāvo hi so dhammoti. Kiñci dussīlyaṃ dosasamuṭṭhānaṃ sabbampi dussīlyaṃ dosūpanissayanti ‘‘dosasamuṭṭhānataṃ dosūpanissayatañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena adoso dosasseva ujuvipaccanīko, taṃmukhena dussīlyassāti dasseti.
在这里,对于已生起的诸法,以不超越之义……以反复练习之义,称为“修习”。也就是:那种达到专一状态的、由初禅等安止心生起的、依靠近行而成就的殊胜状态,它因为净除了盖等障碍而清净,又因为远离了那些障碍的领域,而进入了名为安止定的中舍奢摩他相。如此进入之后,便在那里趋入、跃入;由于没有需要净化的散乱和烦恼杂染,所以没有净化、等持、一境性的作用,只是以清净、止、行道、一境性的行相保持中舍,并被与生俱来的中舍性以其作用所滋养的舍所增长。就在那里,生起了称为定与慧的双运法。它们就像不超越其他法而运转一样,如此修习、增长。同样,在那里,信等诸根因为解脱了种种烦恼,以解脱味而成为一味地运转。还有与那种趋入相应的、适合它们不超越的一味自性的精进,在那里被策励、被推动;以及在那个刹那生起的、称为熟练强力状态的反复练习。所有这些行相的修习、产生、增长——这就是对于已生起的诸法……以反复练习之义,称为“修习”。巴利
Tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena…pe… āsevanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti yo so ekattupagato paṭhamajjhānādiappanācittuppādo āsannūpacārāhitaviseso nīvaraṇādiparipanthavisuddhiyā visuddho, tadāvaraṇavisayavirahena ca samappavattaappanāsamādhisaṅkhātaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipanno, evaṃ paṭipannattā eva tatthupagamanena tattha ca pakkhando, visodhetabbassa vikkhepassa kilesasaṃsaggassa ca abhāvato visodhanasamādhānaekattupaṭṭhānabyāpāravirahena visuddhisamathapaṭipattiekattupaṭṭhānākāre ajjhupekkhanto abhibyattarūpāya sahajātatatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhito, tasmiṃyeva jātā samādhipaññāsaṅkhātā yuganaddhadhammā. Te yathā aññaṃ anativattamānā hutvā pavattanti, evaṃ bhāvanā brūhanā. Tathā yāni tattha saddhādīni indriyāni nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāni hutvā pavattāni. Yañca tattha tadupagaṃ, tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikaṃ vīriyaṃ vāhīyati pavattīyati, yā cassa tasmiṃ khaṇe pavattā paguṇabalavabhāvāpattisaṅkhātā āsevanā. Sabbesaṃ etesaṃ ākārānaṃ bhāvanā uppādanā vaḍḍhanā, ayaṃ tattha jātānaṃ…pe… āsevanaṭṭhena bhāvanā nāma.
这种修习方式在巴利圣典里本来就已出现过,比如“初禅的行道清净”等这样的说法。而且要用智慧看清杂染和清净各自的过患与利益,然后按照相应的方法去成就它。所以说“对于如此所说的、以慧成就的修习”。
“不转起”的意思是:当某种法存在时,前面所说的修习就不会生起运转,那个法因为被执取为与修习相对立,所以被称为“非修习”——这就是这里的用意。因为仅仅“不存在”并不适合作为无痴的对立面。应当知道,贪欲等不善法才是它的对立面。
或者,“非修习”是放逸的一种。因为它被定义为“对善法不亲近、不修习、不多修”等等。巴利
Yasmā panāyaṃ bhāvanākāro ‘‘paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādī’’tiādināpi (paṭi. ma. 1.158) pāḷiyaṃ āgato eva, ñāṇena ca saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavaṃ ānisaṃsañca disvā tathā tathā nipphādetabbo, tasmā ‘‘evaṃ vuttāya paññāsādhanāya bhāvanāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Appavattīti yasmiṃ dhamme sati yathāvuttā bhāvanā nappavattati, so dhammo paṭipakkhabhāvanāparāmasanena abhāvanāti vuttoti adhippāyo. Na hi abhāvamattassa amoho paṭipakkhoti yujjatīti. Tappaṭipakkhabhūtā akusalā kāmacchandādayo daṭṭhabbā. Pamādaviseso vā abhāvanā. So hi ‘‘kusalānaṃ vā dhammānaṃ anāsevanā abhāvanā abahulīkamma’’ntiādinā niddiṭṭhoti.
确实,为了表明“老法”是决定无法获得的,才说“老法”。同样地,在巴利经文中也以“诸比丘,有生法的众生,生起这样的欲求”等(MN 3.373)来分别说明求不得。依无贪的力量成就身随观,依无痴的力量成就心随观和法随观,这是显而易见的;为了阐明依无嗔的力量成就受随观这一不明显之处,才说了“乐变易”等。而且,这种搭配是就无贪等各自作为特殊缘来说的;但一般而言,一切法是一切法的缘。嗔是由于无法忍受从自性和思惟两方面生起的苦才生起的,所以它是见苦的近对治,不像贪那样是远对治。巴利
Ekantena alabbhaneyyadassanatthaṃ ‘‘jarādhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ, bhikkhave, sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.373) icchitālābho vibhatto. Alobhānubhāvena kāyānupassanāya, amohānubhāvena cittadhammānupassanāya siddhi pākaṭāyevāti apākaṭaṃ adosānubhāvena vedanānupassanāsiddhiṃ vibhāvento ‘‘sukhavipariṇāme’’tiādimāha. Ayañca yojanā alobhādīnaṃ visesapaccayataṃ sandhāya katā, avisesena pana sabbe sabbesaṃ paccayā. Sabhāvato saṅkappato ca uppannassa dukkhassa asahanavaseneva uppajjatīti doso taṃdassanassa āsannapaṭipakkho, na rāgo viya dūrapaṭipakkho.
业道聚的解说巴利
Kammapatharāsivaṇṇanā
就像贪欲等一样,无贪欲等也并不是一定就是业道,所以说“业道性及其随分”。因为它们是依意业道的方式而转起的业,所以被归入业道这一类中,但并不是任何时候都属于业道。由此说明:即使还有其他不确定的、以业道方式显现的法,说它们具有业道性也并不矛盾。巴利
Abhijjhādayo viya anabhijjhādayopi na ekantaṃ kammapathabhūtāyevāti āha ‘‘kammapathatātaṃsabhāgatāhī’’ti. Manokammapathabhāvena pavattanakammabhāvato hi etesaṃ kammapatharāsibhāvena saṅgaho, na sabbadā kammapathāyevāti. Tena yo aññopi dhammo aniyato kammapathabhāvena pākaṭo ca, tassapi kammapathatāvacanaṃ na virujjhatīti dasseti.
轻安等一对一对法义的注释巴利
Passaddhādiyugalavaṇṇanā
“平等地转起”就是正确、平衡地运作。以礼敬佛塔等为目的,就是以礼敬佛塔等为因。应当从止、四圣谛、业处及其分类的角度,从根性柔软、中等、锐利等差别的一切修行者角度,从一切瑜伽行者心中昏沉、掉举等不同时机的角度,普遍地看待念与正知:它们在一切时候都能让人如实观照有利与不利的法,并如实通达,因此能无差别地去除障碍、增长修习。正如没有安止的善巧就没有止,没有止就没有如实知见,所以不同刹那的定与慧互为增上的因;同样,在通达时它们也是同一刹那的。为了说明这一点,所以说“以互为相”。因为当慧极为明亮地照耀所缘时,定能够以专一的方式安住;而当定进入中等的止之相时,慧就能对所缘清晰明辨。“平等地转起”,是指以不互相超越的方式平等、不偏、一味地运作。由于彼此成为伴侣,就像拉车的双马一样,在牵引修行者的愿欲之轭时,成双配对,以不互相超越的方式连结、系缚在一起,所以叫“双联”。为了显示“致力于增上心的人应当平等地结合精进与定”这一特殊意义,虽然前面已经说过,这里再次提及,是为了说明精进与定的结合,所以注疏中说“为了结合精进与定”。这是对定与精进结合的阐明,因此说“意思是瑜伽一词之义”。巴利
Samanti sammā. Cetiyavandanādiatthanti cetiyavandanādihetu. Samathacatusaccakammaṭṭhānavasena tabbhedavasena ca sabbakammaṭṭhānabhāvanābhiyuttānaṃ mudumajjhimatikkhindriyatādibhedavasena sabbayogīnaṃ cittassa līnuddhaccādikālavasena sabbadā hitāhitadhammūpalakkhaṇabhāvato yathāsabhāvaṃ paṭivedhabhāvato ca satisampajaññānaṃ pāribandhakaharaṇabhāvanāvaḍḍhanāni avisesato daṭṭhabbāni. Yathā appanākosallena vinā samatho samathamantarena yathābhūtāvabodho ca natthīti nānākkhaṇikā samādhipaññā aññamaññassa visesakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ paṭivedhe ekakkhaṇikāpīti dassento āha ‘‘aññamaññaṃ nimittabhāvenā’’ti. Paññāya hi sātisayaṃ avabhāsiyamāne visaye samādhi ekattavasena appetuṃ sakkoti, samādhimhi ca majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipanne paññā ārammaṇesu visadā vahatīti. Samaṃ pavattāti aññamaññānativattanena samaṃ avisamaṃ ekarasabhāvena pavattā. Aññamaññasahāyabhāvūpagamanena yogino manorathadhurākaḍḍhane rathadhurākaḍḍhane viya ājāneyyayugo yugalako hutvā aññamaññānativattamānena naddhā baddhā viyāti vā yuganaddhā. Adhicittamanuyuttehi vīriyasamādhayo samaṃ yojetabbāti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ pubbe gahitāpi te puna gahitāti dassetuṃ vīriyasamādhiyojanatthāyāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana samādhivīriyayogassa vibhāvanaṃ hotīti ‘‘yogavacanatthāyāti attho’’ti āha.
“如如”或者指正确,或者指错误。“不决意”是指:没有以“我要做这个,我要做那个”这样生起的前分决意为因、以加行时的决断来作出决定。因为哪里没有决断,哪里就没有实行。徘徊就是疑惑。它被称为“徘徊、辗转”。即使没有造作,由于中舍性存在,与它相应的诸法依各自的作用不增不减,并且不昏沉、不掉举地转起,因此它成为那些法如此转起的缘,能防止增减的状态,所以说它的作用是“防止增减”。也正因为它如此转起的缘,所以说它在那些法中就是中舍性。巴利
Yathātathā vāti sammā micchā vā. Anadhimuccantoti ‘‘idaṃ karissāmi, etaṃ karissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattapubbabhāgasanniṭṭhānahetukena payogakālasanniṭṭhānena anicchinanto. Yattha hi anicchayo, tattha appaṭipatti evāti. Saṃsappanaṃ saṃsayo. So hi ‘‘āsappanā parisappanā’’ti vutto. Asatipi byāpāre tatramajjhattatāya sati taṃsampayuttadhammā sakasakakiccavasena anūnānadhikatāya alīnaanuddhatatāya ca saṃvattantīti sā tesaṃ tathāpavattiyā paccayabhūtā ūnādhikabhāvaṃ nivāreti viyāti ūnādhikanivāraṇarasā vuttā. Tathā pavattipaccayattāyeva tesu dhammesu majjhattatāti ca vuttā.
“禅那一词”指的是“禅那”这个词。“在那些当中”指的是在五种当中。因为“禅那一词有五种支”这个意思,正是针对这起心而说的。并不是在一切起心中都只有五种禅支。句聚就是语句,或者是以触为第五的诸法聚,也就是句的部分。“已说为圆满”是指以五十六等的方式具足圆满。以触为缘而有受,正如“所触者感受,所触者了知”等语所说,所以触是受等的缘。虽然欲等法因为不具备上述法聚的作用,不应在它们当中被提及,但考虑到它们以另一种法聚的形式存在,所以依其自相还是应当被提及,因此说了“虽已说”等话。巴利
Jhānapadassāti jhānasaddassa. Tesūti pañcasu. Pañca hi aṅgāni jhānapadassa atthoti idaṃ saṃvaṇṇiyamānattāyeva imaṃ cittuppādaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na hi sabbasmiṃ cittuppāde pañceva jhānaṅgāni. Padasamūho vākyaṃ, padakoṭṭhāso vā phassapañcamakādi dhammarāsi. Vuttaṃ pūritanti chapaṇṇāsāditāya pūraṇavasena. Phassapaccayā vedanā ‘‘phuṭṭho vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānātī’’tiādivacanato (saṃ. ni. 4.93) phasso vedanādīnaṃ paccayo. Yadipi chandādayo yathāvuttarāsikiccābhāvato tesu na vattabbā, visuṃ rāsiantarabhāvena pana sarūpato vattabbāti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘vuttānampī’’tiādimāha.
广说分的释义巴利
Niddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
2 “存在”是指以自性而存在。因为触应当按境与有境相会合的方式来了知,所以说“触”是心与境的会合。像“以思惟之义为心,以意量之义为意”等说法,心、意这些词是通过思惟等作用来显示自身含义的,因此说“像心、意等词那样,不观待作用差别”。就像世间把变异的称为“变异的”,把境称为“境”,同样,意就是“意”,只是声音上的差别。又如“青”等词,在事物等心上,由于清净性的系属而生起“白净”一词,所以说它观待功德差别。就像“身乐”在这里意思是依于身净色,同样,“心乐”在这里意思是依于心,所以说它观待所依差别。心有一刹那的住和多刹那的住,这叫作心的住,是它的状态差别,因此“心的住”是对状态差别的说明。对于所说的“不贪”的心或个人,以转起的行相为不贪着,所以称为无贪,因此“不贪着”是对其他作用之无的差别的说明。按同样的方式,“不贪着的状态”就是“不贪着性”,这个说明是观待于成为其他状态之差别而说的。作者、工具等状态,只是依假立于自性法的方式而成立,而状态的说明则不观待假立;正因如此,它脱离并排除了其他差别,从无命者状态的角度,特别成为自性的说明,所以“触”以其触之义被称为“唯法之显示的自性句”。触境之心的转起行相就是触的作用,因此说“触作用、触行相”。“相触”中的“相”一词,如在“集起”等中那样,是表示会合之义,所以说“会合之触”。在“我触涅槃乐”等中,获得也称为触和相触,因此说“不是获得之相触”。巴利
2.Santeti sabhāvato vijjamāne. Phassassa visayavisayīnaṃ sannipatanākārena gahetabbattā phusanaṃ visaye cittassa sannipatanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cintanaṭṭhena cittaṃ, mananaṭṭhena mano’’tiādinā cittādisaddā cintanādibyāpāramukhena attano atthaṃ vibhāventīti āha ‘‘cittaṃ manotiādīsu viya kiccavisesaṃ anapekkhitvā’’ti. Yathā loke vikatameva vekataṃ, visayo eva vesayanti vuccati, evaṃ mano eva mānasanti saddamattaviseso. Nīlādi-saddā viya vatthādīsu cittesu parisuddhabhāvanibandhanā paṇḍarasaddassa pavattīti tassa guṇavisesāpekkhatā vuttā. Yathā kāyikaṃ sātanti ettha kāyappasādanissitanti attho, evaṃ cetasikaṃ sātanti ettha cetonissitaṃ sātanti nissayavisesāpekkhatā vuttā. Ekakkhaṇikā nānākkhaṇikā ca cittassa ṭhiti nāma, tassa avatthāvisesoti avatthāvisesāpekkho cittassa ṭhitīti evaṃpakāro niddeso. ‘‘Na lubbhatī’’ti vuttassa cittassa, puggalassa vā pavattiākārabhāvena alubbhanāti alobho vuttoti aññassa kiriyābhāvavisesāpekkho alubbhanāti niddeso. Vuttanayeneva alubbhitassa bhāvo alubbhitattanti ayaṃ niddeso aññassa bhāvabhūtatāvisesāpekkho vutto. Kattukaraṇabhāvādayo sabhāvadhammānaṃ ajjhāropanavaseneva sijjhanti , bhāvaniddeso pana ajjhāropanānapekkho, tatoyeva ca visesantaravinimutto vinivatto visesato nijjīvabhāvagibhāvato sabhāvaniddeso nāma hotīti phassoti idaṃ phusanaṭṭhena ‘‘dhammamattadīpanaṃ sabhāvapada’’nti vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ phusantassa cittassa pavattiākāro phusanabyāpāro hotīti ‘‘phusanakiriyā phusanākāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Samphusanāti saṃ-saddo ‘‘samudayo’’tiādīsu viya samāgamatthadīpakoti āha ‘‘samāgamaphusanā’’ti. ‘‘Phusāmi nekkhammasukha’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 272) paṭilābhopi phusanā samphusanāti ca vuccatīti āha ‘‘na paṭilābhasamphusanā’’ti.
以另一种说法来讲。能让人成就多闻的慧,是“有智慧”的同义词;在技艺等方面具有熟练能力,是“善巧”的同义词;在任何地方都锐利微细,是“聪睿”的同义词;能正确宣说正法,是“分别”的同义词。像这样,在各种不同的慧的殊胜中,那些各自不同的同义词也各别地运行,这就说明那些慧的殊胜在不同时候都可以获得。意思是说,其余那些同义词也大多随顺于此。由于意义不同,也就是慧等意义有差别。像“怒、怒的状态、已怒”这类解说,因为是按自性和行相来显示的,所以仅从文辞上就是分别的说法。而“有智慧”等词,因为是系属于慧的殊胜,所以是从意义上来作分别的说法。为了说明这个意思,才说了“或者”等话。那么,“这样的行相”不同于前面的行相,这是从意义上说明转入分别的原因。巴利
Aparena vevacanena. Bahussutabhāvasampādikāya paññāya paṇḍiccapariyāyo. Sippāyatanādīsu dakkhatābhūtāya kosallapariyāyo, yattha katthaci tikkhasukhumāya nepuññapariyāyo, sammā dhamme paññapentiyā vebhabyāpariyāyoti evamādinā tesu tesu paññāvisesesu te te pariyāyavisesā visesena pavattāti tesaṃ paññāvisesānaṃ nānākāle labbhamānatā vuttā, itarepi anugatā honti yebhuyyenāti adhippāyo. Atthanānattena paññādiatthavisesena. Kodho kujjhanā kujjhitattanti evaṃpakārā niddesā sabhāvākārabhāvadīpanavasena byañjanavaseneva vibhāgavacanaṃ. Paṇḍiccantiādayo paññāvisesanibandhanattā atthavasena vibhāgavacananti imamatthamāha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādinā. Evamākāro panāti purimākārato viseso atthato vibhattigamanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
遮止、制止、遮遣,它的种种差异就是差别,也就是遮止的差异。因为敬重正法而遮止,就是敬重正法的遮止;这种敬重正法遮止的差异,就是敬重正法遮止的差异。而这个敬重正法遮止的差异,又被敬重嗔等所区分,所以说成是以敬重嗔等的差别。被嗔等所区分、所别异的对正法敬重的遮止,就是嗔等差别所区分的遮止。敬重嗔等本身,由于它的差异,也就是敬重正法之敌对者的差异,所以敬重嗔就是敬重正法的敌对者。敬重抹恩、敬重利养、敬重恭敬是敬重正法的敌对者,因此,以敬重正法之敌对者这一差别,不敬重正法虽然依其本身而成为一体,却也具有了差异。然而,因为嗔在意义上就是嗔恚。抹恩是以嗔恚为主、以破坏他人功德为行相而转起的诸不善蕴。而对它的敬重,也只是以恭敬地造作它们的方式而转起。敬重利养是对四种资具的恭敬,是对那些同样善加准备的资具的欲得性。而对这两者的恭敬造作,如此转起的只是欲贪,因此说“以敬重正法之敌对者的差异,不敬重正法具有了差异”。正如这样,四种不敬重正法已被列举。在此,“不敬重正法”一语,在前一种解释中,“非敬重正法”,意思是不成为敬重正法。在第二种解释中,“敬重正法的敌对者”,敬重正法本身或者就是敌对者,由于它的差异,即敬重正法之敌对者的差异,在此应当如此理解其义。因为对于敬重嗔和抹恩者,与正法差别相应的转起差别,其敌对者是慈。对于敬重利养和恭敬者,其敌对者是无欲和知足。因此,“敬重嗔不是敬重正法”,也就是说敬重嗔是某种敬重正法的敌对者,这个意思就被说出来了。对于敬重抹恩等也是如此。这样作之后,“四种正法、敬重正法而非敬重嗔……敬重正法而非敬重恭敬”这段所引的教说也就得到了证明。贪不存在就是无贪,贪染不存在就是无贪染,如此等类无贪等的遮止,与被贪等所区分,由于与“触、触击”等类不同,所以说为“与触等有差异”。在此,“与触等”中,无贪染等也应当理解为被“等”字所摄。应当以“贪的敌对者是无贪”等方式来连接“以贪等的敌对者”。其余与前相同。由于无贪、无嗔、无痴的远离性,以及作为敌对者的状态,可以得知它们互相不同,又由于作为贪等所区分的遮止的状态,以及作为贪等的敌对者的状态,所以他说“无贪……应当连接”。应当以多种方式阐明的意义,就是大意义。以恭敬的方式,为了听者。巴利
Paṭikkhipanaṃ paṭisedhanaṃ paṭikkhepo, tassa nānattaṃ viseso paṭikkhepanānattaṃ, saddhammagarutāya paṭikkhepo saddhammagarutāpaṭikkhepo, tena saddhammagarutāpaṭikkhepena nānattaṃ saddhammagarutāpaṭikkhepanānattaṃ. Taṃ saddhammagarutāpaṭikkhepanānattaṃ pana kodhagarutādibhedabhinnanti ‘‘kodhagarutādivisiṭṭhenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kodhādīhi visiṭṭho bhinno saddhammagarutāya paṭikkhepo paṭisedhanaṃ kodhādivisiṭṭhapaṭikkhepo. Kodhagarutādiyeva, tassa nānattena saddhammagarutāpaṭipakkhanānattenāti kodhagarutā saddhammagarutāya paṭipakkho. Makkhalābhasakkāragarutā saddhammagarutāya paṭipakkhoti saddhammagarutāya paṭipakkhabhāvavisesena asaddhammagarutā tabbhāvena ekībhūtāpi nānattaṃ gatā. Yasmā pana kodho atthato dosoyeva. Makkho dosappadhānā paraguṇaviddhaṃsanākārappavattā akusalā khandhā. Taggarutā ca tesaṃ sādaraabhisaṅkharaṇavasena pavattanameva. Lābhagarutā catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ sakkāragarutā, tesaṃyeva susaṅkhatānaṃ laddhakāmatā. Tadubhayesu ca ādarakiriyā tathāpavattā icchāyeva, tasmā ‘‘saddhammagarutāpaṭipakkhanānattena asaddhammā nānattaṃ gatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi cattāro asaddhammā icceva uddiṭṭhā. Asaddhammagarutāti ettha ca purimasmiṃ vikappe ‘‘na saddhammagarutā’’ti saddhammagarutā na hotīti attho. Dutiyasmiṃ saddhammagarutāya paṭipakkhoti saddhammagarutā eva vā paṭipakkho, tassa nānattena saddhammagarutāpaṭipakkhanānattenāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kodhamakkhagarutānañhi saddhammavisesā pavattibhedabhinnā mettā paṭipakkho. Lābhasakkāragarutānaṃ appicchatā santosā. Tena kodhagarutā na saddhammagarutāti kodhagarutā kāyaci saddhammagarutāya paṭipakkhoti ayamattho vutto hoti. Tathā makkhagarutādīsupi. Evañca katvā ‘‘cattāro saddhammā saddhammagarutā na kodhagarutā…pe… saddhammagarutā na sakkāragarutā’’ti (a. ni. 4.44) āgatatantipi samatthitā bhavati. Lobho na hotīti alobho lubbhanā na hotīti alubbhanāti evamādiko alobhotiādīnaṃ lobhādivisiṭṭho paṭikkhepo ‘‘phasso phusanā’’tiādikehi visadisabhāvato ‘‘phassādīhi nānatta’’nti vutto. Phassādīhīti cettha alubbhanādayopi ādi-saddena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Lobhādipaṭipakkhenāti ‘‘lobhapaṭipakkho alobho’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Alobhādosāmohānaṃ vidhuratāya paṭipakkhabhāvena ca labbhamāno aññamaññavisadiso lobhādivisiṭṭhapaṭikkhepabhāvena lobhādipaṭipakkhabhāvena ca viññāyatīti āha ‘‘alobhā…pe… yojetabba’’nti. Bahūhi pakārehi dīpetabbatthatā mahatthatā. Ādaravasena sotūnaṃ.
3 即使在一个刹那中只有一个所缘,但因为(心)能在六种所缘中生起,所以说“或那些”等。对于那(喜受)——就是悦乐之乐。“已生”:为了说明这个词的含义,所以说“以作为因的状态,依触之义而转起”。这里说的是:就像被称为心之悦的喜受一同生起那样,它以伴随与它相应的触而转起,因此说“从彼而生”。令悦:以证得和希求,使心不倾向别处。巴利
3. Yadipi ekasmiṃ khaṇe ekaṃyeva ārammaṇaṃ hoti, chasupi pana ārammaṇesu uppattirahattā ‘‘tehi vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassāti sātassa sukhassa. Jātāti etassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kāraṇabhāvena phassatthaṃ pavattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā cetasikasātasaṅkhātā somanassavedanā saheva uppajjati, evaṃ tadanurūpaphassasahitā hutvā pavattā tajjāti vuttā. Sādayatīti adhigamāsīsāya anaññaninnaṃ karoti.
5 对于那个意识界来说,说它是“从那个生出来的”,或者说它是“与那个相应的”,这两种说法都说不通。即使触并不是识的殊胜缘,它仍然是识的缘——针对“应当说‘从彼相应的意识界之触而生’”这一责难,论主说“并非就是那个”等话。用“从那些所缘生起,所以是相应的”这个含义,也不能说“从相应的意识界之触而生”。不过,对于识来说,“相应”这个假名安立是可以成立的。因为这样,论主用“这又有什么用呢”等话,说明了触等也应该那样来解说。巴利
5.Na tassā tajjatāti tassā manoviññāṇadhātuyā tassāruppā ‘‘tassa jātā’’ti vā ubhayathāpi tajjatā na yujjati. Yadipi phasso viññāṇassa visesapaccayo na hoti, tathāpi so tassa paccayo hotiyevāti tassa tajjāmanoviññāṇadhātusamphassajatā vattabbāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘na ca tadevā’’tiādi. Tehi ārammaṇehi jātā tajjāti imināpi atthena tajjā manoviññāṇadhātusamphassajāti vattuṃ na sakkā. Viññāṇassa pana tajjatāpaññatti labbhateva. Tathā hi ‘‘kiṃ vā etenā’’tiādinā phassādīnaṃ tathā desetabbataṃ āha.
7 心把所缘当作目标而朝向它活动时,这种状态就是寻;从意义上说,它就像把所缘拉向自己一样,所以说“把所缘拉引过来就是寻”。巴利
7. Cittassa ārammaṇe ānayanākārappavatto vitakko atthato ārammaṇaṃ tattha ākaḍḍhanto viya hotīti ‘‘ārammaṇassa ākaḍḍhanaṃ vitakkana’’nti vuttaṃ.
8 伺的运行方式,是对所缘不断反复地接触、琢磨;它在那里就像盘旋不去,又像从四面八方来回游走。因此说“从四面八方来回游走,就是伺”。巴利
8. Ārammaṇassa anumajjanākārappavatto vicāro tattha paribbhamanto viya samantato caranto viya ca hotīti ‘‘samantato caraṇaṃ vicaraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
11 同样地,所谓“仅仅处于未确立的状态”,意思是,杀生等手段仅仅处于未确立的状态,而不是处于强有力的状态。巴利
11.Tathā avaṭṭhānamattabhāvatoti pāṇavadhādisādhanaavaṭṭhānamattabhāvato, na balavabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
14 心识中,通过某种法,所缘现起并照耀,那个法就被说成是“现起”和“照耀”。因此说:“现起与照耀,正是念本身。”巴利
14. Yena dhammena citte ārammaṇaṃ upatiṭṭhati jotati ca, so dhammo upaṭṭhānaṃ jotananti ca vuttoti āha ‘‘upaṭṭhānaṃ jotanañca satiyevā’’ti.
16 以“细”的含义来说,就是微细的意思。巴利
16.Saṇhaṭṭhenāti sukhumaṭṭhena.
30 “有”这个词,说的是惭。巴利
30.Bhāvoti hiriyanaṃ vadati.
33 “不应嗔害”这句话,是在说明“无嗔”这个词的业格含义。巴利
33.Nabyāpādetabboti abyāpajja-saddassa kammatthataṃ āha.
42-43 42-43. 如果无过失法的轻快性是指能非常迅速地转换,那么有过失法的情况又怎么说呢?所以接着用“无明障碍”等来说明。通过“它们沉重”这一句,说明虽然一切非色法都在同一刹那生起,但与痴相应的那些法,其活动方式格外迟缓。不过,这种迟缓的方式要在相续中才显得清楚。巴利
42-43. Yadi anavajjadhammānaṃ sīghasīghaparivattanasamatthatā lahutā, sāvajjadhammānaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘avijjānīvaraṇāna’’ntiādi. Tesaṃ bhāvogarutāti etena satipi sabbesaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ samānakhaṇatte mohasampayuttānaṃ sātisayo dandho pavattiākāroti dasseti. So pana tesaṃ dandhākāro santāne pākaṭo hoti.
44-45 不抗拒,就是不违逆。巴利
44-45. Appaṭighāto avilomanaṃ.
46-47 “湿润”,就是渗漏。巴利
46-47.Kilinnanti avassutaṃ.
50-51 退转就是幻,也叫作“过速”。涂抹疮口就是覆盖伤口。竹,因为被认定为应当布施之物而被执取,就叫做竹施。巴利
50-51.Paccosakkanaṃ māyā yā accasarātipi vuccati. Arumakkhanaṃ vaṇālepanaṃ. Veḷu eva dātabbabhāvena pariggahito veḷudānaṃ nāma.
部分门的讨论注释巴利
Koṭṭhāsavārakathāvaṇṇanā
58-120 “他们”是指触五支等。“依归类而摄”的意思是:依靠共通性等某种相似性而摄,并不是像触等那样,仅以各自独立的法而存在。同样,“因不分散”是指:不像触等那样以自性各别宣说。虽然欲等法在“摄空门”里也没有以自性宣说,但为了显示它们包含在蕴、处、界的集合中,所以说“然而因为……”等。“彼解说”就是在行蕴的解说中。由于蕴在成为处、界时并没有变异,所以遮止非蕴的状态,也应看作遮止非处、非界的状态。“不应搁置‘或又’”,是就它们包含在蕴等集合中而言。但在注释书的“列举等”中,既说“对于仅以‘或又’而说的那些,同样地摄属是合理的”,又说“除了‘或又’者”。即使没有以自性宣说,只要是随心生起的法,其蕴等状态就不应被遮止,因此说“不应搁置‘或又’”,应知这是两者的意旨。巴利
58-120.Teti phassapañcamakādayo. Saṅgahagamanenevāti sādhāraṇatādinā kenaci sadisatālesena, na phassādayo viya visuṃ dhammabhāvenevāti attho. Tathā avippakiṇṇattāti phassādayo viya sarūpena visuṃ visuṃ avuttattā. Yadipi chandādayo saṅgahasuññatavāresupi sarūpena na vuttā, khandhāyatanadhāturāsīsu pana saṅgahitāyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Taṃniddeseti saṅkhārakkhandhaniddese. Khandhānaṃ dhātāyatanabhāve byabhicārābhāvato akhandhabhāvanivāraṇena anāyatanādhātubhāvanivāraṇampi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na yevāpanakā ṭhapetabbāti khandhādirāsiantogadhataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Uddesādīsu pana ‘‘yevāpanātveva vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tathāyeva saṅgaho yutto’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā yevāpanake’’ti vuttaṃ. Sarūpena avuttānampi cittuppādapariyāpannānaṃ khandhādibhāvo na vāretabboti na yevāpanakā ṭhapetabbāti vuttanti ubhayesampi adhippāyo veditabbo.
所谓“以食为缘”,意思是以支持缘来说的。这里说食对诸法有支持的作用,是因为这种支持作用很明显,并不是说食没有令它们生起的作用。因为对于食生八法色和受等法,食确实能令它们生起。如果这里指的是支持缘,那么对段食来说暂时可以成立,对其他几种食又怎么说呢?所以接着说“正如……”等。“俱生等缘”是指俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘,或者指大四法。“以一种方式”是说以支持的方式帮助色法和非色法。而这正是它们作为食的作用。由于有“行缘识”的说法,思对识的缘力特别强,所以说“识特别地……”。巴利
Āhārapaccayasaṅkhātenāti upatthambhakapaccayasaṅkhātena. So ca āhārānaṃ upatthambhakabhāvo pākaṭoti katvā vutto, na janakattābhāvato. Ojaṭṭhamakarūpassa hi vedanādīnañca āhāraṇato tesaṃ janakattaṃ labbhatīti. Yadi upatthambhako idha paccayoti adhippeto, kabaḷīkārāhārassa tāva hotu, itaresaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi . Sahajātādipaccayeti sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccaye vadati, mahācatukkaṃ vā, ekenākārenāti rūpārūpānaṃ upatthambhakattena upakārakabhāvamāha. So eva ca nesaṃ āharaṇakiccaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti vacanato cetanāya viññāṇassa paccayabhāvo sātisayoti āha ‘‘viññāṇaṃ visesenā’’ti.
“如所行道”这个说法,应当理解为是以因果不分的表达方式来说的。具有不同刹那的八正道是它的亲依止,所以叫“八正道亲依止”。当圣道的“如所行道”这个同义语被说出来时,为了说明它之前那个阶段——也就是依不分表达而成立、作为来处的前分——跟它并非完全不同,所以说了“前分……显示……”。“识的心差别”就是指了别状态的种种差别,所以说“了别本身就是心差别”。说到“受蕴等”时,其中的“等”字也把“有二处”等文中说的意处等包含在内。彼遮止,就是遮止那生起解说的状态。通过“已作”显示:此心中所得的食、根、禅支、道支、果、因,无论有多少,即使未以“有一识食”等宣说,依义理亦已宣说。在其余处亦是此理法。巴利
Yathāgatamaggoti vutto kāraṇaphalānaṃ abhedūpacārenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, nānākkhaṇiko aṭṭhaṅgikamaggo upanissayo etassāti aṭṭhaṅgikamaggūpanissayo. Ariyamaggassa yathāgatamaggapariyāyo vuccamāno tassa yā purimakālabhūtā abhedopacārasiddhā āgamanāvatthā tato nātivilakkhaṇāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetīti āha ‘‘pubbabhāga…pe… dīpitā’’ti. Viññāṇassa cittavicittatā vijānanabhāvavisesā evāti āha ‘‘vijānanameva cittavicittatā’’ti. Vedanākkhandhādīnanti ādi-saddena ‘‘dvāyatanāni hontī’’tiādīsu vuttamanāyatanādayopi saṅgaṇhāti. Tappaṭikkhepoti tassa jātiniddesabhāvassa paṭikkhepo. Kato hotīti etena āhārindriyajhānamaggaphalahetuyo yattakā imasmiṃ citte labbhanti, te sabbepi ‘‘eko viññāṇāhāro hotī’’tiādinā avuttāpi atthato vuttāyevāti dasseti. Esa nayo aññatthāpi.
空性节等的解说巴利
Suññatavārādivaṇṇanā
121-145 对于“如所说”这句话,它指的是所说的那种种类集合。巴利
121-145.Yathāvuttesamayeti vuttappakārasamūhe.
146 激励、派遣、督促。巴利
146.Ussāhanaṃ pesanaṃ niyojanaṃ.
156-159 “不极等持”是就种种转向的运用而说的。即使对“或又”这一类,也显示出无差别,因为悲与喜同样会生起。巴利
156-159.Nātisamāhitāyāti nānāvajjanūpacāraṃ sandhāya vadati. Yevāpanakehipi nibbisesataṃ dasseti karuṇāmuditānampi uppajjanato.
身体和语言的行为,就是身体和语言的活动,或者就是表。所谓“未圆满修习”,说的是此前阶段的修习。巴利
Kāyavacīkiriyā kāyavacīpavatti, viññatti eva vā. Asamattabhāvananti pubbabhāgabhāvanamāha.
初禅论的解释巴利
Paṭhamajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
160 把后分省略之后,说“色有即色”,应当像“有色者见诸色”(《中部》2.248;3.312;《法集论》248;《无碍解道》1.209)以及“色贪”等(《法集论》363)中的用法那样来理解。由加行所成就的色禅,既然也是超越色有的方法,那么断定“它就是导致色界投生之道”并不成立;同样,既然也存在因其他缘缺失等而不能导致色界投生的禅那,那么断定“只有它才是导致色界投生之道”也不成立。若如此,就会引出这样的责难:只有能导致色界投生的那一个相应禅那才是色界善,而不能导致色界投生的就不是——于是以“并非一切善禅……”等语提出论难。其中,通称的词也依上下文而成为限定性的说明,所以说“善禅的道性”。巴利
160.Uttarapadalopaṃkatvā ‘‘rūpabhavo rūpa’’nti vutto, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passati (ma. ni. 2.248; 3.312; dha. sa. 248; paṭi. ma. 1.209), rūparāgo’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 363) viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Payogasampāditassa rūpajjhānassa rūpabhavātikkamassapi upāyabhāvato yathā rūpūpapattiyā eva maggoti ayaṃ niyamo na yujjati, evaṃ paccayantaravikalatādīhi rūpūpapattiyā anabhinipphādakassapi atthibhāvato rūpūpapattiyā maggo evāti ayampi niyamo na yujjati. Evañca sati yadeva rūpūpapattiyā nipphādakaṃ, tasseva sampayuttassa rūpāvacarakusalabhāvo, na anabhinipphādakassāti ayamattho āpannoti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti na sabbassa kusalajjhānassātiādinā. Tattha sāmaññasaddopi adhikāravasena visesaniddiṭṭho hotīti ‘‘kusalajjhānassa maggabhāvo’’ti vuttaṃ.
色界投生的生起,其本性就是令色界成熟的本性。虽然它也是果报法,但一切善与不善所共通的果报法性这一共性,是以譬喻的方式说为“犹如果报法性”。因为共性也是被当作有别于个别特性来表述的。所谓“一切共通”,是指对于色界投生,无论能使之成就的,还是因缺少其他条件等而不能使之成就的,所有已证得的禅那都共通。由此显示了上分句的限定已被包含。通过“除此之外别无他道”这一句,也应理解为:此禅那作为导致色界投生的方法,在同类中是共通的,通过遮止异类,则在异类中不共通。其余两个是信与惭。如果因为“修行应以人为先导”的教说,修行者会确定时机,那么对于不具备修行的人,又是怎么说的呢?所以说“某些”等。其中,“某些”是指在奢摩他修习中已作加行的人。因为对他们来说,在证得道之前尚未证得的禅那,就像无碍解等一样,仅仅因为证得了道,那些禅那就得以成就。巴利
Rūpūpapattijanakasabhāvo rūpabhavavipaccanasabhāvoti tassapi vipākadhammabhāve satipi sabbakusalākusalasādhāraṇaṃ vipākadhammabhāvasāmaññaṃ ‘‘vipākadhammabhāvo viyā’’ti udāharaṇabhāvena vuttaṃ. Sāmaññampi hi visesato bhinnaṃ katvā voharīyatīti. Sabbasamānoti rūpūpapattiyā nipphādakassa paccayantaravikalatādīhi anipphādakassa ca sabbassa yathādhigatassa jhānassa sādhāraṇo. Etena uttarapadāvadhāraṇassa pariggahitataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ito añño maggo nāma natthī’’ti imināpi sajātiyā sādhāraṇo aññajātivinivattiyā anaññasādhāraṇo imassa jhānassa rūpūpapattiyā upāyabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Itare dve saddhā hirī ca. Yadi paṭipadāya sādhetabbato puggalapubbaṅgamāya desanāya bhāventena samayavavatthānaṃ kataṃ. Paṭipadārahitesu kathanti āha ‘‘kesañcī’’tiādi. Tattha kesañcīti samathabhāvanāya katādhikārānaṃ. Tesañhi maggādhigamanato pubbe anadhigatajjhānānaṃ paṭisambhidādayo viya maggādhigameneva tāni samijjhanti.
“其他”是指由圣道成就而来的其他法。“在他们中”是指即使对尚未具备修行的人,也因圣道成就的缘故。难道圣道成就者就不依来由而有修行可得吗?否则,“不像欲界那样,不依修行而生起”以及“大多数世间禅那也不无修行而成就”这些说法就会相违。并非如此,因为这是按大多数情况来说,而且是观待个人的差别。能成就圣道的禅那只对某些人才有,因此,其他大多数的世间禅那,对凡夫和未作加行的圣者来说,不无修行而成就,正是依这些人而说。即使圣道成就者的禅那,也像它的果报一样,因为与善的圣道不相似,且不是它的果报,所以不依道的来由而有修行是合理的,这样,此禅那的无修行性就成立了。这样确立之后,纯粹的九种教说也就被很好地贯彻了。同样地,在出世间论中将说“世间禅那也”等。巴利
Aññānīti ariyamaggasiddhito aññāni. Tesupīti ariyamaggena siddhattā paṭipadārahitesupi. Nanu ca ariyamaggasiddhassapi āgamanavasena paṭipadā upalabbhatiyeva. Itarathā ‘‘na kāmāvacaraṃ viya vinā paṭipadāya uppajjatī’’ti , ‘‘bahutaraṃ lokiyajjhānampi na vinā paṭipadāya ijjhatī’’ti ca vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti? Na, yebhuyyena gahaṇato puggalavisesāpekkhattā ca. Ariyamaggasamijjhanakañhi jhānaṃ kassacideva hoti, tasmā itaraṃ bahutaraṃ lokiyajjhānaṃ puthujjanassa ariyassa ca akatādhikārassa na vinā paṭipadāya sijjhatīti tesaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Ariyamaggasiddhassapi jhānassa vipākānaṃ viya kusalena ariyamaggena sadisattābhāvato atabbipākattā ca na maggāgamanavasena paṭipadā yujjati, evamassa paṭipadāviraho siddho. Evañca katvā suddhikanavakadesanāpi suṭṭhu nītā hoti. Tathā ca vakkhati lokuttarakathāyaṃ ‘‘lokiyajjhānampī’’tiādi (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 277).
对于轮回依处来说,渴爱是特殊条件的来源,通过让渴爱变弱,出离依处就得以增长,所以说“以净化渴爱杂染来滋养依处”。所谓“滋养依处”,是指作为修禅那的条件、由先前加行等而成就的意乐圆满。而它是通过去除渴爱的灼热才产生的,所以说“以净化渴爱杂染”。巴利
Vaṭṭāsayassa visesapaccayabhūtāya taṇhāya tanukaraṇavasena vivaṭṭāsayassa vaḍḍhananti āha ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkilesasodhanena āsayaposana’’nti. Āsayaposananti ca jhānabhāvanāya paccayabhūtā pubbayogādivasena siddhā ajjhāsayasampadā. Sā pana taṇhupatāpavigamena hotīti āha ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkilesasodhanenā’’ti.
昏沉睡眠等:指昏沉、睡眠、掉举恶作、疑。舍断:指能舍断的。巴利
Thinamiddhādīnanti thinamiddhauddhaccakukkuccavicikicchānaṃ. Pahānanti pahāyakaṃ.
对于与那相似的事物:指以广大性等而与初禅之定相似的那些事物。巴利
Taṃsadisesūti mahaggatabhāvādinā paṭhamajjhānasamādhisadisesu.
被称为“喜乐”的、具有喜与乐的禅那,就像说“无病”那样;为了说明这个意思,就说“喜乐……语尾被说了”。或者,对于道来说,由于以涅槃为所缘,也应当配合“以如实特相为所缘的审察”这一层意思。“不忘失法”,就是不坏失的本性。巴利
Pītisukhavantaṃ jhānaṃ pītisukhanti vuttaṃ yathā arisasoti dassento ‘‘pītisukha…pe… akāro vutto’’ti āha. Maggassapi vā nibbānārammaṇato tathalakkhaṇūpanijjhānatā yojetabbā. Asammosadhammanti avināsabhāvaṃ.
第二禅的讨论注释巴利
Dutiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
161-162 161-162. 在见过失者的各个禅那刹那,令其不生的法性得以现起,这就是止息、离染和断除。这里所说的,只是寻等本身作为禅支才被这样处理,而不是与它们相应的触等,所以说寻等的止息等是合乎道理的。然而,因为寻等就像与它们相应的法一样,被此(寻等)视为粗劣的,所以它们本身就是见过失的。因此,当不加区分地对寻等以及它们的俱生法说止息等时,实际上只对寻、伺等说止息等,这就叫做“增语令知他义”,也就是说,某种说法能显示出某种差别。为了说明这一点,所以说了“由他们寻、伺”等。虽然寻、伺的超越等说法是各别安立的,但通过对所断支的解说,以共通性用心整体把握,以部分来观察整体,为了说明这一点,所以说了“他们……彼为能显”。现在,为了说明即使不以部分来观察整体,寻、伺止息的说法与喜离染等的说法在各自范围内也有共同的运作,所以说了“或者”等。巴利
161-162. Diṭṭhādīnavassa taṃtaṃjhānakkhaṇe anuppajjanadhammatāpādanaṃ vūpasamanaṃ virajjanaṃ pahānañcāti idhādhippetavitakkādayoyeva jhānaṅgabhūtā tathā karīyanti, na taṃsampayuttaphassādayoti vitakkādīnaṃyeva vūpasamādivacanaṃ ñāyāgataṃ. Yasmā pana vitakkādayo viya taṃsampayuttadhammāpi etena etaṃ oḷārikanti diṭṭhādīnavā eva, tasmā avisesena vitakkādīnaṃ taṃsahajātānañca vūpasamādike vattabbe vitakkavicārādīnaṃyeva vūpasamādikaṃ vuccamānaṃ ‘‘adhikavacanamaññamatthaṃ bodhetī’’ti kiñci visesaṃ dīpetīti taṃ dassento ‘‘yehi vitakkavicārehī’’tiādimāha. Visuṃ visuṃ ṭhitānipi vitakkavicārasamatikkamavacanādīni paheyyaṅganiddesatāsāmaññena cittena samūhato gahetvā avayavena samudāyopalakkhaṇaṃ katanti dassento ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… taṃ dīpakanti vutta’’nti āha. Idāni avayavena samudāyopalakkhaṇaṃ vinā vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanena pītivirāgādivacanānaṃ savisaye samānabyāpārataṃ dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha.
在显示彼(净信)时,就是通过“凡是信、信解”等语句,在禅那分别中显示净信的时候。所谓“同一所依的解说”,正是在那禅那分别的论题摘句等处,用“净信”这一个同一所依的说法,把信和禅那一起说出来。巴利
Tasmiṃ dassiteti ‘‘yā saddhā saddahanā’’tiādinā jhānavibhaṅge sampasādane dassite. Samānādhikaraṇaniddesenevāti tattheva vibhaṅge uddesapaduddhārādīsu saddhājhānānaṃ ‘‘sampasādana’’nti ekādhikaraṇatāvacaneneva.
通过粗显禅支这一角度,当“随顺彼禅的念”这样说时,对种种禅那欲求的镇伏,已经由“寻伺止息”等说法表明,所以说“这些的止息就是渴爱的断除”。既然“寻伺止息”这一说法是在显示对寻伺离染,那么为了说明为什么还要再次显示这两者都不存在,就说了“而凡”等文。巴利
Oḷārikaṅgamukhena ‘‘tadanudhammatā satī’’ti vuttāya taṃtaṃjhānanikantiyā vikkhambhanaṃ vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanādīhi pakāsitanti āha ‘‘taṇhāppahānaṃ etesaṃ vūpasamana’’nti (vibha. 799). Yato vitakkavicāresu virattabhāvadīpakaṃ vitakkavicāravūpasamavacananti tadubhayābhāvadīpanaṃ puna katanti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
第三禅的解说巴利
Tatiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
163 精进与舍,这里说的是:在策励和抑制之中,因为不施加功用而保持中舍。以在执取中保持中立的态度,对诸行保持中舍,所以叫行舍;这样生起的观慧,就是行舍智。而它在对象上的分类,如“八种行舍”等,已在经典中说过;为了显示那部经典的其余内容,所以说了“初禅”等。其中,“生起”是指由过去业为缘,在这里出生,也就是诸蕴的出生。“转起”是指这样生起之后的持续运作,也就是如“入定者或再生者”所说的异熟转起。“相”是指一切行法都以相的方式呈现。“积集”是指作为未来结生之因的业。“结生”指未来的再生。“趣”指结生所依之趣。“生起”指诸蕴的生起。“再生”指如“入定者或再生者”所说的异熟转起。“生”指以老等为缘、以有为缘的生。“老死等”则是显而易见的。在这里,生起等五种只是依行舍智的对象而说的,其余则是它们的同义词。“生起与生”这一对,是“生起”和“结生”的同义词。“趣与再生”这一对,是“转起”的同义词。老等则是“相”的同义词。巴利
163.Vīriyaṃ upekkhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paggahaniggahesu byāpārākaraṇena upekkhiyatī’’ti. Gahaṇe majjhattabhāvena saṅkhāre upekkhatīti saṅkhārupekkhā, tathāpavattā vipassanā paññā. Tassā pana visayato pabhedo ‘‘aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.57) yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vutto, taṃ pāḷisesaṃ dassento ‘‘paṭhamajjhāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha uppādanti purimakammapaccayā idha uppattiṃ. Pavattanti tathā uppannassa pavattiṃ. Nimittanti sabbampi saṅkhāragataṃ nimittabhāvena upaṭṭhānato. Āyūhananti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Paṭisandhinti āyatiṃ upapattiṃ. Gatinti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Nibbattinti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattinti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ vipākappavattiṃ. Jātinti jarādīnaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ bhavapaccayā jātiṃ. Jarāmaraṇādayo pākaṭā eva. Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇassa visayavasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. ‘‘Nibbatti jātī’’ti idañhi dvayaṃ uppādassa ceva paṭisandhiyā ca vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Gati upapatti cā’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa. Jarādayo nimittassāti.
“已存在的”,说的是五蕴。“由这些”,说的是由禅那心等起的色法。巴利
Bhūtassāti khandhapañcakassa. Etehīti jhānacittasamuṭṭhitarūpehi.
五法体系的解释巴利
Pañcakanayavaṇṇanā
167 “行相差别”就是行相的不同。因为诸法有多种行相,而世尊以正觉无余地、如实地证悟了这一切。正如所说:“一切法以一切行相,出现在佛陀世尊的智门之前。”这里的意思是:属于第二禅支分的,并不属于第一禅支分。因此他说“因为第一禅本身……”等。从义理上说,四法道和五法道是互相含摄的。在五法道中,可能会有这样的疑问:第二禅到底是因为有伺而属于第一禅支分,还是因为无寻而属于第二禅支分?为了消除这个疑问,才说了这段话。以“为什么?”等说明了其中的理由。这里的关联是:在经典教说中,它们就是归属于第二禅本身。而“ca”这个字,是为了表明:不仅在这里,而且在经典教说等其他教说中,上述禅那也不具有第一禅支分的性质。现在为了显示它的归属,所以说了“寻的止息……”等。由此显示,在经典中也能获得五法道。巴利
167.Ākārabhedanti ākāravisesaṃ. Anekākārā hi dhammā, te ca niravasesaṃ yāthāvato bhagavatā abhisambuddhā. Yathāha – ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’ti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. 3.5). Dutiyajjhānapakkhikaṃ na paṭhamajjhānapakkhikanti adhippāyo. Tenevāha ‘‘paṭhamajjhānameva hī’’tiādi. Atthato hi catukkapañcakanayā aññamaññānuppavesino. Pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānaṃ kiṃ savicāratāya paṭhamajjhānapakkhikaṃ udāhu avitakkatāya dutiyajjhānapakkhikanti siyā āsaṅkāti tadāsaṅkānivattanatthamidaṃ vuttaṃ. Kasmātiādinā tattha kāraṇamāha. Suttantadesanāsu ca dutiyajjhānameva bhajantīti sambandho. Ca-saddena na kevalaṃ idheva, atha kho suttantadesanāsupīti desanantarepi yathāvuttajjhānassa paṭhamajjhānapakkhikattābhāvaṃ dasseti. Idāni bhajanampi dassetuṃ ‘‘vitakkavūpasamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena suttantepi pañcakanayassa labbhamānataṃ dasseti.
难道在经里不是只分了四种禅那,根本没有五法道吗?不是这样。因为借着“有寻有伺定”等三种定的说法,五法道是可以成立的。不过,这是依四法道来安立五法道并加以分别的,所以在那里也应当抉择出五法道。因为“寻与伺的止息”这句话,可以理解为:寻的止息、伺的止息、寻与伺两者的止息。同样,“无寻无伺”也可以包含三种情况:断除寻而成无寻但还有伺,断除伺而成无伺但还有寻,以及寻和伺两者都断除,也就是无寻无伺。巴利
Nanu ca suttante cattāriyeva jhānāni vibhattānīti pañcakanayo natthiyevāti? Na, ‘‘savitakkasavicāro samādhī’’tiādinā samādhittayāpadesena pañcakanayassa labbhamānattā. Catukkanayanissito pana katvā pañcakanayo vibhattoti tatthāpi pañcakanayo niddhāretabbo. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti hi vitakkassa vicārassa vitakkavicārānañca vitakkavicārānanti sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā avitakkaavicārānanti ca vinā saha ca vicārena vitakkappahānena avitakkaṃ saha vinā ca vitakkena vicārappahānena avicāranti avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ avitakkaavicārañcāti vā tividhampi sakkā saṅgaṇhituṃ.
“第二”这个说法,既通于无寻的禅那,也通于无寻无伺的禅那。之所以能证得为第二,是因为即使只有伺,它也与通过断除寻、伺二者而证得的禅那具有相同的法性。这样说来,在五法道的解说中,第二禅虽然寻已寂止,但因为与寻相伴的伺还没有寂止,所以寻并未真正完全寂止。为了显示:就像在无寻无伺的禅那中,单凭伺的寂止就能使寻寂止,以及其余诸法与彼相同,于是以“由寻与伺的寂止,内心清净,心成专一,无寻无伺,定生喜乐,成就第三禅而住”这句话,把第三禅与四法道中的第二禅说为无有差别。因为这两种情况都是由于缺少同伴、断除寻而成为无寻,定生喜乐也相同,所以法性相同,也就解说为“第二”。即使只是无伺,也像无寻无伺那样,被解说为:“在某个时候,为了投生色界而修习道,成就无寻唯伺、定生喜乐的第二禅而住。”也就是无寻、定生喜乐。或者,对于初禅中与寻俱行的伺,超越寻而住于第二禅,但见到那里仍有过失,于是把两者一起超越,这在五法道中就说为第三禅,因为它应当被证得为第三。然而,它从初禅无间生起,也具有第二禅的性质。那么,为什么在这里不把它按本来面目说为第二禅呢?因为要随顺所化众生的意乐。顺应众生意乐的教说,就是经教的教说。巴利
Dutiyanti ca vitakkarahite vitakkavicāradvayarahite ca ñāyāgatā desanā. Dutiyaṃ adhigantabbattā vicāramattarahitepi dvayappahānādhigatasamānadhammattā. Evañca katvā pañcakanayaniddese dutiye vūpasantopi vitakko taṃsahāyavicārāvūpasamena na sammāvūpasantoti vitakkavicāradvayarahite viya vicāravūpasameneva tadupasamaṃ sesadhammasamānatañca dassentena ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti tatiyaṃ catukkanaye dutiyena nibbisesaṃ vibhattaṃ. Duvidhassapi sahāyavirahena aññathā ca vitakkappahānena avitakkattaṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhattañca samānanti samānadhammattāpi dutiyanti niddeso. Vicāramattampi hi vitakkavicāradvayarahitaṃ viya ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti avitakkavicāramattaṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti avitakkaṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhanti vibhattaṃ. Paṭhamajjhāne vā sahacārīsu vitakkavicāresu ekaṃ atikkamitvā dutiyampi tatraṭṭhameva dosato disvā ubhayampi sahātikkamantassa pañcakanaye tatiyaṃ vuttaṃ tatiyaṃ adhigantabbattā. Paṭhamato anantarabhāvena panassa dutiyabhāvo ca uppajjati. Kasmā panettha sarūpato pañcakanayo na vibhattoti? Vineyyajjhāsayato. Yathānulomadesanā hi suttantadesanāti.
行道四法等的解说巴利
Paṭipadācatukkādivaṇṇanā
176-180 “随顺彼”是指与那初禅等相应的自性。当禅修者看到已证得的禅那寂静、殊胜,因而生起爱乐时,与它相应的诸蕴,或者作为那禅那守护者的念本身,因为契合那禅那,所以被称为“随顺法之念”。“有时”是指:在首先证得初禅之后,保持同样的坐姿,不需要其他加行,就能证得第二禅等的时候。巴利
176-180.Tadanurūpatāti tassa paṭhamādijjhānassa anurūpasabhāvā. Yathāladdhajjhānaṃ santato paṇītato disvā assādayamānā nikanti taṃsampayuttā khandhā vā tadārakkhabhūtā satiyeva vā tassa jhānassa anucchavikatāya ‘‘tadanudhammatā satī’’ti vuttāti. Kadācīti yadā paṭhamaṃ adhigantvā yathānisinnoyeva vinā payogantaraṃ dutiyādīni adhigacchati, īdise kāleti attho.
186 因为已经证得了善的禅那,所以说他们是“有学”。这里说“他们并不生起那些禅那”,是指色界禅那在圣道刹那不会生起。巴利
186. Kusalajjhānassa adhigatattā ‘‘sekkhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi te uppādenti nāmāti ariyamaggakkhaṇe rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ anuppajjamānataṃ sandhāyāha.
遍处说的注释巴利
Kasiṇakathāvaṇṇanā
203 无色定的基础性也已说明,因为离开它是不可能的。确实,若没有无色定的基础性,他们的灭尽基础性也不可能存在。对于想要化现的事物,通过化现的方式迅速安住、观察、思虑并通达,这就叫迅速安住。这种状态就是迅速安住状态,所以说迅速见、迅速证知。巴利
203.Āruppapādakatāca dassitā vinā abhāvato. Na hi tesaṃ āruppapādakatāya vinā nirodhapādakatā atthīti. Nimminituṃ icchitassa vatthuno nimmānavasena khippaṃ nisanti nisāmanaṃ ālocanaṃ adhigamo etassāti khippanisanti. Tabbhāvo ‘‘khippanisantibhāvo’’ti āha ‘‘khippadassanaṃ khippābhiññatā’’ti.
胜处说的解说巴利
Abhibhāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā
204 204. 以似相为本质、被称为遍所缘的处是它的原因,所以叫遍处,也就是禅那。或者,因为以无余遍满所缘之义为“遍”,而它又是处,并且是瑜伽行者殊胜快乐的依止处,又属于意处和法处,所以与相应法俱的禅那就叫遍处。因此说“即使胜处也有遍处的性质”。修习的相就是修习相,也就是所缘的有限量和极清净的青色等,这就是多样性。或者,作为前分修习的修习本身就是修习相,它的多样性就是修习相的多样性。因为前分修习在上述所缘上,由于行相的差别而各有不同的自性。遍处相在胜处中的修习相多样性,就是遍处与胜处的多样性,应结合该处来理解。巴利
204. Paṭibhāganimittabhūtaṃ kasiṇārammaṇasaṅkhātaṃ āyatanaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassāti kasiṇāyatanaṃ, jhānaṃ. Atha vā ārammaṇassa anavasesapharaṇaṭṭhena kasiṇañca taṃ āyatanañca yogino sukhavisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato manāyatanadhammāyatanabhāvato cāti sasampayuttaṃ jhānaṃ kasiṇāyatanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘satipi abhibhāyatanānaṃ kasiṇāyatanatte’’ti. Bhāvanāya nimittaṃ bhāvanānimittaṃ, ārammaṇassa parittappamāṇatā suvisuddhanīlāditā ca, tadeva nānattaṃ. Bhāvanā eva vā pubbabhāgabhūtā bhāvanānimittaṃ, tassa nānattaṃ bhāvanānimittanānattaṃ. Pubbabhāgabhāvanā hi yathāvuttavisese ārammaṇe pavattiākāravisesato nānāsabhāvāti. Kasiṇanimittassa abhibhavanakabhāvanānimittanānattaṃ kasiṇa…pe… nānattaṃ, tatoti yojetabbaṃ.
在这里,前四种胜处是以四大种所成的遍为所缘,而在四大种所成的遍当中,没法说什么是好色、什么是丑色。发生在它们当中的第一和第三胜处,则是在一切情况下都以不带色相作意的方式生起;第二和第四胜处才是以颜色遍为所缘。如果是这样,第二、第四胜处跟第五胜处等又有什么差别呢?他们说:“第五胜处等在颜色上更赏心悦目,其他的就不是这样。”其实前四种也纯粹是以八种遍为所缘,所以说“在八种遍当中”,这只是某些人的主张罢了。在解脱当中,第一和第二解脱是以八种遍为所缘,第三解脱是以颜色遍为所缘。或者也可以说,第一和第二解脱同样纯粹是以颜色遍为所缘,因为经上说“用禅眼看见外部的青色遍等色法”。由于所缘是可意的,它们就在其中以不超出(该所缘)的方式生起。既然如此,第三解脱跟其他两种又有什么差别呢?差别在于对妙色的作意。只有第三解脱是以“妙”的作意方式生起,其他两种则不是。巴利
Ettha ca purimāni cattāri abhibhāyatanāni bhūtakasiṇārammaṇāni, bhūtakasiṇesu ca yaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇanti ca na sakkā vattuṃ. Tattha pavattitāni sabbattha vā vaṇṇābhogarahitena pavattitāni paṭhamatatiyābhibhāyatanānīti dutiyacatutthāni vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇāni. Yadi evaṃ dutiyacatutthehi pañcamādīnaṃ ko visesoti ‘‘pañcamādīni vaṇṇato ramaṇīyatarāni, na tathā itarānī’’ti vadanti. Purimānipi cattāri aṭṭha kasiṇārammaṇāneva, tasmā taṃ nesaṃ matimattaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhasu kasiṇesū’’ti vuttattā. Vimokkhesu ca paṭhamadutiyavimokkhā aṭṭha kasiṇārammaṇā. Tatiyo vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇo. Paṭhamadutiyāpi vā vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇā eva ‘‘bahiddhā nīlakasiṇādirūpāni jhānacakkhunā passatī’’ti vuttattā. Ārammaṇamanuññatāya hi tattha aniggatitabhāvena tesaṃ pavattīti. Evaṃ sante tatiyassa itarehi ko visesoti? Subhākārābhogo. Tatiyo eva hi subhanti ābhujanavasena pavattati, na itareti.
智就是安止慧。经文里的“存在时”这个 api 词,也表明“不存在时”的意思。有限量是胜伏的原因,这是针对这四种胜处来说的用意。难道不是因为在各处都说“妙色、丑色”,所以取的就只是带有色彩作意的吗?为了说明并非如此,就说了“其中”等话。“其中”就是在诸圣典中。同样,“无量的”是指没有色彩作意的一切无量妙色、丑色,这是它的意思。如果是这样,那怎么把有色彩作意的殊胜者和没有色彩作意的合在一起作意呢?不是合在一起,而是对它们各别作意。如果各别,怎么又说成一呢?因为有限性这一点是共通的。如果是这样,那“对妙色、丑色的执取就多余了”,为了说明并不多余,就说了“确实有这种理趣”等话。其中,不取由色彩作意所产生的差别,而以有限性这一共通点归为一类,说了“胜伏有限者”之后,为了再显示其中所含法的分类,按照所化众生的根机,应当说“如果它们有时依色彩而被作意,就胜伏妙色、丑色”。因此,对没有色彩作意的和有色彩作意的各别作意之后,在两方面都取有限胜伏的共通性——也就是没有色彩作意的有限胜伏和有色彩作意的有限胜伏——而说为一。确实有这种理趣,这就是其用意。巴利
Ñāṇaṃ appanāpaññā. Vijjamānepīti api-saddena avijjamānepīti dasseti. Parittappamāṇatā abhibhavanassa kāraṇaṃ imesu catūsu abhibhāyatanesūti adhippāyo. Nanu ca sabbattha ‘‘suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti vacanato vaṇṇābhogasahitāniyeva gahitānīti? Na gahitānīti dassento ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādimāha. Tatthāti āgamesu. Tathā appamāṇānīti vaṇṇābhogarahitāni ca sabbāni appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānīti attho. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ visiṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇābhogena rahitānaṃ sahitānañca ekajjhaṃ manasi karoti? Na ekajjhaṃ, visuṃyeva pana tesu manasikāro. Yadi visuṃ kathamekanti? Parittabhāvasāmaññato. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ atiricchatī’’ti, nātiricchatīti dassento ‘‘atthi hi eso pariyāyo’’tiādimāha. Tattha yadidaṃ vaṇṇābhogajanitaṃ visesaṃ aggahetvā parittasāmaññena ekattaṃ netvā ‘‘parittāni abhibhuyyā’’ti vatvā puna tadantogadhadhammappabhedaṃ vineyyavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘tāni ce kadāci vaṇṇavasena ābhujitāni honti suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni abhibhuyyā’’ti vattabbatāya vaṇṇābhogarahitāni sahitāni ca visuṃ manasi katvā ubhayatthāpi vaṇṇābhogarahitaparittābhibhavane taṃ sahitaparittābhibhavane ca parittābhibhavanassa sāmaññaṃ gahetvā ekanti vacanaṃ, eso pariyāyo vijjatīti ayamadhippāyo.
像这样,先依据经与论在文句上的差别,说明注释书并无矛盾;现在,为了通过阐明意图来显示经与论在文句上并无矛盾,所以说“其中”等语。如此,在论藏中,无色彩作意和有色彩作意是分别宣说的;但在经中却说“两者合在一起”。这该怎么理解呢?于是说“此即”等语。其中,“所来者”指经中所说的;“由不说”指论藏中没有说。因为经中确实有“内有色想”这样的说法。虽然解脱是分别宣说的,但就像遍处那样,胜处也有解脱的作用。考虑到有人会责难说“胜处与解脱在这里也难免混杂”,所以说“因为是一切解脱作用共通之说”。由此表明:正如在胜处的教说中,胜处的作用被完整宣说,同样在解脱的教说中,解脱的作用也被宣说,所以在这里它们绝不混杂。巴利
Evaṃ suttantābhidhammapāṭhavisesato aṭṭhakathāya virodhābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni suttantābhidhammapāṭhānaṃ avirodhaṃ adhippāyavibhāvanena dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthacā’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ abhidhamme vaṇṇābhogarahitāni sahitāni ca visuṃ vuttāni. Suttante pana ‘‘ubhayāni ekajjha’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādi. Tattha āgatassāti suttante āgatassa. Tattha hi ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’’ti āgataṃ. Avacanatoti abhidhamme avacanato. Yadipi vimokkhā visuṃ desitā, kasiṇāyatanabhāvo viya pana abhibhāyatanānaṃ vimokkhakiccatāpi atthīti abhibhāyatanavimokkhānaṃ idhāpi saṅkaro dunnivāroti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘sabbavimokkhakiccasādhāraṇavacanabhāvato’’ti. Tena yathā abhibhāyatanadesanāyaṃ abhibhāyatanakiccāni niravasesato vuttāni, evaṃ vimokkhadesanāyaṃ vimokkhakiccānīti idha tesaṃ asaṅkaroyevāti dasseti.
如果有人不接受上面所说的这种界定,那么对他们来说,就应该针对经与论的文本差异,说出另一个理由。这里还能说什么呢?注释里不是已经先说了“可是为什么在经中那样……”等等,然后给出了“因为内在色无法被超越”这个理由吗?为了说明那并不是在陈述这个理由,所以说了“内在色”等话。其中,“那”在这里是指经中“他见外色”这句话而说的,因为只有外色才是可被超越的。“以他因”是指:由于说法方式的善巧,还有另一个可被超越的原因,所以叫“以他因”。意思是:仅仅依据内在无色的想,而不是像经中那样也依据内在色的想。说“因为不明显”,这是考虑到:对于智慧更殊胜的人来说,随着相的生起而引发安止,所缘的超越如果没有非常明显的状态,就不可能发生。注释里不是说,两种文本的差异,其说法方式的善巧是作为理由来陈述的吗?所以说“而说法方式的善巧,应依据如上所述的界定来理解”。所谓说法方式的善巧,就是随顺所化众生的意乐,把实际存在的同义表达阐明出来,而不是对任何事物都这样。其中,以“因为是同义语的说法”等所表述的那种界定方式,说明了说法善巧所依的基础。因为正是如此,前面已经阐明了说法方式的善巧。巴利
Ye ca yathāvuttaṃ vavatthānaṃ na sampaṭicchanti, tehi suttantābhidhammapāṭhabhede aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā. Kimettha vattabbaṃ, nanu aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kasmā pana yathā suttante’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyato’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttanti. Na taṃ tassa kāraṇavacananti dassento ‘‘ajjhattarūpāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yanti idha suttante ca ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.65) vuttavacanaṃ sandhāyāha. Bahiddhā rūpāniyeva hi abhibhavanīyānīti. Aññahetukanti desanāvilāsato aññaṃ abhibhavanīyahetu etassāti aññahetukaṃ. Ajjhattaarūpasaññitāya eva, na suttante viya ajjhattarūpasaññitāya cāti attho. Avibhūtattāti idaṃ ñāṇuttarānaṃ saha nimittuppādanena appanānibbattanaṃ ārammaṇassa abhibhavo na suṭṭhu vibhūtabhāvamantarena sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Nanu ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pāṭhadvayavisesassa desanāvilāso kāraṇabhāvena vuttoti āha ‘‘desanāvilāso ca yathāvuttavavatthānavasena veditabbo’’ti. Desanāvilāso hi nāma vineyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vijjamānasseva pariyāyassa vibhāvanaṃ na yassa kassacīti. Tattha ca ‘‘pariyāyadesanattā’’tiādinā vuttappakāravavatthānaṃ desanāvilāsanibandhanamāha. Tathā ceva hi purato desanāvilāso vibhāvito.
解脱论的解释巴利
Vimokkhakathāvaṇṇanā
248 “那”是指前面说的“属于自身相续的色”,也就是头发等颜色。不过,因为它像打谷场等那样,是禅那的间接原因,所以他说“作为禅那之因”。“以彼”是指以所说的那种色的差别。“以殊胜”是指极为殊胜的、像“色的再生”等中那样省略后词而说的“色”所指的色界禅那。因为用“以殊胜”这个词,就表明“有色”是指与殊胜的色相应。像“他成就初禅而住,地遍……”等,是诸禅那以遍的方式生起。在经中,诸所缘以遍的方式生起,如“有人感知地遍……”等。巴利
248.Tanti ‘‘sasantatipariyāpannarūpa’’nti vuttakesādivaṇṇamāha. Taṃ pana yasmā khalamaṇḍalādi viya paramparāya jhānassa kāraṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘jhānassa hetubhāvenā’’ti āha. Yenāti yathāvuttarūpavisesena. Visiṭṭhenāti atisayappattena ‘‘rūpūpapattiyā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 160 ādayo; vibha. 625) viya uttarapadalopena ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuttena rūpajhānena. ‘‘Visiṭṭhenā’’ti iminā hi atisayarūpayutto rūpīti vuttoti dasseti. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati pathavīkasiṇa’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 499) jhānānameva kasiṇabhāvena pavattā. Sutte ārammaṇānaṃ kasiṇabhāvena pavattā ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānātī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.360; a. ni. 10.25).
梵住经解说巴利
Brahmavihārakathāvaṇṇanā
251 251. 或者说,与无明相应的舍受就是“无明舍”;所谓“舍”,就是与无明相应的舍受;“无明舍”也同样只是这些的名称——因为《破迷惑》中将会这样说。虽然它没有与之匹敌的相,但对于一个或少数几个有情而个别地生起,并且是在有限定的色等取著对象上生起,那为什么说它是无量行境呢?因此说“不是依世俗谛的角度”等等。即使如此,就像“没有化生的有情”这种依有情而生起的邪见,虽然依有情而生起,却因为取著的角度而被称为以诸行为所缘;同样地,依有情而生起的慈等,是否也可能以诸行为所缘呢?不。为了说明以不执取的方式生起的慈等不可能执取有取著,所以说“不执取”等等。巴利
251. Aññāṇasampayuttāpi vā upekkhāvedanā aññāṇupekkhā, upekkhāti aññāṇasampayuttā upekkhāvedanā, aññāṇupekkhātipi etāsaṃyeva nāmanti (vibha. aṭṭha. 947) hi sammohavinodaniyaṃ vakkhatīti. Appaṭibhāganimittattepi ekaṃ katipaye vā satte odissa pavattā paricchinnarūpādiupādānavisaye pavattattā kathamappamāṇagocarāti āha ‘‘na ca sammutisaccavasenā’’tiādi. Evampi yathā natthi sattā opapātikāti sattavasena pavattāyapi micchādiṭṭhiyā saṅkhārārammaṇatā vuccati upādānavasena, evaṃ sattavasena pavattānampi mettādīnaṃ saṅkhārārammaṇatāpi siyāti ce? Na, aparāmasanavasena pavattānaṃ mettādīnaṃ saupādānaggahaṇāsambhavatoti dassento āha ‘‘aparāmāsā’’tiādi.
不净论的注释巴利
Asubhakathāvaṇṇanā
263 263. 在“死后一日或死后二日”等所说的九种冢墓中,依颜色而转起的禅那,就是冢墓颜色禅那。难道这不应当以颜色遍来把握,而不是以不净来把握吗?不是,因为这是以冢墓颜色作为比喻,在还没有舍弃对自身身体的厌恶感的情况下,依颜色而转起。因此说“由于厌恶作意的共通性”。为了阐明这个意思也适用于冢墓颜色禅那,所以说了“那也”等。巴利
263. ‘‘Ekāhamataṃ vā dvīhamataṃ vā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.379; ma. ni. 1.112) vuttāsu navasu sivathikāsu vaṇṇavasena pavattajjhānaṃ sivathikāvaṇṇajjhānaṃ. Nanu cetassa vaṇṇakasiṇehi gahaṇaṃ yuttaṃ, na asubhehīti? Na, sivathikāvaṇṇaṃ upamaṃ katvā attano kāye paṭikūlattaṃ amuñcitvāva vaṇṇavasena pavattanato . Tenevāha ‘‘paṭikūlamanasikārasāmaññenā’’ti. Ayamattho sivathikāvaṇṇajjhānassāti etthāpi yojetabboti vibhāvento ‘‘tampī’’tiādimāha.
无色界善谈论注释巴利
Arūpāvacarakusalakathāvaṇṇanā
265 色相,就是以色为因、以色为所依。在“色相与非色相”中,指的是色法以及地遍等相。在“以彼为所缘的禅那”中,这里的“彼”是指色相,或者也指色,因为色界禅那也可以以色法为所缘。在“于色等”中,指的是色相、非色相、以彼为所缘的禅那,以及与色相关的诸法。在“不欲转向等”中,“等”字包含了不欲入定等。巴利
265.Rūpanimittanti rūpahetu rūpādhikaraṇaṃ. Rūpārūpanimittesūti rūpadhammesu ca pathavīkasiṇādinimittesu ca. Tadārammaṇajjhānesūti ettha taṃ-saddena rūpanimittaṃ paccāmasati rūpampi vā rūpadhammārammaṇānampi rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ sambhavato. Rūpādīsūti rūpārūpanimittatadārammaṇajjhānesu rūpapaṭibaddhadhammesu ca. Anāvajjitukāmatādināti ādi-saddena asamāpajjitukāmatādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
从死亡之后不再有投生之堪能……(中略)……以“不生法”的方式超越,这是要说明:从“应当被超越”这一点来看,色界善法与色界异熟、唯作之间并没有差别,因为都还没有证得。为了指出那些通过修无色定而可以超越的色想等,才说“如果没有修无色定,死后就不能再投生”。所谓“那些”,是指依止于某一种色法的其余有限异熟想等。巴利
Cutito uddhaṃ uppattirahānaṃ…pe… anuppattidhammatāpādanena samatikkamoti etena samatikkamitabbattena rūpāvacarakusalānaṃ rūpāvacaravipākakiriyehi visesābhāvaṃ dasseti anadhigatabhāvato. Yesañhi rūpasaññādīnaṃ arūpabhāvanāya samatikkamādiko labbhati, te dassetuṃ ‘‘arūpabhāvanāya abhāve cutito uddhaṃ uppattirahāna’’nti vuttanti. Yāti ekantarūpanissitā avasiṭṭhaparittavipākasaññādayo.
感受不动定与寂静等至之乐、往生到殊胜的生命状态等,这些是无色等至的意义,所以他说“色想……乃至……没有意义”。巴利
Āneñjasantasamāpattisukhānubhavanabhavavisesūpapajjanādayo āruppasamāpattīnaṃ atthāti āha ‘‘rūpasaññā…pe… na attho’’ti.
在这里,由于以展开遍相之力,所以有“有限”和“无限”的区分,因为这是不绕弯子的教导,这就是意图所在。如果是这样,那么在有限遍被展开的时候,为什么还要说“空无边处”呢?因为在那里也有遍满无限这样的存在状态。所以就说“于遍满无限这样的存在状态中”。如果一切处都有遍满无限,那为什么不说“虚空是无限的”呢?于是就说“时节的设定”等等。其中,“行道”说的是修习禅那的方式。巴利
Idha ugghāṭitakasiṇavasena parittānantatā hoti nippariyāyadesanattāti adhippāyo. Yadi evaṃ parittakasiṇugghāṭite kathamākāsānañcāyatanavacananti? Tatthāpi anantapharaṇasabbhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘anantapharaṇatāsabbhāve’’ti. Yadi sabbattha anantapharaṇatā atthi, atha kasmā ‘‘ananto ākāso’’ti na vuttanti āha ‘‘samayavavatthāpanā’’tiādi. Tattha paṭipattīti jhānabhāvanākāramāha.
266 266. “已打开的状态”就是“可打开的”。就像“已成熟的”就是“可成熟的”。巴利
266. Ugghāṭabhāvo ugghāṭimaṃ. Yathā pākimaṃ.
268 268. 对于“超越在虚空中生起的识,所以是第三”这一词句,先把它提取出来,然后为了从理证和教证两方面阐明它的含义,说了“因为超越它故”等话。无色定是通过超越所缘而证得的,所以特别要看到所缘的过患,认为“正是那个所缘应当被超越”,这是理证;而当所缘被超越时,以那个所缘为对象的禅那也就同样被超越了。在修习中,所缘的消失、去除,就是阐明。所谓“圣典”,指的是《分别论》。难道圣典中不是不加区分地说“那识”即“不是空无边处识”吗?为了显示“并非如此,而是通过‘正是那识’这一有区分的说法,这个含义得以成立”,而说了“识无边处”等。巴利
268. Ākāse pavattitaviññāṇātikkamato tatiyāti paduddhāraṃ katvā yuttito āgamato ca tadatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tadatikkamato hī’’tiādimāha. Āruppasamāpattīnaṃ ārammaṇātikkamena pattabbattā visesato ārammaṇe dosadassanaṃ tadeva atikkamitabbanti ayaṃ yutti, ārammaṇe pana atikkante tadārammaṇaṃ jhānampi atikkantameva hoti. Bhāvanāya ārammaṇassa vigamanaṃ apanayanaṃ vibhāvanā. Pāḷiyanti vibhaṅge. Nanu ca pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘taññeva viññāṇa’’nti avisesena vuttaṃ ‘‘na ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇa’’nti. ‘‘Na taññevaviññāṇanti visesavacanena ayamattho siddho’’ti dassento ‘‘viññāṇañcāyatana’’ntiādimāha.
三地善法注释巴利
Tebhūmakakusalavaṇṇanā
269 “以七大章”是指:依缘、俱生缘、依止缘、结合、相应这些问章,以及顺、逆、顺逆、逆顺等方法和顺等方法。世间有婆罗堕若姓等四十八种姓作为根本,同样,木束等也是四十八种行仪,所以说“四十八”等。其中“他们”是指堪能者和不堪能者。以门为首来把握有门者,出于这个意图说“彼彼诸门,即身等”。以不经心而作,是下劣;以漠不关心而作,是中等;以恭敬而作,是殊胜。或者以贪求利养等因缘而作,是下劣;以希求福果而作,是中等;以“这是应当做的”而安住于圣者状态者所作者,是殊胜。或者以贪求生存圆满而发起,是下劣;以无贪的意乐而发起,是中等;为利益他人而发起,是殊胜。或者只作少量,是下劣;适量而作,是中等;增上而作,是殊胜。至于广大心中,仅仅获得,是下劣;未充分修习,是中等;善加修习而达到自在,是殊胜。也应当知道,在这每一种下劣等之中,由于积集程度等差别,仍然有下劣等的区分。依相应法之力,即心所引发的心相应法以心为主宰的状态,它现起于那个所缘心上;或者可以这样理解这里的含义。巴利
269.Sattahimahāvārehīti paṭiccasahajātapaccayanissayasaṃsaṭṭhasampayuttapañhāvārehi anulomapaccanīyaanulomapaccanīyapaccanīyānulomādinayā anulomādinayā. Bhāradvājagotamādayo aṭṭhacattālīsa loke gottāni mūlabhūtāni, tathā kaṭṭhakalāpādayo aṭṭhacattālīseva caraṇānīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhacattālīsa’’ntiādi. Tattha tesanti bhabbābhabbānaṃ. Dvārasīsena dvāravantāni gayhantīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘taṃtaṃdvārāni vā kāyādīnī’’ti. Acittīkārena vā kataṃ hīnaṃ, ajjhupekkhanena kataṃ majjhimaṃ, sakkaccakataṃ paṇītaṃ. Āmisakiñjakkhādihetu vā kataṃ hīnaṃ, puññaphalakāmatāya kataṃ majjhimaṃ, kattabbamicceva ariyabhāve ṭhitena kataṃ paṇītaṃ. Bhavasampattilobhena vā pavattitaṃ hīnaṃ, alobhajjhāsayena pavattitaṃ majjhimaṃ, parahitāya pavattitaṃ paṇītaṃ. Parittakataṃ vā hīnaṃ, mattaso kataṃ majjhimaṃ, adhimattaso kataṃ paṇītaṃ. Mahaggatesu pana paṭiladdhamattaṃ hīnaṃ, nātisubhāvitaṃ majjhimaṃ, subhāvitaṃ vasippattaṃ paṇītaṃ. Imesupi ekekassa hīnādikassa āyūhananānattādivasena hīnādibhedo labbhatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ vasenāti yo cittappabhāvito cittasampayuttānaṃ cittādhipateyyabhāvo, so taṃnimitte citte upacaritoti evaṃ vā ettha attho.
出世间善法注释巴利
Lokuttarakusalavaṇṇanā
277 “以什么含义叫出世间”等话,是《无碍解道》里的说法,被注释书引用过来。所以,那里用“三种无上法都超越世间”等话所概括的内容,为了配合三个词句来显示,就说“超越世间,因此……”等等。每一个词句都要这样配合,因为“到达世间的尽头”等含义在道等当中也能成立。或者应该说,三种含义都只配合在道上,这就是它们的关联。“不超越”等话里,“等”这个字包含了三种修习上的差别:诸根一味、精进随彼而运载、不断习行。又因为这些修习差别,是在杂染与清净、轮回与还灭当中,由观察种种过患与利益的先前分慧所成就的殊胜智而生起,所以说“相互……增长”。巴利
277. ‘‘Kenaṭṭhena lokuttara’’ntiādi paṭisambhidāvacanaṃ (paṭi. ma. 2.43) aṭṭhakathāya ābhataṃ, tasmā tattha ‘‘tividhopi anuttaradhammo lokaṃ taratī’’tiādinā saṅgahitoti taṃ tīhi padehi yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘lokaṃ taratīti etenā’’tiādimāha. Ekekasmiṃ yojetabbo lokassa antagamanāditāya maggādīsupi labbhamānattā. Maggeyeva vā tividhopi attho yojetabboti sambandho. Anativattanādīti ādi-saddena indriyānaṃ ekarasatā tadupagavīriyavāhanaṃ āsevanāti ime tayo bhāvanāvisese saṅgaṇhāti. Yasmā cete bhāvanāvisesā saṃkilesavodānesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭesu ca taṃtaṃādīnavānisaṃsadassanabhūtāya pubbabhāgapaññāya sampāditena ñāṇavisesena nipphajjanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘aññamaññaṃ…pe… vaḍḍhetī’’ti.
“是依止”的意思是:就像树对树枝那样,以支撑的方式被称为依止。果智和果支的依止说法,是因为它们是依止缘。正因为有这个依止状态,才有安住的状态。因为依止于圣果,圣者们虽然已经做完该做的事、彻底厌离了一切生存,却仍然能在世间住留较长时间来利益他人。诸圣道虽然是分分断除烦恼的,但以无差别的方式成为一切不善法的对治、一切善法的对立面,所以对于其他道所应断的烦恼,也以某种断除的方式生起。为了显示这种断除方式,所以说“对于其余的,就像闪电的光明破除黑暗一样”。因此在圣典中,下位道智被比喻为闪电。如果是这样,那么上位道所应断的烦恼就是这里所说的“其余”。说“它们被彻底断灭”就不合理了,因为见道不能断除修习所应断的烦恼。如果那样说的话,它们就成了唯见所断。如果指的是彼分断——也就是所说的“像闪电的光明破除黑暗一样”——那这是在前分观智中就已经成就的,而说出世间道以彼分的方式断除烦恼也不合理。在镇伏断方面也是同样的道理,因为随顺智已经殊胜地成就了它。如果认为只有初道所断的烦恼才是这里所说的“其余”,那么这样一来,它们就不可能有“其余”的性质,而且也不存在名为“不堕恶趣”的见所断烦恼,也不能说初道所断的烦恼像闪电的光明破除黑暗那样被断灭。这一点应当仔细考察。即使是世间禅那,不依靠行道也不能成就,这应当按意趣来理解,因为这是需要引伸义的理解。为了阐明这个意趣,所以说“未作作者”。以此显示所说的那句话是有其特定范围的。难道对于已作作者来说,圣者以道成就的禅那也是以道行道的行相而具有行道的吗?因此不能说“不依靠行道而成就”,所以这句话是毫无保留的。针对这个追问,所以说“然而已作作者的”等。现在,为了显示那句话应当按意趣来把握其含义,从圣典中也能了知,所以说“如所说……已作”。巴利
Nissayo hotīti rukkho viya sākhāya ādhārabhāvena voharīyatīti attho. Phalañāṇaphalaṅgānaṃ nissayavacanaṃ nissayapaccayattā. Tatoyeva nissayabhāvato patiṭṭhābhāvato. Ariyaphalasannissayena hi ariyā katakiccā suṭṭhu nibbinnasabbabhavāpi cirataraṃ loke parahitāya tiṭṭhanti. Kilesānaṃ odhiso pajahanakāpi ariyamaggā avisesena sabbākusalānaṃ sabbakusalapaṭipakkhatāya aññamaggappahātabbesupi kenaci pahānākārena pavattantīti taṃ pahānākāraṃ dassento ‘‘itaresaṃ vijjutobhāsena viya tamassā’’ti āha. Yena pāḷiyaṃ heṭṭhimamaggañāṇānaṃ vijjūpamatā dassitā. Yadi evaṃ uparimaggavajjhā kilesā itareti idhādhippetā. Na tesaṃ samucchedavacanaṃ yuttaṃ. Na hi bhāvanāya pahātabbe dassanamaggo samucchindituṃ sakkoti. Tathā ca sati dassanena pahātabbā eva te siyuṃ. Atha tadaṅgappahānaṃ adhippetaṃ, yena ‘‘vijjutobhāsena viya tamassā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ pubbabhāgavipassanāya eva siddhaṃ na ca yuttaṃ lokuttaramaggo tadaṅgavasena kilese pajahatīti. Vikkhambhanepi eseva nayo, anulomañāṇeneva tassa sātisayaṃ sādhitattā. Atha pana paṭhamamaggavajjhā eva kilesā itareti adhippetā, evaṃ sante tesaṃ itarabhāvova na siyā, na ca anapāyagamanīyā nāma kilesā dassanena pahātabbā atthi, nāpi paṭhamamaggavajjhā kilesā tena vijjutobhāsena viya tamo samucchinditabbāti vattuṃ yuttanti upaparikkhitabboyaṃ ‘‘itaresaṃ…pe… samucchedo’’ti. Lokiyajjhānampi na vinā paṭipadāya ijjhatīti idaṃ adhippāyavasena netabbaṃ neyyatthattāti taṃ adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘akatādhikārassā’’ti āha. Tena yathāvuttavacanassa ca sappadesataṃ dasseti. Nanu ca katādhikārassa ariyassa maggena samijjhamānampi jhānaṃ maggapaṭipadāvasena paṭipadāsahitamevāti. Na vinā paṭipadāya ijjhatīti sakkā vattuṃ, tenetaṃ vacanaṃ nippadesamevāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘katādhikārassa panā’’tiādi. Idāni tassa vacanassa adhippāyavasena gahetabbatthatā pāḷitopi viññāyatīti dassento āha ‘‘yathāvutta…pe… katā’’ti.
“无论何人”这句话是没有区分对象的说法。为了指出它并不适用于所有人,所以接着说了“一次、两次”等。限定范围之后再去执取,就是遍知。“名色确定等”,指的是名色确定、把握缘、通达相以及遍摄喜爱的这些过程。所谓“难以成就”,是说名色确定等这些事,对某些人或对所有人都难以做到。这个道理在第二回等地方也按各自情况适用。“在容易成就时也一样”,是说名色确定等事难以成就,虽然可以是道快速生起或迟钝生起的一个原因,但并不是必然的原因;可是,当与观智相应的诸根迟钝时,那就成了必然的原因。这里要表达的就是这个意思。巴利
‘‘Yo kocīti avisesavacana’’nti tassa apavādaṃ dassento ‘‘sakiṃ dvikkhattu’’nti ādimāha. Paricchinditvā gahaṇaṃ parijānanaṃ. Nāmarūpavavatthāpanādīnanti nāmarūpavavatthāpanapaccayapariggahalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanikantipariyādānānaṃ . Kicchasiddhitoti nāmarūpavavatthāpanādīnaṃ kesañci sabbesampi vā kicchasiddhito. Esa nayo dutiyavārādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ. Sukhasiddhiyampīti nāmarūpavavatthāpanādīnaṃ kicchasiddhi maggapātubhāvadandhabhāvassa kāraṇabhāve anekantikā. Vipassanāsahagatindriyānaṃ pana mandatā tassa ekantakāraṇanti dasseti.
“以这个为终点,所以是行道”——这里是要说明:由于称为“行道智见清净”的观智,在无颠倒地了知方面,会因生起得慢或快,而说通往道的过程有快有慢、有迟有速。所谓“前者”,是指前面的那些轮次,或者就是指对特相的通达等。因为已经确定:在下限处三遍镇伏烦恼时,才是苦行道;再往下就不是了,所以说“依三遍镇伏的轮次”。它的意思是:应当知道,乐行道是就最上等的程度来说的。巴利
Etadantattā paṭipadāyāti etena nippariyāyato paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhisaṅkhātāya vipassanāpaññāya cirācirappavattivasena maggassa khippadandhābhiññatā vuttāti dasseti. Purimānanti purimavārānaṃ, lakkhaṇapaṭivedhādīnaṃyeva vā. Heṭṭhimakoṭiyā tikkhattuṃ kilesavikkhambhane sati dukkhāpaṭipadābhāvo, na tato heṭṭhāti nicchitattā āha ‘‘tikkhattuṃ vikkhambhanavāratāvasenā’’ti. Tassa sukhāpaṭipadā veditabbā ukkaṃsavasenāti adhippāyo.
在某人身上出现欺瞒、离间、不悦、系缚这些作用时,那些作用只是在没有贪爱的情况下才会发生,而这个人就是没有被摄受的。因此,从妄语等具有欺瞒等功能来说,就说了它的粗劣和不受摄受。因为与那对治法的自性相违背,所以正语具有柔软性,具有摄受的自性。或者,由于与殊胜的信相应,应当看到它的柔软性。令生起就是令转起。或者,活着的众生,或者相应法,通过它而清净;或者它自己清净,所以就是清净。巴利
Yasmiṃ puggale visaṃvādanabhedanāniṭṭhānatthaniyojanānaṃ pavatti, tattha sinehaviraheneva tesaṃ pavatti, so ca puggalo asaṅgahito hotīti musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhatā ca apariggahatā ca vuttā. Tappaṭipakkhaviruddhasabhāvattā sammāvācāya siniddhabhāvatā pariggāhakasabhāvatā . Saddhāvisesayogato vā tassā siniddhabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Samuṭṭhāpetīti pavatteti. Jīvamāno vā satto, sampayuttadhammā vā vodāyanti etena sayaṃ vā vodāyatīti vodānaṃ.
285 285. 以渴爱和邪见为立足处,以其余烦恼和行(造作)为积集。以常见为立足处,以断见为积集。以昏沉为立足处,以掉举为积集。以沉溺欲乐为立足处,以自我折磨为积集。以一切不善的造作为立足处,以一切世间善的造作为积集。在《越瀑流经注》中所说的其他种类里,这里没有提到的那些,也应当依照同样的方式了知立足处和积集。巴利
285. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi patiṭṭhānaṃ. Avasesakilesābhisaṅkhārehi āyūhanā. Sassatadiṭṭhiyā patiṭṭhānaṃ. Ucchedadiṭṭhiyā āyūhanā. Līnavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ. Uddhaccavasena āyūhanā. Kāmasukhānuyogavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ. Attakilamathānuyogavasena āyūhanā. Sabbākusalābhisaṅkhāravasena patiṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbalokiyakusalābhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanāti oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttesu pakārantaresu idha avuttānaṃ vasenapi patiṭṭhānāyūhanā veditabbā.
或者,通过“取烦恼”这一说法,已经包含了渴爱、常见以及一切不善行,因为它们同属一类、同一范畴。同样,通过“取行”这一说法,已经包含了其余烦恼、断见以及一切世间善行。由于昏沉、掉举、欲乐随行、自苦随行是分别单独讲述的,所以不应把它们混进来。在以烦恼和行的方式说明了所依与积集之后,为了显示渴爱和邪见在这方面有特别的缘助作用,又依这两者作了连结。或者,这里应当看作是一种理则的展示。其他的类别也应当这样连结。在“诸比丘,具足四支的人”等文中,“支”这个字应当理解为“因”的意思。巴利
Atha vā kilesaggahaṇena taṇhāsassatadiṭṭhisabbākusalābhisaṅkhārā gahitā taṃsabhāgatāya tadekaṭṭhatāya ca. Tathā abhisaṅkhāraggahaṇena avasesakilesaucchedadiṭṭhisabbalokiyakusalābhisaṅkhārā. Līnuddhaccakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogānaṃ visuṃ vuttattā tehi na yojetabbanti kilesābhisaṅkhāravasena patiṭṭhānāyūhane vatvā taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ tattha visesapaccayataṃ dīpetuṃ tadubhayavasenapi yojanā katā. Nayadassanaṃ vā etaṃ tattha daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evamitarepi pakārā yojetabbāti . ‘‘Catūhi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato puggalo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 4.112, 114) aṅga-saddassa kāraṇatthatā daṭṭhabbā.
299 说妄语等的时候,到底是在做一种什么行为,才被称为“作”呢?那又是什么呢?应当知道,这就是“妄语等的行为”,意思正是如此。这里的连接关系也应当这样来理解。巴利
299. Musāvādādīni bhāsamāno karoti nāma kiṃ vakkhamānaṃ kiriyaṃ, kā pana sāti? Musāvādādikiriyāti viditovāyamattho. Evaṃ vā ettha yojanā daṭṭhabbā.
301 “已促成之诸缘”,就是衣等诸缘。“矫诈之事”,是指依止恶欲,以受用粗劣衣等的方式,说“住在你精舍的那位是应供者”等话,把自己说成仿佛具有圣者功德,又为了求得殊胜利养以及为了维护自己而生起的不善心,这些令他人惊怪的原因,就是矫诈之事。巴利
301.Nipphāditapaccayānanti cīvarādipaccayānaṃ. Kuhanavatthūnīti pāpicchataṃ nissāya lūkhacīvarādisevanavasena ‘‘yo te vihāre vasati, so arahā’’tiādinā (pārā. 224) attānaṃ ariyaguṇasāmantaṃ katvā bhaṇanavasena visesalābhino viya attano pariharaṇavasena ca pavattā akusalacittuppādā paresaṃ vimhāpanakāraṇāni kuhanavatthūni.
343 343. 即使以具有相的事物为所缘,道也无法真正得到“无相”这个名称;因为从传承来看,并非在不颠倒的意义上观就叫做无相,所以说道不能得到“无相”这个名称,因此说“然而并非以具有相的事物为所缘……而成就”。但是,由于从传承来看,已经获得“空”和“无愿”这些名称的道,从具有相和所缘的角度来说,那种名称的缺失在任何时候都不存在,因此,为了说明由三种名称圆满、由传承而获得名称,所以说“因为名圆满成就的缘故”。“一切”是指进入一切解脱门的所有道。“三种名称的结合”就是空、无愿、无相的结合,确定而不混杂。巴利
343. Satipi saguṇārammaṇehi maggassa animittanāmalābhe na nippariyāyena vipassanā animittanāmikāti āgamanato maggo animittanāmaṃ na labhatīti āha ‘‘na pana saguṇārammaṇehi…pe… siddhaṃ hotī’’ti. Yasmā pana āgamanato suññataṃ appaṇihitanti laddhanāmassa maggassa saguṇato ārammaṇato ca taṃnāmābhāvo na kadācipi atthi, tasmā nāmattayapāripūrihetuāgamanato nāmalābhoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘paripuṇṇanāmasiddhihetuttā’’ti. Sabbesanti sabbavimokkhamukhāgatānampi maggānaṃ. Nāmattayayogoti suññatāpaṇihitānimittanāmayogo. Vavatthānaṃ asaṅkaro.
350 诸行是有相之法,它们显现为有相、有形。为了说明未修习者和已修习者对此的显现方式,所以说“以众等”等语。因此说“以解脱而信根增上”,而不是说“于彼解脱中”,所以说“无相解脱是指无常随观”。其余地方也依此理解。为什么说“无相的无相性不存在之不存在”呢?难道不是以方便说而说无常随观为无相解脱,以究竟说而说它的无相性确实不存在吗?如果这样,那么“无相的无相命名之不存在”也并非不能说,这样一来譬喻的配合就更加合理;同样,以无相而说道的无相性也根本不成立。因此他说“在胜义上不能给予名称”吗?这是对的,然而正是以方便说所成立的无常随观的无相性,为了净化道而作此论究:“无相解脱的无相性不存在之不存在,这似乎相违”。这样做了之后,他将自己说“无相……被阐明”。以共相说譬喻与所譬喻的关联。“非道增上”的意思是:道为增上称为道增上,而对于欲与心,并没有这种共称。又,“非由他们而道”的意思是:对于欲与心,道是此的增上称为道增上,这种共称对于道是不存在的。为什么呢?因为那些欲与心并非道支。巴利
350. Nimittadhammā saṅkhārā tehi sanimittā saviggahā viya upaṭṭhahantīti tesaṃ abhāvitabhāvanassa bhāvitabhāvanassa ca upaṭṭhahanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘samūhādī’’tiādimāha. Tena ca ‘‘vimokkhena saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hotī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 350) vuttaṃ, na ‘‘tasmiṃ vimokkhe’’ti, tasmā ‘‘animittavimokkhoti aniccānupassanaṃ āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Itaratthāpi eseva nayo. Animittassa animittabhāvābhāvo natthīti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ca aniccānupassanāya animittavimokkhabhāvo pariyāyenāti nippariyāyadesanāya tassā animittabhāvābhāvo atthi eva, evañca sati ‘‘animittassa animittanāmadānābhāvo’’ti ca na na sakkā vattunti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ suṭṭhutaraṃ yujjati, tathā animittena maggassa animittabhāvo na yujjatiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘paramatthato nāmaṃ dātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti? Saccametaṃ , pariyāyasiddhaṃyeva pana aniccānupassanāya animittabhāvaṃ gahetvā maggasodhanavasenāyamanuyogo kato ‘‘animittavimokkhassa animittabhāvābhāvo natthītiviruddhaṃ viya hotī’’ti. Evañca katvā ‘‘animittaṃ…pe… dīpito hotī’’ti sayameva vakkhatīti. Sāmaññanti upamopamitabbānaṃ sambandhamāha. Na maggādhipatīti maggo adhipati maggādhipatīti chandacittānaṃ ayaṃ samaññā natthīti attho. Na ca tehi maggassāti chandacittehi maggo adhipati etassāti maggādhipatīti ayaṃ samaññā maggassa natthi. Kasmā? Tesaṃ chandacittānaṃ amaggaṅgattā.
因为禅那具有空性等名称,所以应当这样理解:根、力等法由于与道相应,也同样获得了空性等名称。虽然存在与道相对立的烦恼,但那种对治作用并不像道自身的自性那样清晰明确,因此说“以自性为主”。所谓“两种”,是指自性和对治。“不依赖其他”,是指不依赖来由。所谓“因此”,是因为如果仅仅依靠自性来获得名称,就无法确定,一切道就会获得一切名称,所以如此说。从自性为主的道来看,这就表明它并非从对治或来由来获得名称。在自性之外的其他情形,是指无相等状态。与对治相伴的自性,是指空性、无愿的状态以及它们的来由。不遮止执取相,是因为没有遮止对诸行相的执取。由于只说到空性和无愿的道,那么从无常而出的道在这里可能没有被包含进去,所以先提出疑问,然后说“无常随观”等。意思是不应该从诸行而出起,只应该从诸相而出起;也就是说,不应该有对诸相的证得,因为不以那些为所缘。对于诸行,在已生而还灭、生灭、逼迫、不得自在的状态中,就有“无常”等相的名称。巴利
Jhānassa suññatādināmakattāti etena indriyabalādīnampi maggasampayogato suññatādināmakatā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Satipi paccanīkāmasane na tassa maggassa taṃ paribyattaṃ yathā sarasatāti āha ‘‘sarasappadhāno’’ti. Dvīhīti sarasapaccanīkehi. Aññanirapekkhehīti āgamananirapekkhehi. Tasmāti yasmā sarasatova nāmalābhe avavatthānāpatti sabbassa maggassa sabbanāmabhāvāpatti hoti, tasmā. Attābhi…pe… maggāti tena āgamanato nāmalābhassa paccanīkato nāmalābhabhāvaṃ dasseti. Sarasantareti animittabhāvādike. Paccanīkasahitena sarasenāti suññatāppaṇihitabhāvehi tadāgamanehi. Nimittaggahaṇānivāraṇāti saṅkhāranimittaggāhassa anisedhanato. Suññatāppaṇihitasseva maggassa vuttattā aniccato vuṭṭhahantassa maggo idha asaṅgahito siyāti āsaṅkitvā āha ‘‘aniccānupassanā’’tiādi. Saṅkhārehi vuṭṭhānaṃ na siyā, lakkhaṇehi eva vuṭṭhānaṃ siyāti adhippāyo, lakkhaṇapaṭivedho na siyā atadārammaṇattāti attho. Saṅkhārānañhi hutvā abhāvaudayabbayapaṭipīḷanāvasavattanākāresu aniccatādilakkhaṇavohāro.
当已经执取了带有行相的事物时,那行相本身也一定被执取了,所以说“诸相也被通达,因为执取了以彼行相为名的诸行”。所谓“依如前所说的意趣”,就是依“无常”等以及“于诸行中”等表述所显示的那种意趣。“离”,就是从诸行中脱离出来。巴利
Ākāravantesu gahitesu tadākāropi gahitoyeva hotīti āha ‘‘lakkhaṇānipi paṭividdhāni honti tadākārasaṅkhāraggahaṇato’’ti. Yathāvuttādhippāyenāti ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā ‘‘saṅkhāresū’’tiādināva vuttappakārādhippāyena. Visunti saṅkhārehi vinivattetvā.
各种杂项的讨论注释巴利
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
他以五种方式来说明:先把五取蕴按内在的两种和色的两种来区分,有时分析、有时不分析,但都只是用“相”这个词来说明。因为即使是已生起的诸行,也没有超出诸行相的状态,而且有应当出起的共同性。因此,即使按已执取和未执取把已生起的法分成两种来说明,最终还是以“这就是关于相的判定”归结到相上。在这里,相有内在和外在,而已生起的法只是内在的,这就是它们的差别。觉支等的差别,是指觉支、禅支、道支彼此不同。被称为“不想入定的寻等离欲修习”的,就是不想入定的离欲修习。另一种,是指作为基础的禅那等。由于不具备那种状态,也就是由于没有前面所说的那种离欲修习。这里说的是:就像在接近道的观中,因为与喜俱行,道具有初禅等性;因为与舍俱行,就具有第五禅性。据此,觉支等才有差别。在决定它们时,近因和主因是趋向出起的观,而不是基础禅那等。巴利
Pañcadhāuddisati pañcupādānakkhandhe ajjhattadukavasena rūpadukavasena ca bhinditvā abhinditvā ca nimittavacaneneva uddisati pavattassapi saṅkhāranimittabhāvānativattanato vuṭṭhātabbatāsāmaññato ca. Teneva upādinnānupādinnavasena pavattaṃ dvidhā katvā niddisitvāpi ‘‘ayaṃ tāva nimitte vinicchayo’’ti nimittavaseneva nigameti. Ettha ca nimittaṃ ajjhattabahiddhā, pavattaṃ pana ajjhattamevāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Bojjhaṅgādivisesanti bojjhaṅgajhānaṅgamaggaṅgānaṃ asadisataṃ. Asamāpajjitukāmatāsaṅkhātā vitakkādivirāgabhāvanā asamāpajjitukāmatāvirāgabhāvanā. Itarassāti pādakajjhānādikassa. Atabbhāvatoti yathāvuttavirāgabhāvanābhāvassa abhāvato. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā maggāsannāya vipassanāya somanassasahagatatte maggassa paṭhamādijjhānikatā ca upekkhāsahagatatte pañcamajjhānikatā eva ca tabbasena ca bojjhaṅgādīnaṃ visesoti tesaṃ niyame āsannakāraṇaṃ padhānakāraṇañca vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā, na evaṃ pādakajjhānādayoti.
现在要说明这个意思:无基础初禅的道,以及以杂多行相为基础初禅、经过观照之后生起的道,因为都纯粹属于初禅,所以在这里,观的确定就是决定性的,而且是主要的。为了阐明这个道理,论师说了“唯以观的确定”等话。其中,“其他”指的是第二禅等道。对于那些已经超越了基础禅那的禅支、不想再进入那些禅定、以离欲修习为本质的至出起观来说,由于作为基础的基础禅那赋予了它差别,所以它能够决定道的禅支等差别。因此说“以基础禅那和观的确定”。再者,就像依靠作为基础的基础禅那那样,同样,依靠作为所缘的所观禅那,当两者都存在时,观由意乐赋予差别,从而能够确定。所以说“在其余的说法中……应当这样配合”。巴利
Idāni apādakapaṭhamajjhānapādakānaṃ pakiṇṇakasaṅkhārapaṭhamajjhānāni sammasitvā nibbattitānañca maggānaṃ ekantena paṭhamajjhānikabhāvato vipassanāniyamoyevettha ekantiko padhānañcāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘vipassanāniyamenevā’’tiādimāha. Tattha itareti dutiyajjhānikādimaggā. Pādakajjhānātikkantānaṃ aṅgānaṃ asamāpajjitukāmatāvirāgabhāvanābhūtā vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā adhiṭṭhānabhūtena pādakajjhānena āhitavisesā maggassa jhānaṅgādivisesaniyāmikā hotīti ‘‘pādakajjhānavipassanāniyamehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā ca adhiṭṭhānabhūtena pādakajjhānena, evaṃ ārammaṇabhūtena sammasitajjhānena ubhayasabbhāve ajjhāsayavasena āhitavisesā vipassanā niyametīti āha ‘‘evaṃ sesavādesupi…pe… yojetabbo’’ti.
在“作为基础的诸禅那行”中,指的是初禅的诸行。因为说过“以初禅作为基础”。由于对寻等这些法有离染与不离染修习的缺失。借此说明:所缘禅那也能为观提供起区别作用的亲依止缘。巴利
Pādakajjhānasaṅkhāresūti paṭhamajjhānasaṅkhāresu. ‘‘Paṭhamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 350) hi vuttaṃ. Taṃtaṃvirāgāvirāgabhāvanābhāvenāti vitakkādīnaṃ virajjanāvirajjanabhāvanābhāvena. Tena ārammaṇajjhānassapi vipassanāya visesādhānaṃ upanissayatamāha.
基础禅那与所观禅那本身,就是觉支等种种差别法的亲依止缘和原因,所以叫基础禅那与所观禅那的亲依止;这是就它存在的情况来说的。由于它不存在所以不存在,也就是因为那种意乐不存在所以不存在。巴利
Pādakajjhānasammasitajjhānāniyeva bojjhaṅgādivisesānaṃ upanissayo kāraṇanti pādakajjhānasammasitajjhānupanissayo, tassa sabbhāve. Tadabhāvābhāvatoti tassa ajjhāsayassa abhāvābhāvato.
对于第四禅的圣道来说,在无色界中,只有无色禅那本身才能作为它的基础,所以说“除第四禅者”。第二禅等是圣道超越粗重支分的近依,也是观禅的所依所缘。所谓“五支”,就是五禅支。他的意思是:随着各种主张而被施设的基础禅那等,因为与言说相伴,所以称为“言说”,因此说“这三种言说”。或者说,基础禅那等是能言说的工具,所以称为言说。巴利
Catutthajjhānikassa maggassa āruppe arūpajjhānameva pādakaṃ siyāti āha ‘‘catutthajjhānikavajjāna’’nti. Ariyamaggassa oḷārikaṅgātikkamanūpanissayā vipassanāya adhiṭṭhānārammaṇabhūtā dutiyajjhānādayo. Pañcahi aṅgehīti pañcahi jhānaṅgehi. ‘‘Taṃtaṃvādehi paññāpiyamānāni pādakajjhānādīni vādasahacāritāya ‘vādā’ti vuccantī’’ti adhippāyena ‘‘tayopete vāde’’ti āha. Vadanti etehīti vā vādakaraṇabhūtāni pādakajjhānādīni vādā.
“异熟相续……乃至……善加造作故”,以此说明:业在哪个相续中生起,它就在那个相续中生起时发挥某种特殊作用。因为业的异熟只在那同一个相续中发生,不会在别处。巴利
Vipākasantānassa…pe…susaṅkhatattāti etena yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ uppajjati, tattha uppajjamānameva kiñci visesādhānaṃ karotīti dīpeti. Yato tasmiṃyeva santāne tassa vipāko, nāññattha.
就像前面的随顺那样,所谓“随顺”是指:依照在种姓位生起的随顺,前面的随顺智跟随那个在种姓位生起的随顺,就是这样。那个(在种姓位生起的随顺智)也应当跟随另一个随顺智,并在它之后无间生起。“那地为地”是指:那个被称为五取蕴的地,因为它是烦恼生起之处。“执取为一有而说”这句话表明:“七有”“二有”这样的说法,也要按照意趣来理解,不能按字面来理解。这里的意思是:一次生在欲界天,一次生在人中,这样混合受生,这个限定只是就其中同一种受生而说的。至于“他们不取第八有”这句话,也是就欲界有而说的。他们说,广大有的限定并不存在。同样,“除二有之外”这里,也是就欲界天和人有的混合而说的,所以欲界中所谓的二有,就是依欲界天和人而说的二有。在先前那些选项中,按人的差别来区分行道,说“某人动摇,某人不动摇”,这是没有加上“唯动摇”这个限定时说的意思。然而,因为注释书中说“如同行道,增上也是唯动摇”,所以当不加区分、总括一切行道时,动摇就决定成立,因此第三个选项是“唯动摇”的限定,说的是“唯动摇,而非不动摇”。巴利
Purimānulomaṃ viya tanti yathā gotrabhuṭṭhāne uppannānulomato purimaanulomañāṇaṃ taṃ gotrabhuṭṭhāne uppannānulomaṃ anubandhati, evaṃ. Tadapīti gotrabhuṭṭhāne uppannānulomañāṇampi aññaṃ anulomañāṇameva anubandheyya, tassa anantaraṃ uppajjeyya. Sā bhūmīti sā pañcupādānakkhandhasaṅkhātā kilesānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānatāya bhūmi. Eko bhavoti gahetvā vuttanti etena satta bhave dve bhaveti idampi adhippāyavasena netabbatthaṃ, na yathārutavasenāti dasseti. Tatthāyaṃ adhippāyo – ekavāraṃ kāmāvacaradevesu ekavāraṃ manussesūti evampi missitūpapattivasena tesu ekissā eva upapattiyā ayaṃ paricchedo. Yaṃ pana ‘‘na te bhavaṃ aṭṭhamamādiyantī’’ti (khu. pā. 6.9; su. ni. 232) vuttaṃ, tampi kāmāvacarabhavaṃyeva sandhāyāha. Mahaggatabhavānaṃ paricchedo natthīti vadanti. Tathā ‘‘ṭhapetvā dve bhave’’ti etthāpi kāmāvacaradevamanussabhavānaṃ missakavaseneva, tasmā kāmadhātuyaṃ ye dve bhavāti kāmāvacaradevamanussavasena ye dve bhavāti attho. Purimavikappesu puggalabhedena paṭipadā bhinditvā kassaci calatīti, kassaci na calatīti katvā ‘‘calati evā’’ti avadhāraṇamantarena attho vutto. Yasmā pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 350 lokuttarakusalapakiṇṇakakathā) ‘‘yathā ca paṭipadā, evaṃ adhipatipi calati evā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā sabbesampi paṭipadāsu abhedena gahitāsu ekantena calanaṃ sambhavatīti ‘‘calaticceva vuttaṃ, na na calatī’’ti tatiyavikappo calanāvadhāraṇo vutto.
第一二十种大方法注释巴利
Paṭhamamaggavīsatimahānayavaṇṇanā
357 357. 当以禅那、道等不同说法来解说时,所说的“觉支者”,特别是指在前分阶段生起“我修习禅那,我修习道”这种意乐的人。基于这个意思,才说了“若人于前分阶段”等话。巴利
357. Jhānamaggādipariyāyehi kathite bojjhanakāti adhippetā, visesato pubbabhāge ‘‘jhānaṃ bhāvemi maggaṃ bhāvemī’’ti pavattajjhāsayā hontīti adhippāyena ‘‘yassa pubbabhāge’’tiādimāha.
358 依近依止的意思是:依靠被称为心转起的前分加行。所以论中说“若人……”等。“随彼之力”是说:以获得增上缘而具有特殊能力。如果依靠前分加行,欲等才有增上性,那为什么只说到它们呢?难道信等也能得到前分加行吗?因此论中说“其余诸法……”等。“非彼自性故”是说:不具有被相应法特别随顺的性质。虽然信等也以根缘的力量使相应法随顺,但在同一个心识刹那中,它们不像欲等那样,在没有其他同等作用者的情况下,具有被相应法随顺的性质,所以只说它们为增上。这样,根缘、俱生缘、增上缘的差别就清楚了。巴利
358.Upanissayavasenāti tathā cittappavattisaṅkhātena pubbabhāgābhisaṅkhārena. Tenevāha ‘‘yassa hī’’tiādi. Tadanurūpabalāti adhipatipaccayalābhena sattivisesayogamāha. Yadi pubbabhāgābhisaṅkhāravasena chandādīnaṃ adhipatibhāvo, kimatthameteyeva evaṃ vuttā, nanu saddhādīnampi pubbabhāgābhisaṅkhāro labbhatīti āha ‘‘sesadhammāna’’ntiādi. Ataṃsabhāvattāti sampayuttehi sātisayamanuvattitabbabhāvarahitattā. Kiñcāpi hi saddhādayopi indriyapaccayatāya sampayuttehi anuvattayanti, ekasmiṃ pana cittuppāde samadhurena aññena vinā sampayuttehi anuvattanīyabhāvo na tesaṃ yathā chandādīnanti teyeva adhipatibhāvena vuttā. Evañca katvā indriyasahajātādhipatipaccayānaṃ viseso paribyatto hoti.
四道千法的解说巴利
Catumagganayasahassavaṇṇanā
362 慢的生起方式和见相似。因为就像主人一样,它不会和其他主人——也就是见——一起生起。“一部分……是譬喻”,并不是在一切方面都完全相同;否则,当最上之道隐没时,就会像太阳落山时黑暗笼罩一样,变成遮蔽真谛的黑暗生起,这就是这里的意趣。“相互”就是彼此、各个。“此经所引”应当把格位转换过来理解。“依照所说的方式”是指依照这部注释书中所说的方式。“并非因为譬喻而说”是指在这部经中并不是以譬喻的方式来说的。或者,“依照所说的方式”是指依照这部经中所说的方式,在这部注释书中并不是以譬喻的方式来说的。它们就像组成部分一样,因此说“它们系属于心,使心运作”,所以称为心所等,但不应理解为“触所”等。巴利
362.Mānassa diṭṭhisadisā pavatti. Tathā hi so adhipati viya aññādhipatinā diṭṭhiyā saha nappavattatīti. Ekadesa…pe… upamā hoti, na sabbasāmaññena, itarathā sūriyatthaṅgamane andhakārāvattharaṇaṃ viya aggamaggatirodhāne saccapaṭicchādakatamappavatti āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo. Aññamaññanti aññe aññe. ‘‘Ānītaṃ idaṃ sutta’’nti vibhatti pariṇāmetabbā. Yathāvuttanayenāti imissā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena. Na upamāya vuttattāti imasmiṃ sutte na upamāya vuttabhāvato. Yathāvuttanayenāti vā etasmiṃ sutte vuttappakārena nayena imissā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ upamāya na vuttattā. Avayavā viya honti, yena te cetasi niyuttā, cittassa eteti ca cetasikātiādinā vuccanti, na pana ‘‘phassikā’’tiādināti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
第一心的解说巴利
Paṭhamacittavaṇṇanā
365 由于三刹那在不善法中不可能存在,所以“时”这个词的意思是集合、时间、原因、聚合。针对“被贪所征服时,只在可意所缘以及其他对象上,以执取可意相的方式而具有喜俱”等等说法,才说“随宜”。又因为要依照“由于被烦恼所病,以不健康的含义;由于存在烦恼过失,以有过失的含义;由于从无明所生,以不善巧所生的含义,所以是不善”以及“以有过失、苦异熟为特征,以产生无义为作用,以杂染为现起,以非理作意为近因;或者由于应受谴责,以有过失为特征,以杂染性为作用,以不可爱异熟为现起,如前所说就是近因”等所说的方式去随顺理解,所以说“随顺所说之理”。巴利
365. Khaṇattayassa akusalesu asambhavato samavāyakālahetusamūhattho samaya-saddo. Lobhābhibhūtāya eva iṭṭhārammaṇasmiṃ itaratra ca iṭṭhākāraggahaṇavasena somanassasahagatabhāvoti evamādiṃ sandhāya ‘‘yathānurūpa’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kilesāturatāya anārogyaṭṭhena kilesavajjasabbhāvato sāvajjaṭṭhena avijjāsambhūtatāya akosalyasambhūtaṭṭhena akusala’’nti ca ‘‘sāvajjadukkhavipākalakkhaṇaṃ, anatthajananarasaṃ, saṃkilesapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhānaṃ, gārayhabhāvato vā sāvajjalakkhaṇaṃ, saṃkilesabhāvarasaṃ, aniṭṭhavipākapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāvuttapadaṭṭhānamevā’’ti ca evamādinā vuttanayena anugantabbatāya vuttaṃ ‘‘vuttanayaṃ anugantvā’’ti.
说“已去、去、进行”,是就活动而说的,因此说“只是已去、只是去、只是执取”。因为对见来说,“去”就是活动本身。由于是近因,所以说是“足处(近因)”。就像如理作意是善的近因一样,非如理作意是不善的极近因。事实上,即使有听闻非正法等因存在,只要非如理作意还没有被转向、还没有被确定,不善的活动就不会生起。注释书里也将这样说:“非如理作意是不善。”由此也说明了它是决定性的因。“审虑寒冷等而忍耐”是不放逸而住,所以说“不放逸、忍耐”。因此,这里所说的“念防护”,因为前面已经说了“根防护”,指的是“忍辱防护”;而“断除防护”则是“精进防护”,因为经中说:“对已生起的欲寻,不忍受、舍断”等等。巴利
Gataṃ gamanaṃ pavattīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘gatamattaṃ gatimattaṃ gahaṇamatta’’nti. Diṭṭhiyā hi gati pavatti evāti. Āsannakāraṇattāti padaṭṭhānatāya, yonisomanasikāro viya hi kusalassa ayonisomanasikāro akusalassa accāsannahetu. Tathā hi satipi asaddhammasavanādikāraṇe ayoniso anāvajjite avavatthāpite ca natthi akusalappavatti. Tathā ca vakkhati aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ayoniso akusala’’nti. Etena ekantakāraṇatā ca vuttatthā hoti. Paṭisaṅkhā sītādikhamanaṃ appamādavihāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘appamajjanaṃ khamana’’nti. Tena satisaṃvaroti idha khantisaṃvaro vuttoti adhippāyo indriyasaṃvarassa vuttattā. Pahānasaṃvaroti vīriyasaṃvaro. So hi ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti pajahatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14; 6.58) vuttoti.
痴被理解为与正行相反的状态,也就是执取正行对立面的方式。确实,被它遮蔽的人不会正确地修行。与贪欲特别相应,就是达到了业道。巴利
Sammāpaṭipattiyā paṭipakkhabhāvena gahetabbatākāro moho sammāpaṭipattipaṭipakkhabhāvaggahaṇākāro. Tena hi nivutā na sammā paṭipajjanti. Abhijjhāya visesayogo kammapathappatti.
不观察就是痴。这里应当知道,这是指不带邪见的痴。至于带着邪见的痴,因为它随顺邪见,所以就被当作执取邪见本身来执取。在不可信的事物上,就是没有根据、不值得相信的事情上。带着随顺倾向的决定,这是在说痴和邪见具有类似信的样子。由于被无惭、无愧、痴等所放逸,所以是以无惭等为原因。没有守护的心,正是显示心缺少正念,因为念的现起就是守护。这样一来,“没有信心之心、盲愚之心”这两个词的意思也就说明了。怨恨等,这个“等”字包含了贪等。因为贪等具有缠缚等性质,所以说“无差别地”,因为不可能有某一特定的差别。此处,是指在这样的心中。这是在应当成办的义利上使用处格,就像“在皮革上杀虎”的说法一样;或者,这是依果的转用来表示所缘没有平息,就像“痰是糖”的说法一样。巴利
Anupaparikkhā moho. So cettha diṭṭhirahito veditabbo. Diṭṭhisahitassa pana diṭṭhiyā anuvidhāyakattā taggahaṇeneva gahaṇanti. Avatthusminti asaddahanīye vatthusmiṃ. Sānunayo adhimokkhoti mohadiṭṭhīnaṃ saddhāpatirūpatamāha. Ahirikānottappamohādīhi pamajjanato ahirikādīhi kāraṇehi. Ārakkharahitacitteti cittassa sativirahataṃyeva dasseti. Ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā hi satīti. Etena ‘‘assaddhiyacitte andhabālacitte’’ti padadvayaṃ vuttatthaṃ hoti. Upanāhādīti ādi-saddena rāgādayo saṅgayhanti. Rāgādīnaṃ pariyuṭṭhānādisabhāvatāya ‘‘avisesenā’’ti vuttaṃ visesassa ekaccassa asambhavato. Idhāti, imasmiṃ citte. Nipphādetabbe payojane bhummaṃ ‘‘cammasmiṃ dīpinaṃ hantī’’ti (vajira. ṭī. 17-18 verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) viya ārammaṇaṃ vā avūpasamo phalūpacārena ‘‘semho guḷo’’ti viya.
广说分的诵说巴利
Niddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
390 痴之所以被称为痴,是因为它以遮蔽事物真实本性为方式,成为执取“本性”“我”等并不真实存在之物的依托和根据,所以说它“觉知非实有”;又因为它成为执取“常”等错误不平等相的想等颠倒的依托,所以说它“觉知不平等”。这是把根据说成作者的一种引申说法。这个含义应当从与邪见俱行的痴来理解。这里所说的“本性”,指的是迦毗罗派所说的“根本原质”。巴利
390. Sabhāvapaṭicchādavasena pakatiattādiasantaggahaṇassa nissayattā nimittattā asantaṃ bujjhati, niccādivisamaggahaṇassa saññādivipariyesassa nissayattā asamaṃ bujjhatīti moho vutto nimittassa kattubhāvena upacāritattā, ayañca attho diṭṭhisahitamohavasena daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca pakatīti kāpilānaṃ padhānaṃ.
第三心的解释巴利
Tatiyacittavaṇṇanā
400 就像“必定支”这个词一样,“不失误支”这个词有时也可能表示决定性的状态。为了显示它是不确定的,才说了“生起之适宜支”,因为慢是不确定的。如果慢是确定的,那么欲贪就不会有离开慢而生起的情况,有贪也是如此。若真是这样,在《发趣论》中就不会有四次与欲贪的联结,而只会是三次;也不会有以有贪为根本的联结;这样一来,诸结与诸结之间的联结方式就会是八种,而不是所显示的十种。因此,通过上面所说的这些联结方式,就表明了慢的不确定性。或者,与慢俱行的有五种,就是前面所说的那些必定支;那么,若问“它们是什么”,可知这个意思属于“或类”。因为这里规定“或类”有五种,而不是必定支,所以应当据此进行联结。在《烦恼双论》中,在缘起分等处,如“缘烦恼法,烦恼法以因缘生起”等,其中分别说:“缘贪,生起痴、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧;缘贪,生起痴、慢、掉举、无惭、无愧;缘贪,生起痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧;缘贪,生起痴、掉举、无惭、无愧”,因此说“在《烦恼双论》中也是如此”。这确实是由于与见不相应、有行、无行之心而有的文本差异。巴利
400. Apaṇṇakapadaṃ viya avirajjhanakapadampi kadāci niyatabhāvaṃ dīpeyyāti aniyatataṃ dīpetuṃ ‘‘uppattiarahaṅgānī’’ti vuttaṃ mānassa aniyatattā. Yadi hi māno niyato siyā, kāmarāgassa mānarahitā pavatti na siyā, tathā bhavarāgassa. Evaṃ sati paṭṭhāne catukkhattuṃ kāmarāgena yojanā na siyā, tikkhattuṃyeva siyā, bhavarāgamūlikā ca na siyā, evañca saṃyojanānaṃ saṃyojanehi aṭṭhavidhena yojanā siyā, na dasavidhā dassitāti yathāvuttāhi yojanāhi mānassa aniyatabhāvo pakāsito. Atha vā mānena saddhiṃ pañca honti yathāvuttāni apaṇṇakaṅgāni, kiṃ pana hontīti apekkhāyaṃ yevāpanakāti viditovāyamattho. Yevāpanakānañhi pañcabhāvo idha vidhīyati, na apaṇṇakaṅgānanti so yathā hoti , tathā yojetabbaṃ. Kilesaduke paṭiccavārādīsu ‘‘kilesaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca kileso dhammo uppajjati hetupaccayā’’tiādīsu ‘‘lobhaṃ paṭicca moho māno thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappaṃ. Lobhaṃ paṭicca moho māno uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappaṃ. Lobhaṃ paṭicca moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappaṃ. Lobhaṃ paṭicca moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappa’’nti vibhattattā ‘‘tathā kilesadukepī’’ti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhivippayuttasasaṅkhārikāsaṅkhārikacittavasena hi ayaṃ pāṭhabhedoti.
欲贪以四种方式一同生起,对抗以三种,慢以一种,疑和有贪同样各以一种;接着又说:欲贪与慢结、无明结以及仅与无明结一起;慢与有贪、无明结一起;有贪与无明结一起。因为《法集论注》的篇章释(Dhs-a 1485)中将要这样说到,所以这里说“此处也将说”等等。就在那里,又列举说:贪以六种方式一同生起,对抗以两种,痴也同样;接着又说:无行的、与见不相应的贪,与痴、掉举、无惭、无愧一起;有行的,与痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧一起;无行的,与痴、慢、掉举、无惭、无愧一起;有行的,与痴、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧一起。因此说“如此,烦恼有十种”。由于是以“我”来执取,所以不弯曲的执取也称为“完全执取”。巴利
‘‘Kāmarāgo catudhā ekato uppajjati, paṭigho tidhā, māno ekadhā, tathā vicikicchā bhavarāgoti uddisitvā kāmarāgo mānasaṃyojanaavijjāsaṃyojanehi ceva avijjāsaṃyojanamatteneva ca saddhiṃ māno bhavarāgāvijjāsaṃyojanehi saddhiṃ bhavarāgo avijjāsaṃyojanena saddhi’’nti aṭṭhakathākaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1485) vakkhamānattā ‘‘idha ca vakkhatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattheva ‘‘lobho chadhā ekato uppajjati, paṭigho dvedhā, tathā moho’’ti uddisitvā ‘‘lobho asaṅkhāriko diṭṭhivippayutto mohauddhaccaahirikānottappehi, sasaṅkhāriko mohathinauddhaccaahirikānottappehi, asaṅkhāriko eva mohamānauddhaccaahirikaanottappehi, sasaṅkhāriko eva ca mohamānathinauddhaccaahirikaanottappehī’’ti vakkhamānattā ‘‘tathādasavidhā kilesāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Aha’’nti gahaṇatāya avaṃkatvā gahaṇampi ‘‘sampaggaho’’ti vuttaṃ.
第四心的解释巴利
Catutthacittavaṇṇanā
402 在“生起策励”这句话里,所谓策励,就是被称为心加行的行,而不是精进的策励。巴利
402.Ussāhaṃ janentāti ettha cittapayogasaṅkhāto saṅkhāro eva ussāho, na vīriyussāhoti.
第九心的解说巴利
Navamacittavaṇṇanā
413 由于扩散之不悦色生起,发怒者全身发抖,发怒的样子也显现出来。由此显示了“成就”这一味;或者,从它现起的方式来看,味就是“扩散”。确实,发怒者的敌人的成就大多数情况下就成了生起嗔恨的原因。由此,也就说明了“作用”这一味。巴利
413.Visappanāniṭṭharūpasamuṭṭhānaṃ yena kupitassa sakalasarīraṃ kampati, kupitākāro paññāyati. Etena sampattiattho raso dassito hoti, pavattiākāravasena vā visappanaraso. Tathā hi yassa kuppati, tassa amittassa sampatti yebhuyyena paṭighuppattihetu hotīti. Etena kiccattho raso vutto hotīti.
418 就是字面含义本身,就是同义表达本身。巴利
418.Vacanatthameva vacanapariyāyameva.
第十一心的解释巴利
Ekādasamacittavaṇṇanā
424 没有决定,就是没有胜解。不能确立,就是以相续的方式不能在同一所缘上安住。巴利
424.Nicchayābhāvāti adhimokkhābhāvā. Asaṇṭhahanatoti santānavasena ekasmiṃ ārammaṇe anavaṭṭhānato.
第十二心的解说巴利
Dvādasamacittavaṇṇanā
429 不存在俱生增上缘,因为“若是有欲的人,疑就生起,这疑应当在我这里生起”这类转起根本不存在。由于没有被提出,所以被否定;这也表明在如法教说中没有说到它,从而显示它不存在。巴利
429. Sahajātādhipati natthi ‘‘chandavato ce vicikicchā uppajjati, sā mayhaṃ uppajjeyyā’’tiādippavattiyā abhāvā. Anuddhaṭattā paṭisiddhatā, yathādhammasāsane avacanampi abhāvaṃ dīpeti.
“Avacana”这个词,显示“a”这个字母表示“与那不同”的意思。通过这个“见”,对于应当被见所断的法,以“不存在”这一说法,由因的成立而成立果。为了先说明其中不存在的因,所以说了“由不牵引结生”。由此,那种心生的自性就被说到了。接着,“强力的牵引结生,微弱的不牵引”,这是针对具有结生自性者说的。而对于根本没有结生自性者,它的强力性并不是牵引结生的因,这个意思已经被显示出来了。用“如果牵引的话……”等说法来成立“不牵引”。因为还没有到来,所以不牵引,这是要表达的意思。由于已经说了“因为那结生不存在,所以没有到来”,因此说“由不牵引成立不到来”。巴利
Avacanatoti a-kārassa tadaññavacanataṃ dasseti. Etena ca dassanena pahātabbesu abhāvavacanena kāraṇasiddhiyā phalasiddhīti tattha abhāvassa kāraṇameva tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭisandhianākaḍḍhanato’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena taṃsabhāvatā tassa cittuppādassa vuttā hoti. Tato ca ‘‘balavaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhati, dubbalaṃ nākaḍḍhatī’’ti idaṃ paṭisandhidānasabhāvesu. Yassa pana paṭisandhidānasabhāvo eva natthi, na tassa balavabhāvo paṭisandhiākaḍḍhane kāraṇanti ayamattho dassito hoti. Anākaḍḍhanaṃ sādheti ‘‘yadi hi ākaḍḍheyyā’’tiādinā. Yasmā ca nāgataṃ, tasmā nākaḍḍhatīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yasmā pana taṃ paṭisandhidānaṃ natthi, tasmā nāgata’’nti vuttattā ‘‘anākaḍḍhanato anāgamanaṃ sādhetu’’nti vuttaṃ.
“应堕恶趣者”的意思是:令堕入恶趣,所以叫“应堕恶趣者”,其自性就是如此。如果有牵引结生的情况,那么与掉举相应的心就必定是应堕恶趣者。因此注释书《法集论注》中说:“否则,那一个也会在这里结生。”因为不善的结生不可能发生在善趣。又因为经中说“已脱离四恶趣,是不堕恶趣法者”,所以应堕恶趣者也是依见所断的。因此说“因为应堕恶趣者是依见所断”。然而这个心并不是依见所断,不能用“它那应堕恶趣的贪、嗔、痴以及与它们俱起的诸烦恼”来把它包括进去,因为它被说是决定属于修所断的。正如所说的:“哪些法是修所断的?与掉举相应的心生起。”巴利
Apāyagamanīyassāti apāyaṃ gametīti apāyagamanīyaṃ, taṃsabhāvanti attho. Paṭisandhiākaḍḍhane sati uddhaccasahagataṃ ekantena apāyagamanīyaṃ siyā. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 429) ‘‘itarassāpi ettheva paṭisandhidānaṃ bhaveyyā’’ti. Na hi akusalapaṭisandhi sugatiyaṃ sambhavatīti. ‘‘Catūhi apāyehi ca vippamutto (khu. pā. 6.11; su. ni. 234) avinipātadhammo’’ti (sa. ni. 2.41; 5.998, 1004) vacanato apāyagamanīyañca dassanena pahātabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘apāyagamanīyassa dassanena pahātabbattā’’ti. Na cetaṃ dassanena pahātabbaṃ, na so tassa apāyagamanīyo rāgo doso moho tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesāti etena saṅgahoti sakkā vattuṃ niyogato bhāvanāya pahātabbabhāvena vuttattā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘katame dhammā bhāvanāya pahātabbā, uddhaccasahagato cittuppādo’’ti (dha. sa. 1406).
善恶业,对于异熟诸蕴以及业所生的色法,是以业缘为条件的。这里所说的业缘状态,是指异刹那业缘。如果伴有掉举的结生能被牵引,那么它也会有这种异刹那业缘。若真是这样,伴有掉举的结生就应当成为依见所断的,因为异刹那业缘只被说为属于依见所断的法。然而,这伴有掉举的结生并不是依见所断的,所以一切都像前面那样回转过来。巴利
‘‘Kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ vipākānaṃ khandhānaṃ kaṭattā ca rūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.427) vuttakammapaccayabhāvo nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayabhāvo. So ca yadi uddhaccasahagataṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍheyya, tassāpi siyā. Tathā ca sati uddhaccasahagataṃ dassanena pahātabbaṃ siyā dassanena pahātabbānaṃyeva nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayabhāvassa vuttattā. Na cetaṃ dassenena pahātabbanti sabbaṃ pubbe viya āvattati.
这里只对俱生作了分别。比如在“依见所断分别”中,先举出俱生和异刹那:“依见所断的法,对既非依见所断也非依修所断的法,以业缘为缘”,然后分别说:“俱生的依见所断思,对心等起色,以业缘为缘;异刹那的依见所断思,对异熟蕴以及业生色,以业缘为缘。”但对依修所断的法,却没有这样分别,只说:“依修所断的思,对心等起色,以业缘为缘”,并没有说:“异刹那的思,对异熟蕴以及业生色,以业缘为缘。”由此可以知道,依修所断的法没有异刹那业缘。在遮遣门中,也是随其所应,按照摄缘的力量来举出缘的时候。另外,在依见所断那一处,确实也说了业缘:“依见所断的法,对既非依见所断也非依修所断的法,以所缘缘为缘,以俱生、依止、后生、业缘为缘。”巴利
Sahajātameva vibhattanti yathā dassanena pahātabbavibhaṅge ‘‘dassanena pahātabbo dhammo neva dassanena na bhāvanāya pahātabbassa dhammassa kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 2.8.86) sahajātaṃ nānākkhaṇikanti uddisitvā ‘‘sahajātā dassanena pahātabbā cetanā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo, nānākkhaṇikā dassanena pahātabbā cetanā vipākānaṃ khandhānaṃ kaṭattā ca rūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti vibhattaṃ, evaṃ avibhajitvā ‘‘bhāvanāya pahātabbā cetanā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 2.8.89) ettakameva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘nānākkhaṇikā cetanā vipākānaṃ khandhānaṃ kaṭattā ca rūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti. Tena na bhāvanāya pahātabbassa nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayabhāvoti viññāyati. Paccanīyepi yathāsambhavaṃ saṅgāhakapaccayānaṃ vasena paccayuddhāre kariyamāne. Itarattha cāti dassanenapahātabbapade. Tattha hi ‘‘dassanena pahātabbo dhammo neva dassanena na bhāvanāya pahātabbassa dhammassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo, sahajātaupanissayapacchājātakammapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 2.8.71) kammapaccayopi vuttoti.
“因为那不存在”,意思是:因为异刹那业缘的状态不存在。而且,如果没有异刹那业缘,就不会有结生的牵引,所以说“由于不牵引结生,所以在那里没有到来”。“在这里”,是指在“除了与掉举相应的心之外,其余十一种心能牵引结生”这句话里。“有转起异熟者”,意思是:异熟在转起中,或者因为它是转起的一部分而成为转起,这个业有那样的异熟,所以叫有转起异熟者,这里指的就是业。或者也可以说,转起中的异熟就是转起异熟。如果按这个意思理解,就应该这样拆解句子:这个业有异刹那业缘,所以是异刹那业缘者,它的状态就是异刹那业缘状态。这一点无法避免,因为如果没有异刹那业缘,异熟就不会生起。巴利
Tadabhāvāti nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayattābhāvā. Na ca nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayaṃ vinā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanaṃ atthīti ‘‘paṭisandhianākaḍḍhanato tattha anāgatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etthāti ‘‘ṭhapetvā uddhaccasahagataṃ sesāni ekādaseva paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhantī’’ti ettha. Pavattivipākassāti pavattiyaṃ vipāko pavattiekadesatāya pavattibhūto vā vipāko etassāti pavattivipākaṃ, kammaṃ, tassa. Atha vā pavattiyaṃ vipāko pavattivipāko. Imasmiṃ pana atthe nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayo etassāti nānā…pe… yo, tabbhāvo…pe… tāti evaṃ padacchedo daṭṭhabbo. Na sakkā nivāretuṃ nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayaṃ vinā vipākassa anuppajjanato.
现在,为了说明转起果报能获得不同刹那的业缘,从而展示其被直接说出的情形,所以说了“且说”等话。有人以为果报的给予就是结生果报法的本性,所以说了“如果修习”等话。另一个人则说“神通心等”,因为即使没有给予果报,这类法的果报法性也已经成立,因为其他类似的法也能获得这种果报法性。用“等”这个字,涵盖了自时已过的现法受业和次生受业。所谓“可说”,是指由于获得助伴缘,凡夫相续中生起的掉举俱行心能生起果报;而因为没有助伴缘,有学相续中该果报不生起,这应该是合理的。因此说“然而这个地方应该好好思择”等。同样,后面将会说:“对于在凡夫中生起的对自己财物的欲贪等,以及掉举俱行心的生起,由于三结和与它相应的烦恼未断,助伴未尽,不能否认其果报的生起,所以掉举俱行法的果报在《分别论》中已说。”对于这样的法,有助伴时说果报生起,没有助伴时说果报不生,这并不矛盾。或者,是把给予转起果报的掉举俱行心作为作意对象,而说“可说”。有些注释者解释说:“关于转起果报,《无碍解道分别论》中说‘于他们果报有智’。”这样一来,掉举思也不存在,在识缘的状态中,它也应该被排除——而这只是就结生识而说的。巴利
Idāni pavattivipākānaṃ nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayalābhitāya āhaccabhāsitataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañcā’’tiādimāha. Vipākadānaṃ paṭisandhivipākadhammatāti maññamāno ‘‘yadi bhāvanā’’tiādimāha. Itaro vipākadānābhāvepi siddho vipākadhammabhāvo tādisānaṃ aññesampi labbhamānattāti āha ‘‘abhiññācittādīna’’nti. Ādi-saddena attano kālamatikkantaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ upapajjavedanīyañca saṅgaṇhāti. Vuttaṃ siyāti idaṃ sahāyapaccayalābhato puthujjanasantānavuttino uddhaccasahagatassa vipākuppādanaṃ, tadabhāvā sekkhasantatiyaṃ tassa vipākānuppādanañca yuttaṃ siyāti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘idaṃ pana ṭhānaṃ suṭṭhu vicāretabba’’ntiādi. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘puthujjanesu uppajjamānānaṃ sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgādīnaṃ uddhaccasahagatacittuppādassa ca saṃyojanattayatadekaṭṭhakilesānaṃ anupacchinnatāya aparikkhīṇasahāyānaṃ vipākuppādanaṃ na sakkā paṭikkhipitunti uddhaccasahagatadhammānaṃ vipāko vibhaṅge vutto’’ti. Tassa tādisasseva sati sahāye vipākuppādanavacanaṃ, asati vipākānuppādanavacanaṃ virujjhatīti ca pavattivipākadāyikaṃ vā uddhaccasahagatassa manasi katvā ‘‘vuttaṃ siyā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pavattivipākañhi sandhāya ‘tesaṃ vipāke ñāṇa’nti paṭisambhidāvibhaṅge (vibha. 725-726) vutta’’nti eke vaṇṇayanti. Evaṃ uddhaccacetanāpi na hoti, sāpi viññāṇapaccayabhāve apanetabbāti idampi paṭisandhiviññāṇameva sandhāya vuttanti.
无因善果报的解说巴利
Ahetukakusalavipākavaṇṇanā
431 在“欲界……等等……已说”这里,“等等”这个词包含了“已累积”这个词,因为前面是依“不共业缘之力”来说的。有些人说,“已累积”就是“已获得反复修习”,但这不适用于第一个速行心,因为它还没有被反复修习。如果真是那样,它就不能产生果报了。为了说明与此不同的含义,论师说了“如同”等话。其中,“面向果报”是指面向果报的产生、已经让出了机会。而“已让出机会”是因为在无始轮回中,有许多已造的业存在,通过排拒其他业的果报而得以产生,所以说“排拒了其他的果报”等。而“已增长”是指以自己的诸因所造作,以能够给自己的业赋予力量的方式。以不共的方式立名,如“鼓声、稻芽”那样。所谓“诸识”是指眼识等。所谓“差别缘”是指增上的缘。巴利
431.Kāmāvacara…pe… ādi vuttanti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘upacitattā’’ti padaṃ saṅgayhati ‘‘asādhāraṇakammapaccayavasenā’’ti vuttattā. ‘‘Upacitattāti laddhāsevanattā’’ti keci vadanti , taṃ paṭhamajavanassa na yujjati anāsevanattā. Tathā ca sati tassa vipākadānameva na siyāti tato aññathā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā’’tiādimāha. Tattha vipākābhimukhanti vipākadānābhimukhaṃ katokāsaṃ. Katokāsatā ca anādimhi saṃsāre anekesaṃ kammānaṃ katānaṃ atthitāya parassa paṭibāhanena hotīti ‘‘aññassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vaḍḍhitatā ca sakammassa baladānasamatthatāvasena attano kāraṇehi abhisaṅkhatatā. Asādhāraṇena nāmaṃ uddhaṭaṃ ‘‘bherīsaddo yavaṅkuro’’ti yathā. Viññāṇānanti cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ. Visesapaccayattāti adhikapaccayattā.
依眼而生,并且它就是识别色法的识。这里通过这句话说明复合词中前后两部分指的是同一对象,同时指出“依眼”等两个词之间,就像“青莲花”等词一样,是互相修饰、互相限定的关系。“他识”是指以色法为对象的意识。而在“唯以色法为对象”这个意义上,应当理解为天眼识,这是把与它类似的情况作为它的近喻来说的,就像说“那只就是鹧鸪,那些就是药草”一样。由于没有禅缘性,所以并非没有禅支,因此成立五识中舍受等的近行禅支性。并不是说了禅支具有禅缘性之后,又否定它们具有禅缘性。如果是那样的话,五识中的舍受等就不应该说为属于禅的范畴了,所以论中说“没有禅缘性”等话。“由舍等性”是指由舍、乐、苦、一境性。“由无他处性”是仅就心住立这一点来说的。巴利
Cakkhusannissitañca taṃ rūpavijānanañcāti etena samānādhikaraṇataṃ samāsassa dassento tattha ca ‘‘cakkhusannissita’’ntiādipadadvayassa nīluppalasaddādīnaṃ viya aññamaññavisesanavisesitabbabhāvamāha. Aññaviññāṇanti rūpārammaṇaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ. Rūpaṃyevārammaṇanti pana atthe dibbacakkhuviññāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ taṃsadisānaṃ tadupacāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘sā eva tittirī tāni eva osadhānī’’ti. Jhānapaccayattābhāve na jhānaṅgatā natthīti pañcaviññāṇesu upekkhādīnaṃ upacaritajhānaṅgataṃ sādheti. Na hi jhānaṅgānaṃ jhānapaccayataṃ vatvā tesaṃ jhānapaccayabhāvo paṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ pañcaviññāṇesu upekkhādayo jhānarāsiṭṭhāne na vattabbā siyunti āha ‘‘jhānapaccayattābhāve’’tiādi. Upekkhādibhāvatoti upekkhāsukhadukkhekaggatābhāvato. Aññaṭṭhānābhāvatoti cittaṭṭhitiṃ eva sandhāya vuttaṃ.
436 436. 不善被称为“净白”,是依着有分的等流而说的。如果连有分都是不净白的,那么以它为根源的不善,又怎么可能有净白性呢?所以论中说“不善者亦”。应当说明净白性的原因:如果净白性是由其他原因造成的,那就成了自性本身。因此说心具有无染的自性,但在这里,触等法也不应该因此就成为净白的。因为世尊能了知诸法自性与作用的差别,所以唯独把识如此开示出来。巴利
436. Akusalaṃ bhavaṅganissandena ‘‘paṇḍara’’nti vuccati, bhavaṅge apaṇḍare taṃmūlikā kuto akusalassa paṇḍaratāti ‘‘akusalassa cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṇḍaratāya kāraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ, yadi aññakāraṇā paṇḍaratā, sabhāvovāyanti cittassa akilesasabhāvatāya vuttaṃ, na cettha phassādīnampi paṇḍaratāpatti. Yato dhammānaṃ sabhāvakiccavisesaññunā bhagavatā viññāṇaṃyeva tathā niddiṭṭhanti.
439 以不超越的方式修习。净色被撞击,是指所缘在适合它的位置上安住,所以说“撞击净色之后进入境域”。在大种被撞击这句里,并不是自己撞击了什么,也不是被什么所撞击,因为它的本性不是所触。然而,当它成为所缘和能缘,以现前的状态成为识生起的原因,达到殊胜的状态时,就依“被撞击”和“能撞击”的方式来说,因此对它们有“有对”的说法。“所造色撞击”等说法,也应当知道只是依近似的譬喻来说。然而,有人说:“以大为所缘,当依于身净色而住的大种被撞击时,净色也就被称为被撞击,应当这样审察。”所依和能依的撞击虽然有先后,但为了显示譬喻中一分共性的譬喻说法,所以说了“为显两种撞击”。巴利
439.Anatikkamanena bhāvanāya. Pasādaghaṭṭanaṃ visayassa yogyadese avaṭṭhānanti ‘‘pasādaṃ ghaṭṭetvā āpāthaṃ gantvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahābhūtesu paṭihaññatīti ettha na sayaṃ kiñci paṭihaññati, nāpi kenaci paṭihaññīyati aphoṭṭhabbasabhāvattā. Visayavisayībhūtaṃ pana abhimukhabhāvappattiyā viññāṇuppattiyā hetutāya visiṭṭhabhāvappattaṃ paṭihatapaṭighātakabhāvena voharīyati , tasmā tesu sappaṭighavohāro. ‘‘Upādārūpaṃ ghaṭṭetīti evamādi ca upacāravaseneva veditabbaṃ. Mahābhūtārammaṇena pana kāyappasādanissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu ghaṭṭiyamānesu pasādopi ghaṭṭito eva nāma hotīti vatvā vīmaṃsitabba’’nti vadanti. Yathādhippetena ekadesasāmaññena upamāvacanato nissitanissayaghaṭṭanānaṃ satipi pubbāparabhāve upamatte upamābhāvena gahetabbabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘ubhayaghaṭṭanadassanattha’’nti āha.
455 455. 关于“以见等为现起状态”这一点:意界和意识界之所以具有不见等的性质,正是它们二者的区别所在。关于“没有以其他为所依而意先行”:这是说,不存在以其他为所依而意先行的状态。由于依其他为所依的识并不具备无间缘性,通过这一点,已经说明了它与唯作意界的区别,所以说“由于没有意门出离之入口的状态”,而没有说“由于没有出离与进入之入口的状态”。因为正是通过这三种方式,显示了意界、识界与意识界之间的区别。正因如此,才说它没有特别的识知。如果意界不被称为“意识”,那么在六识身中,意界怎么会被包含进去呢?回答:确实被包含,因为这是同义的说法。确实存在这样的同义表达:“仅以思量即是识,这就是意识”,正如“仅以思量即是界,这就是意界”。再者,由于在依处和作用上与意识相似,它生起于上方,并且是起始等,所以意界被包含在意识身中,而不被包含在其余识身中,因为性质不同。然而在这里,由于是严格意义上的说法,从意所生起的、具有殊胜意作用的才称为意识,因为没有那种作用,所以为了成立“也不称为意识”这一含义,才说了“因为那种识不是从意……”等。由此,显示了意界在严格意义上完全没有意识的作用。而通过“然而对于见……”等语句,则显示了意界与其余识不同的自性。巴利
455.Dassanādippavattibhāvatoti manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ adassanāditāya sā etesaṃ eva viseso. Anaññanissayamanopubbaṅgamatāyāti aññanissayamanopubbaṅgamattābhāvato. Aññanissayaviññāṇassa anantarapaccayattābhāvenāti iminā kiriyāmanodhātutopi visesassa vuttattā ‘‘manodvāraniggamanamukhabhāvābhāvato’’ti vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘niggamanapavesamukhabhāvābhāvato’’ti. Tividhenapi hi manodhātuviññāṇadhātūhi manoviññāṇadhātuyā viseso dassitoti. Tato eva vijānanavisesavirahatoyeva. Yadi manodhātu ‘‘manoviññāṇa’’nti na vuccati, chaviññāṇakāyāti kathaṃ manodhātuyā tattha saṅgaho hotīti? Saṅgaho eva pariyāyadesanattā. Atthi hi esa pariyāyo ‘‘mananamattaṃ viññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇa’’nti yathā ‘‘mananamattā dhātu manodhātū’’ti. Apica vatthukiccehi manoviññāṇasabhāgattā tassa uparamuppādabhāvato antādibhāvato ca manoviññāṇakāyasaṅgahitā manodhātu, na sesaviññāṇakāyasaṅgahitā ataṃsabhāgattā, idha pana nippariyāyakatattā manaso sambhūya visiṭṭhamanokiccayuttaṃ manoviññāṇanti tadabhāvato ‘‘manoviññāṇantipi na vuccatī’’ti imamevatthaṃ sādhetuṃ ‘‘na hi taṃ viññāṇaṃ manato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena manodhātuyā nippariyāyato manoviññāṇakiccavirahaṃyeva dasseti. Dassanādīnaṃ panātiādinā aññaviññāṇavidhuraṃ manodhātuyā ca sabhāvaṃ dasseti.
如果“与生起者相似”是指在大异熟心中寻等具有正思惟等的性质,那么对于由三因所生、具有三因的心,以及由二因所生、具有二因的心,就算它们具有正思惟等的性质好了;可是对于由三因所生却只具有二因的心,又怎么说呢?针对这个问题,论师说“因为在那里……”等等。它不会成为从那一类流落下来的,因为那一类并非无间。正因为如此,通过“正因如此……”等语句,就用紧接着的无间之语来证明所说的“从那一类流落下来”。如果存在于意界等当中的寻等,就像在五识当中那样,不算入其中,既然如此,在《发趣论》中为什么说它们有禅那缘呢?因为确实说过:“无记法对无记法以禅那缘为缘”,“异熟无记和唯作无记的禅支,对相应的诸蕴以及心生色法以禅那缘为缘”。在遮诠的部分也说:“缘无记法而生起无记法,不是以禅那缘;缘与五识俱行的一蕴而生起三蕴”等等,那里只举出了五识,并没有举出意界等,因此论师说“仅以禅那缘的作用……”等等。这里并不是要强调禅支的强弱,而只是说具有禅那缘这一点而已,这才是论师的意旨。巴利
Yadi janakasadisatā nāma mahāvipākesu vitakkādīnaṃ sammāsaṅkappāditā, tihetukato nibbattānaṃ tihetukānaṃ, duhetukato nibbattānaṃ duhetukānañca bhavatu sammāsaṅkappāditā, tihetukato pana nibbattaduhetukānaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘tattha hī’’tiādi. Taṃsotapatitatā na siyā tassā anānantarattā. Tato eva hītiādinā vuttasotapatitaṃ evānantarena vacanena samatthayati. Yadi vijjamānānampi manodhātuādīsu vitakkādīnaṃ pañcaviññāṇesu viya agaṇanūpagabhāvo, evaṃ sante paṭṭhāne kathaṃ tesaṃ jhānapaccayatāvacanaṃ. ‘‘Abyākato dhammo abyākatassa dhammassa jhānapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.431), ‘‘vipākābyākatāni kiriyābyākatāni jhānaṅgāni sampayuttakānaṃ khandhānaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ jhānapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.431) hi vuttaṃ. Paccanīyepi ‘‘abyākataṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca abyākato dhammo uppajjati na jhānapaccayā, pañcaviññāṇasahitaṃ ekaṃ khandhaṃ paṭicca tayo khandhā’’tiādinā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.98) pañcaviññāṇāni eva uddhaṭāni, na manodhātuādīnīti āha ‘‘jhānapaccayakiccamattato’’tiādi. Na hettha jhānaṅgānaṃ balavadubbalabhāvo adhikato, atha kho jhānapaccayabhāvamattanti adhippāyo.
469 “获得了同一依处的无间缘”这句话,是在说明从见等作用以及意界具有强力的原因。“随所缘”是指随顺于所缘。如果因为同一依处性,异熟意识界比意界更强,而且伴有喜受,那么确定作用怎么是舍受呢?把这个问题放在心上,承认它确实具有强力之后,便以“由于相续转变作用的差别,所以不是喜受”来作答,而说出“确定……”等话。所谓“不像异熟那样仅仅是领受”,是因为异熟必然具有领受所缘之味的作用。巴利
469.Samānavatthukaṃ anantarapaccayaṃ labhitvāti dassanādito manodhātuyā ca balavabhāve kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yathārammaṇanti ārammaṇānurūpaṃ. Yadi samānanissayatāya manodhātuto balavatarattaṃ vipākamanoviññāṇadhātuyā somanassasahagatāya, voṭṭhabbanaṃ kathaṃ majjhattavedananti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā tassa balavabhāvaṃ sampaṭicchitvā santatipariṇāmanabyāpāravisesā na somanassavedananti parihāraṃ vadanto ‘‘voṭṭhabbana’’ntiādimāha. Vipāko viya anubhavanameva na hotīti sati samatthatāya vipākānaṃ ekantena ārammaṇarasānubhavanatāya vuttaṃ.
八大异熟心的解释巴利
Aṭṭhamahāvipākacittavaṇṇanā
498 在讲“门”的部分,已经说到异熟法的业门:“三界善与不善的二十九种意”。所谓“通过努力”,是指自己或别人所做的劝励、推动。就像善与不善那样,那些心的彼所缘是随附的。由于对第一心和第五心互相之间强弱状态的考察,第二、第六等心也被考察了,所以说“在这些当中,要考察强和弱”。就像稻谷等因为土地的硬软、杂草拔不拔、时节等其他缘的缺损或具足而有不同的果实,同样,业也因为善趣与恶趣、不清净与清净的努力、投生条件的缺损或具足,而成熟为不同的殊胜果报;同样,就像夏季、雨季等不同时节,种子会有不同的果实,业也因种种时节的差别而有不同的果实,所以说“按时节而成熟”。所谓“精血之缘”,是说由业的不同所熏习的相续所生起的精血,成为寿命差别的因;因为从精血也能看出容貌等的差别,因此说“儿子随顺父亲的相貌”。所谓“以它们为根”,是指以能导致短寿的业为根。所谓“食物等”,用“等”字把不平等的外缘等也包括进来了。巴利
498. Vipākadhammānaṃ kammadvāraṃ vuttaṃ dvārakathāyaṃ ‘‘tebhūmakakusalākusalo ekūnatiṃsavidho mano’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. manokammadvārakathā). Payogenāti attanā parehi vā katena ussāhanapayogena. Kusalākusalāni viya yesaṃ taṃ tadārammaṇaṃ anubandhabhūtaṃ. Paṭhamapañcamacittānaṃ aññamaññabalavadubbalabhāvavicārena dutiyachaṭṭhādīnampi so vicārito hotīti ‘‘etesu balavaṃ dubbalañca vicāretu’’nti vuttaṃ. Yathā sāliādīnaṃ thaddhamudubhūmivasena tiṇādīnaṃ anīharaṇanīharaṇavasena utuādiavasesapaccayānaṃ vipattisampattivasena ca phalavisesayogo, evaṃ kammassa sugatiduggativasena avisuddhavisuddhapayogavasena upapattiyā vipattisampattivasena ca visiṭṭhaphalatāya pariṇamanaṃ, evameva gimhavassakālādīsu bījānaṃ phalavisesayogo viya taṃtaṃkālavisesena kammassa phalavisesayogo hotīti āha ‘‘kālavasena pariṇamatī’’ti. Sukkasoṇitapaccayānanti kammavisesaparibhāvitasantānuppannatāya sukkasoṇitānaṃ āyuvisesahetubhāvamāha sukkasoṇitavasenapi vaṇṇādivisesadassanato, yena ‘‘pitūnaṃ ākāraṃ putto anuvidahatī’’ti vuccati. Taṃmūlakānanti appāyukasaṃvattaniyakammamūlakānaṃ. Āhārādīti ādi-saddena visamūpakkamādayo pariggaṇhāti.
异熟提取论的注释巴利
Vipākuddhārakathāvaṇṇanā
从三因等业而来。“在某某处”指结生等的地方,或者指善趣、恶趣。意思是:不希望从三因业产生二因的结生。但对于转起异熟,确实允许从三因业产生二因的异熟。正如注释中将会说:“这与先前关于因之数量的见解不相符。”巴利
Yato tihetukādikammato. Yasmiñca ṭhāneti paṭisandhiādiṭṭhāne, sugatiduggatiyaṃ vā. Tihetukato duhetukaṃ anicchanto paṭisandhinti adhippāyo. Pavattivipākaṃ pana tihetukato duhetukampi icchati eva. Tathā hi vakkhati aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ purimāya hetukittanaladdhiyā na yujjatī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498).
有些人不知道“只是由那同一业剩余的果报”以及“供养一朵花之后,八十俱胝劫中我不曾知道恶趣”(《长老偈》96;《譬喻经·长老》2.46.64)这类话的意趣,又没有看清“见到具有百福相的童子”(《长部》3.205)这类话的含义,就陷入疑惑:“到底是由一个业而有多种结生,还是由多种业而有一种结生?”他们依据种子和芽的比喻断定“从一个业有一种结生,从多个业有多种结生”,为了从业与结生的判定中说明沙祇问中“揭示果报”之说的突出关联,所以说“依业力故……乃至……显示”。应当理解,这里的意思是:依作为结生之因的业力,结生果报本身就是无贪与贪等善不善法的功德与过失增减的原因。正如说:“他由那个业,依所获得的结生而成为贪者”等等。在这里,依贪、依嗔、依痴,依贪嗔、依贪痴、依嗔痴,依贪嗔痴,也就是三个单一组合、三个两两组合、一个三者组合,按显示贪等的方式,在不善这一类中就有七种。同样,在善这一类中,按显示无贪等的方式,可以得到十四种。巴利
Ye ‘‘tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesenā’’ti, ‘‘ekapupphaṃ yajitvāna, asīti kappakoṭiyo (theragā. 96). Duggatiṃ nābhijānāmī’’ti (apa. thera 2.46.64) ca evamādivacanassa adhippāyaṃ ajānantā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ekenapi kammena anekā paṭisandhi hotī’’ti, ‘‘disvā kumāraṃ satapuññalakkhaṇa’’ntiādivacanassa (dī. ni. 3.205) atthaṃ asallakkhetvā ‘‘kinnu kho nānākammehi ekā paṭisandhi hotī’’ti saṃsayapakkhandā, tesaṃ bījaṅkuropamāya ‘‘ekasmā ekā, anekasmā ca anekā paṭisandhi hotī’’ti vinicchitattā kammapaṭisandhivavatthānato sāketapañhe vipākuddhārakathāya ussadakittanagahaṇassa sambandhaṃ āha ‘‘kammavasena…pe… dassetu’’nti. Paṭisandhijanakakammavasena paṭisandhivipāko eva alobhalobhādiguṇadosātirekabhāvahetūti attho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘so tena kammena dinnapaṭisandhivasena nibbatto luddho hotī’’tiādi. Ettha ca lobhavasena, dosa, moha , lobhadosa, lobhamoha, dosamoha, lobhadosamohavasenāti tayo ekakā, tayo dvikā, eko tikoti lobhādidassanavasena akusalapakkheyeva satta vārā. Tathā kusalapakkhe alobhādidassanavasenāti cuddasa vārā labbhanti.
在这里,善品中通过“无贪、嗔、无痴”“无贪、无嗔无痴”“无贪无嗔、无痴强”所引出的第三、第二、第一轮,已经包含了嗔突出、痴突出、嗔痴突出的轮次。同样,不善品中通过“贪、嗔、痴”“贪、嗔无痴”“贪无嗔、痴强”所引出的第三、第二、第一轮,也已经包含了无嗔突出、无痴突出、无嗔无痴突出的轮次。这样一来,把善品和不善品各自三轮都收进去之后,就只显示了八轮。至于有人想按两者混合的方式,另外显示贪无贪突出轮等四十九轮,那因为根本不可能存在,所以没有显示。因为在一个心相续里,不可能在中间隔了不同心位的情况下,既有贪强又有无贪强。它们之所以有强弱之分,正是因为彼此对立,或者是从俱生法的角度来说的。其中,贪因为没有被它的对立面无贪所压伏,所以是强;嗔和痴也一样,因为没有被无嗔和无痴所压伏,所以是强。而无贪等则因为能压伏贪等,并且在同类法中依胜伏而转起,所以从俱生法的角度来说就是强。因此,注疏中说:“贪强,无贪弱;无嗔无痴强,嗔痴弱。”而这些强弱,应当理解为是由先前依止所熏习的习气造成的。另外,依第一、第二轮,或者第七、第一轮,由三因业依结生和转起而显示三因果报;依其余各轮,则由三因业、二因业随其所应,依结生和转起而显示二因果报和无因果报。这个差别也应当知道。巴利
Tattha ‘‘alobhadosāmohā, alobhādosamohā, alobhadosāmohā balavanto’’ti āgatehi kusalapakkhe tatiyadutiyapaṭhamavārehi dosussadamohussadadosamohussadavārā gahitā. Tathā akusalapakkhe ‘‘lobhādosamohā, lobhadosāmohā, lobhādosāmohā balavanto’’ti āgatehi tatiyadutiyapaṭhamavārehi adosussadaamohussadaadosāmohussadavārā gahitāyevāti akusalakusalapakkhe tayo tayo vāre antogadhe katvā aṭṭheva vārā dassitā. Ye pana ubhayesaṃ vomissatāvaseneva lobhālobhussadavārādayo apare ekūnapaññāsa vārā dassetabbā, te asambhavato eva na dassitā. Na hi ekasmiṃ santāne antarena avatthantaraṃ lobho balavā alobho cāti yujjati. Paṭipakkhatoyeva hi etesaṃ balavadubbalabhāvo, sahajātadhammato vā. Tesu lobhassa tāva paṭipakkhato alobhena anabhibhūtatāya balavabhāvo, tathā dosamohānaṃ adosāmohehi. Alobhādīnaṃ pana lobhādiabhibhavanato sabbesañca samānajātiyaṃ samabhibhūya pavattivaseneva sahajātadhammato balavabhāvo. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘lobho balavā, alobho mando, adosāmohā balavanto, dosamohā mandā’’ti. So ca tesaṃ mandabalavabhāvo purimūpanissayato āsayassa paribhāvitatāya veditabbo. Ettha ca paṭhamadutiyehi, sattamapaṭhamehi vā vārehi tihetukakammato paṭisandhipavattivasena tihetukavipāko, itarehi tihetukaduhetukakammato yathāsambhavaṃ paṭisandhipavattivasena duhetukāhetukavipākā dassitāti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
这里说的“此处”,是指在果报分别的论母中。用这句话特别说明因的标示。天生瞎眼等残缺的相,就是痴,或者指一切不善。至于“然而所说”,是连接语,也就是依据《无碍解道》的那段话。在趣成就存在时,应当成就与智相应的结生。所谓“在其他地方”,是指临终和结生的刹那。“与业相似”,这里应当理解为有特殊意义的相似。否则,三因和二因的结生也会互相相似,这一点已经说明了。在“眼识等”当中,五识没有前依而生起,意界也同样缺乏特殊的认知作用,不能执取可爱等境的差别,所以没有说它是“明显的”,或者已经被“等”字包括进去了。所谓“彼所缘缘一切速行转起”,是指与作为彼所缘缘的一切速行转起一起。这就是针对“此处由处的成熟”等所说的。“其他时”,是指没有生起观察的时候。巴利
Idhāti vipākuddhāramātikāyaṃ. Tena hetukittanaṃ viseseti. Jaccandhādivipattinimittaṃ moho, sabbākusalaṃ vā. Yaṃ pana vuttanti sambandho. Tena paṭisambhidāmaggavacanena. Gatisampattiyā sati ñāṇasampayutte paṭisandhimhi nipphādetabbe. Aññatthāti nikantipaṭisandhikkhaṇesu. Kammasarikkhakoti idha sātisayo sarikkhabhāvo adhippetoti daṭṭhabbo. Itarathā tihetukaduhetukāpi aññamaññaṃ sarikkhāyevāti dassitametanti. Cakkhuviññāṇādīnīti ettha pañcaviññāṇāni viya apubbanissayapavattinī vijānanavisesarahitā ca manodhātu iṭṭhādibhāgaggahaṇe na samatthāti ‘‘pākaṭāyevā’’ti na vuttā, ādi-saddena vā saṅgahitā. Tadārammaṇapaccayasabbajavanavatāti tadārammaṇassa paccayabhūtasakalajavanappavattisahitena. Yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘idha paripakkattā āyatanāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññakāleti abuddhipavattikāle.
随顺,就是与法随顺。所谓“习行缘”,就是作为习行的缘。于道非道缘。这一句也可能是空句。意思是:如果确定心也有习行缘,那么就像在顺逆和逆顺中说的那样——“依乐受相应的法,以习行缘生起乐受相应的法,非道缘”,以及“乐受……非道缘,是习行缘”,这是就笑生心而说的;同样,如果就确定心而言,也应当有像前面“依不苦不乐受相应的法”等那样的经文,如果是这样,按两轮来计数时,就应当说“习行缘于道非有二,道缘于习行非有二”,然而并没有这样说,所以这个空句是不可得的,这就是它的意思。巴利
Anulometi dhammānulome. Āsevanapaccayāti āsevanabhūtā paccayā. Na magge amaggapaccaye . Sopi moghavāro labbheyyāti yadi voṭṭhabbanampi āsevanapaccayo siyā, yathā ‘‘sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca sukhāya vedanāya sampayutto dhammo uppajjati āsevanapaccayā na (paṭṭhā. 1.2.3) maggapaccayā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.2.14) anulomapaccanīye, paccanīyānulome ca ‘‘sukhā…pe… na maggapaccayā āsevanapaccayā’’ti ca vuttaṃ hasituppādacittavasena, evaṃ voṭṭhabbanavasena ‘‘adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya sampayuttaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiccā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena pāṭho siyā, tathā ca sati vāradvayavasena gaṇanāyaṃ ‘‘āsevanapaccayā na magge dve. Na maggapaccayā āsevane dve’’ti ca vattabbaṃ siyā, na pana vuttaṃ, tasmā na labbheyyāyaṃ moghavāroti adhippāyo.
如果确定心也有习行缘,那么在第二个空句轮里,就像在自己这一轮里一样,在第三、第四轮里也应该有;若真是这样,它自己也会成为善与不善的习行缘了。因为并非……(中略)……没有说到,这是由于“前前诸善法”等已经毫无遗漏地说过了。确定心……(中略)……没有说到,因为不存在“无记法以习行缘为缘,缘善法;以习行缘为缘,缘不善法……(中略)……为缘”这样的说法。不仅没有说到,而且善……(中略)……实际上是被否定了的。接下来“或者可能有”等话,只是为了厘清思路才说的。由于显示出只有在相同受的情况下才有习行缘的关系,所以说“依不同受而言”。这样一来,或许也应该说“以习行缘为缘”,但意思是依相同受而说。“以及不同生类者”中的“以及”,是“以及不同受者”的合集义。在受三法里,确定心也没有习行缘的关系,这是应当连接的。在善三法等中,如已显示的圣典段落里也是如此,“也”字是合集义。当以数目为因而被数目所简择时,或者在数目之内。第二个空句应当审察,意思是:由于没有习行缘的关系,它不能安立在速行位。因为没有习行,速行的转起就不存在,这就是它的意思。巴利
Voṭṭhabbanampi yadi āsevanapaccayo siyā, dutiyamoghavāre attano viya tatiyacatutthavāresupi siyā, tathā sati attanāpi kusalākusalānaṃ siyā. Na hi…pe… avutto atthi ‘‘purimā purimā kusalā dhammā’’tiādinā anavasesato vuttattā. Voṭṭhabbanassa…pe… avutto ‘‘abyākato dhammo kusalassa dhammassa āsevanapaccayena paccayo. Akusalassa…pe… paccayo’’ti vacanābhāvato. Na kevalaṃ avutto, atha kho kusalaṃ…pe… paṭikkhittova. Athāpi siyātiādi maggasodhanatthameva vuccati. Samānavedanānaṃ eva āsevanapaccayabhāvassa dassanato ‘‘asamānavedanānaṃ vasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘āsevana paccayena paccayo’’tipi vattabbaṃ siyā, samānavedanāvasenāti adhippāyo. Abhinnajātikassa cāti ca-saddo abhinnavedanassa cāti sampiṇḍanattho. Vedanāttikepi voṭṭhabbanassa āsevanapaccayattassa abhāvāti yojanā. Kusalattikādīsu yathādassitapāḷippadesesupīti sampiṇḍanattho pi-saddo. Gaṇanāya kāraṇabhūtāya gaṇanāya niddhāriyamānāya sati gaṇanāya vā abbhantare. Dutiyo moghavāro vīmaṃsitabboti āsevanapaccayattābhāvā javanaṭṭhāne ṭhātuṃ na yujjati. Na hi vinā āsevanaṃ javanappavatti atthīti adhippāyo.
另外,这里因为接下来要引用“凡是达到速行状态的,就像断了根的树上的花一样”(《法集论注》566),所以对于还没有断除有的根本而正在生起的确定心来说,不可能有唯作的性质。而且已经说过:“当意识界生起时,是唯作,既不是善也不是不善,也不是业的异熟,与舍俱。”因此,如果说“站在速行的位置上,就是在速行生起的地方转起两次,而不是以速行的状态”,并且说“得到修习,就是像修习一样的修习”,这并没有任何矛盾。不过,对于有扩展的(速行),在这里两次转起就是类似修习。因为具有扩展性,所以说它能令表色等生起。即使有扩展,由于不像速行那样多次转起,力量薄弱,所以不能以真正修习缘的方式转起,因此在这段文中并没有说修习的含义,但在注释中则是以间接的方式说的,就像说“在果心中,道支属于道”一样。这是我在这个问题上的个人见解。这一点也因为古代诸师没有加以解释,所以应当仔细审察。巴利
Apicettha ‘‘yaṃ javanabhāvappattaṃ, taṃ chinnamūlakarukkhapupphaṃ viyā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 566) vakkhamānattā anupacchinnabhavamūlānaṃ pavattamānassa voṭṭhabbanassa kiriyabhāvo na siyā, vutto ca ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye manoviññāṇadhātu uppannā hoti kiriyā neva kusalā nākusalā na ca kammavipākā upekkhāsahagatā’’ti, tasmā ‘‘javanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvāti javanassa uppajjanaṭṭhāne dvikkhattuṃ pavattitvā, na javanabhāvenā’’ti, ‘‘āsevanaṃ labhitvāti ca āsevanaṃ viya āsevana’’nti vuccamāne na koci virodho, vipphārikassa pana sato dvikkhattuṃ pavattiyevettha āsevanasadisatā. Vipphārikatāya hi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakattañcassa vuccati. Vipphārikampi javanaṃ viya anekakkhattuṃ appavattiyā dubbalattā na nippariyāyato āsevanapaccayabhāvena pavatteyyāti na imassa pāṭhe āsevanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pariyāyato vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘phalacittesu maggaṅgaṃ maggapariyāpanna’’nti. Ayamettha attanomati. Ayampi porāṇakehi asaṃvaṇṇitattā sādhukaṃ upaparikkhitabbo.
像这样做了之后,因为确定和转向在意义上并没有差别,所以只说“转向”,其用意是:即使在确定的位置上也是如此。因此,因为确定在意义上就是转向,属于与舍俱的无因唯作意识界,所以就像转向生起时那样,对于欲界善、不善、唯作的速行,它必定只以无间缘的方式起作用,不会以其他方式。基于这个用意,说了“从确定……”等话。“四种”是说在昏昧、临死等时候,因为速行的力量变弱,四种速行也会生起,这是所说的用意。这就是它的自性,也就是通过所缘门来显示心的法则。虽然说了“速行圆满……(中略)……是合理的”,但因为已经说了“不能成为转向等的缘”,所以就心的转起而言,这和第一空轮没有任何差别。因此说“这也……(中略)……应当审察”。当在结生心中,于转起时被称为“有分”时,不能因为它的因有差别,就说“有因有分以无间缘为缘而缘无因有分”(《发趣论》3.1.102)是不可以的;然而既然已经说了,由此可知,有因有分是指彼所缘,应当这样理解。巴利
Evañca katvāti voṭṭhabbanāvajjanānaṃ anatthantarabhāvato ‘‘āvajjanā’’icceva vuttaṃ, voṭṭhabbanaṭṭhānepīti adhippāyo. Tasmāti yasmā voṭṭhabbanaṃ āvajjanāyeva atthato upekkhāsahagatāhetukakiriyamanoviññāṇadhātubhāvato, tasmā. Taṃ āvajjanā viya sati uppattiyaṃ kāmāvacarakusalākusalakiriyajavanānaṃ ekantato anantarapaccayabhāveneva vatteyya, no aññathāti adhippāyena ‘‘voṭṭhabbanato’’tiādimāha. Catunnanti muñchāmaraṇāsannavelādīsu mandībhūtavegatāya cattāripi javanāni uppajjeyyunti adhippāyena vuttaṃ. Ayametassa sabhāvoti ārammaṇamukhenapi cittaniyāmaṃyeva dasseti. Yadipi ‘‘javanāpāripūriyā…pe… yutto’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘āvajjanādīnaṃ paccayo bhavituṃ na sakkotī’’ti pana vuttattā cittappavattivasena paṭhamamoghavārato etassa na koci viseso. Tenevāha ‘‘ayampi…pe… retabbo’’ti. Paṭisandhicitteyeva pavattiyaṃ ‘‘bhavaṅga’’nti vuccamāne na tassa hetuvasena bhedoti ‘‘sahetukaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ ahetukassa bhavaṅgassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.1.102) na sakkā vattuṃ, vuttañca, tasmā sahetukaṃ bhavaṅganti tadārammaṇaṃ vuttanti viññāyati.
以自性作用成为自己果的缘,或者以自性作用为果的缘,就是自性作用缘。应当认为“未被否定”,因为“只在二因喜俱无行速行结束时”这个意思并不是这里所要表达的。就像无因、二因结生者在三因速行结束时,无因、二因的彼所缘未被否定一样,三因结生者在三因速行之后,二因彼所缘;二因结生者在二因速行之后,无因彼所缘,也应看作未被否定。因为确实说过:“三因业能给出三因、二因和无因的异熟。”(《法集论注》498)用“圆满异熟”这个词,也正好证明从三因速行生起前面所说的彼所缘是未被否定的。因为如果其他缘的聚合不具备,彼所缘并非一切尚未成熟的业都成为圆满异熟。这只是一个举例说明,因为前面所说的彼所缘转起并没有被详细阐明。对于三因等业,殊胜的三因业有十六种,其余的有十二种;殊胜的二因业有十二种,其余的有八种;如此,十六种异熟心等应当配合。因此,对于圆满异熟的令结生业而言,这仅仅是异熟说明的举例而已。巴利
Sabhāvakiccehi attano phalassa paccayabhāvo, sabhāvakiccānaṃ vā phalabhūtānaṃ paccayabhāvo sabhāvakiccapaccayabhāvo. Appaṭisiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbanti ‘‘duhetukasomanassasahagataasaṅkhārikajavanāvasāne evā’’ti imassa atthassa anadhippetattā. Yathā ca ahetukaduhetukapaṭisandhikānaṃ tihetukajavanāvasāne ahetukaduhetukatadārammaṇaṃ appaṭisiddhaṃ, evaṃ tihetukapaṭisandhikassa tihetukajavanānantaraṃ duhetukatadārammaṇaṃ, duhetukapaṭisandhikassa ca duhetukānantaraṃ ahetukatadārammaṇaṃ appaṭisiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tihetukakammaṃ tihetukampi duhetukampi ahetukampi vipākaṃ detī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498) hi vuttaṃ. Paripuṇṇavipākassāti imināpi tihetukajavanato yathāvuttatadārammaṇassa appaṭisiddhaṃyeva sādheti. Na hi paccayantarasāmaggiyā asati tadārammaṇaṃ sabbaṃ avipaccantaṃ kammaṃ paripuṇṇavipākaṃ hotīti. Mukhanidassanamattameva yathāvuttatadārammaṇappavattiyā avibhāvitattā. Tihetukādikammassa hi ukkaṭṭhassa tihetukakammassa soḷasa, itarassa dvādasa, ukkaṭṭhasseva duhetukakammassa dvādasa, itarassa aṭṭhāti evaṃ soḷasavipākacittādīni yojetabbāni. Tasmāti yasmā paripuṇṇavipākassa paṭisandhijanakakammassa vasena vipākavibhāvanāya mukhanidassanamattamevetaṃ, tasmā.
像这样做了之后,意思是:由于种种业,彼所缘的生起也可能以不同于此的方式发生。在“舍……生起”这句里,它是靠什么作用生起的呢?首先,它不可能是彼所缘作用,因为它不缘取速行的所缘;也不可能是审察作用,因为它并不那样运作;在结生和死时更不必说;排除这些之后,说它是有分作用才合理。因为并不是只有作为结生的心才叫有分。巴利
Evañca katvāti nānākammato tadārammaṇuppattiyaṃ ito aññathāpi sambhavatoti attho. ‘‘Upekkhā…pe… uppajjatī’’ti ettha kena kiccena uppajjatīti? Tadārammaṇakiccaṃ tāva na hoti javanārammaṇassa anālambaṇato, nāpi santīraṇakiccaṃ tathā appavattanato, paṭisandhicutīsu vattabbameva natthi, pārisesato bhavaṅgakiccanti yuttaṃ siyā. Na hi paṭisandhibhūtaṃyeva cittaṃ ‘‘bhavaṅga’’nti vuccatīti.
“彼倾向”是指倾向于进入视野的所缘,这是句法上的关联。就像其他人的转向那样,也像初禅等的转向那样。意思是说,这个转向也应该具有转向性。“非彼义”这里,用“彼”这个字来指灭尽定。“生起”是指从生起来说。“彼”是指非想非非想处,也就是那个灭尽定。这样生起,就是在解释“成为无间缘”这句话的意思。如前所说,就是所说的那种。“清净”是第二道等的前导智。“这些”是指圣道心和与道无间的果心。“这个”是指如前所说的异熟心。巴利
Tanninnanti āpāthagatavisayaninnaṃ āvajjananti sambandho. Aññassa viya paṭhamajjhānādikassa viya. Etassapi sāvajjanatāya bhavitabbanti adhippāyo. Atadatthāti ettha taṃ-saddena nirodhaṃ paccāmasati. Uppattiyāti uppattito. Tanti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Tassa nirodhassa. Tathā ca uppajjatīti ‘‘anantarapaccayo hotī’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivarati. Yathāvuttā vuttappakārā. Vodānaṃ dutiyamaggādīnaṃ purecārikañāṇaṃ. Etesanti ariyamaggacittamaggānantaraphalacittānaṃ. Etassāti yathāvuttavipākacittassa.
为显示前心作为该眼识等异熟本身的亲依止缘,故从眼等的见等含义、见等结果或见等作用而言。前心指转向等心。在应当说明无其他依处时,就像在其他依处中一样,在其他所缘中也不生起,所以说“无其他依处与所缘”。巴利
Upanissayato tasseva cakkhuviññāṇādivipākassa dassanatthaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ dassanādiatthato dassanādiphalato, dassanādippayojanato vā. Purimacittāni āvajjanādīni. Vatthantararahitatte dassetabbe vatthantare viya ārammaṇantarepi na vattatīti ‘‘vatthārammaṇantararahita’’nti vuttaṃ.
如果异熟一定和业相似,那么在这种情况下,这一处就不可能有无因异熟,因为它们和业不相似。考虑到这个意思,所以他说“然而,无因的……”。“只是撞击”说的是五识的作用,因为它们只是以撞击现前之色等的方式生起。“等”这个字包含了领受等。在善法、不善法以及唯作中存在的有行、无行,因为彼此不相似,而且从断除和生起的角度来说似乎互相矛盾;但在异熟中,这种有行无行可能是随顺的,不过由于它没有根,对于那些只是以撞击自己对象等方式生起的心来说并不存在,所以说“并非与有行相违”等等。通过这两者,他都允许它们生起,就像“故作业色”这个说法的意趣一样。就像在《发趣论》的异熟三法里说:“异熟法之法对异熟法以所缘缘为缘。观异熟法蕴为无常、苦、无我,乐着、欢喜,缘彼生起贪,生起忧,善不善灭尽”等等;在善三法里也有类似的经文,所以说“而在善三法中”等等。其中,先标举“善法对无记法以所缘缘为缘”,然后说“有学或凡夫观善为无常、苦、无我,善灭尽时异熟生起为彼所缘,乐着、欢喜善,缘彼生起贪,生起见、疑、掉举、忧,不善灭尽时异熟生起为彼所缘”。因为不存在的缘故所以不说,带着这个意趣,他用“因为广大的……”等来显示其中的道理。巴利
Yadi vipākena kammasarikkheneva bhavitabbaṃ, evaṃ sati imasmiṃ vāre ahetukavipākānaṃ asambhavo eva siyā tesaṃ akammasarikkhakattāti imamatthaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘ahetukānaṃ panā’’ti. Abhinipātamattanti pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ kiccamāha. Te hi āpāthagatesu rūpādīsu abhinipātanamatteneva vattanti. Ādi-saddena sampaṭicchanādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Kusalesu kusalākusalakiriyesupi vā vijjamānā sasaṅkhārikāsaṅkhārikatā aññamaññaṃ asarikkhattā pahānāvaṭṭhānato ca viruddhā viyāti vipākesu sā tadanukūlā siyā, sā pana mūlābhāvena na suppatiṭṭhitānaṃ savisayābhinipatanamattādivuttīnaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘na sasaṅkhārikaviruddho’’tiādi. Ubhayenapi tesaṃ nibbattiṃ anujānāti yathā ‘‘kaṭattārūpāna’’nti adhippāyo. ‘‘Vipākadhammadhammo vipākassa dhammassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo. Vipākadhammadhamme khandhe aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassati, assādeti abhinandati, taṃ ārabbha rāgo uppajjati, domanassaṃ uppajjati, kusalākusale niruddhe’’tiādinā (paṭṭhā. 1.3.93) vipākattike viya siyā kusalattikepi pāḷīti katvā ‘‘kusalattike cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ‘‘kusalo dhammo abyākatassa dhammassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti uddisitvā ‘‘sekkhā vā puthujjanā vā kusalaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassanti, kusale niruddhe vipāko tadārammaṇatā uppajjati, kusalaṃ assādeti abhinandati, taṃ ārabbha rāgo uppajjati, diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, uddhaccaṃ, domanassaṃ uppajjati, akusale niruddhe vipāko tadārammaṇatā uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjamānattā eva avacananti adhippāyena tattha yuttiṃ dasseti ‘‘vipphārikañhī’’tiādinā.
在这里,有些人这样说:就算从六支舍的角度来看,由于是唯作心,唯作速行的广大唯作性也不能被否定,所以举出的掌叶喻并不等同。经典里没有说唯作速行之后没有彼所缘,这也不能成为理由,因为即使存在这种情况,也可能出于某种用意而在某处没有说明。比如在《法集论》讲不善的部分里,明明有增上缘却没有提到。因此,唯作速行之后到底有没有彼所缘,还需要进一步考察。
然而,即使具有唯作性,对于在一切处都已达到那种状态的漏尽者来说,他们的速行心并不像其他人的那样广大;因为其本性寂静,其味可能是止息的,所以为他们举出了掌叶喻。正如《法集论》讲不善时对增上缘那样,在《发趣论》中,唯作速行之后存在彼所缘却没有说明,看不出任何理由。正如那里的注释说:因为前面已经显示过了。但这里不能说因为前面已经显示过了,因为从异熟法的善与不善来显示非彼性之理,是不合理的。再者,在那里,由于考察中某些增上缘乃至一切增上缘都不存在,可以说举出是为了显示一味之教;但在这里,没有说明却找不到那样的理由,所以说未说明是没有理由的。巴利
Ettha keci ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhāvatopi kiriyamayacittatāya kiriyajavanassa vipphārikakiriyabhāvo na sakkā nisedhetunti nidassanabhāvena paṇṇapuṭamupanītaṃ asamānaṃ. Kiriyajavanānantaraṃ tadārammaṇābhāvassa pāḷiyaṃ avacanampi akāraṇaṃ labbhamānassapi katthaci kenaci adhippāyena avacanato. Tathā hi dhammasaṅgahe akusalaniddese labbhamānopi adhipati na vutto, tasmā kiriyajavanānantaraṃ tadārammaṇābhāvo vīmaṃsitabbo’’ti vadanti. Satipi kiriyamayatte sabbattha tādibhāvappattānaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ javanacittaṃ na itaresaṃ viya vipphārikaṃ, santasabhāvatāya pana sannisinnarasaṃ siyāti tassa paṇṇapuṭaṃ dassitaṃ. Dhammasaṅgahe akusalaniddese adhipatino viya paṭṭhāne kiriyajavanānantaraṃ tadārammaṇassa labbhamānassa avacane na kiñci kāraṇaṃ dissati. Tathā hi vuttaṃ tattha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhā dassitanayattā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 429). Na cettha dassitanayattāti sakkā vattuṃ vipākadhammadhammehi kusalākusalehi ataṃsabhāvānaṃ nayadassanassa ayujjamānakattā. Apica tattha vīmaṃsāya kesuci sabbesañca adhipatīnaṃ abhāvato ekarasaṃ desanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘uddhaṭo’’ti ca sakkā vattuṃ, idha pana na tādisaṃ avacane kāraṇaṃ labbhatīti ‘‘avacane kāraṇaṃ natthī’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓“以意趣”,是在显示那位长老的见解:不善之后不存在有因的彼所缘。然而,依据“善与不善灭去时,有因的果报生起为彼所缘”这一说法,不善之后确实也存在有因的彼所缘。因此,主张它生起的一方,是依据合理的把握来说的,这就是这里的意趣所在。巴利
Adhippāyenāti akusalānantaraṃ sahetukatadārammaṇaṃ natthīti tassa therassa matimattanti dasseti. ‘‘Kusalākusale niruddhe sahetuko vipāko tadārammaṇatā uppajjatī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.1.98) vacanato pana akusalānantaraṃ sahetukatadārammaṇampi vijjatiyevāti uppattiṃ vadantassa yuttaggahaṇavasenāti adhippāyo.
这里看不到理由,以此说明:在三因速行之后,三种彼所缘都是合理的。第一位长老的意思是:同一个业生起多种彼所缘时,因为业没有差别,所以是由各各速行这种缘的差别而变得殊胜。基于这个意思,他按照速行来说彼所缘的有行等分类。第二位长老的意思是:异熟必定要与业相似,不能与业性质相违,否则就会有非所欲的过患,因此他唯依业来说彼所缘的差别。第三位长老则认为:就像智慧能对治生盲等恶趣衰败之因一样,也可能对治善趣衰败之因,因此以“不许三因业生二因结生”等道理,在各种说法中应当依不相违的意思来合理采纳。《大论》所出的经典,即“有因法对无因法以无间缘为缘”的分别中,诸如“有因有分对无因有分以无间缘为缘,有因蕴对出起以无间缘为缘”等,这些就是《发趣论》中“有因二法组”等处所出经典的义趣。巴利
Na ettha kāraṇaṃ dissatīti etena tihetukajavanānantaraṃ tividhampi tadārammaṇaṃ yuttanti dasseti. Yena adhippāyenāti paṭhamatherena tāva ekena kammunā anekatadārammaṇaṃ nibbattamānaṃ kammavisesābhāvā taṃtaṃjavanasaṅkhātapaccayavisesena visiṭṭhaṃ hotīti iminā adhippāyena javanavasena tadārammaṇassa sasaṅkhārādividhānaṃ vuttaṃ, vipākena nāma kammasarikkhena bhavitabbaṃ, na kammaviruddhasabhāvena. Aññathā aniṭṭhappasaṅgo siyāti evamadhippāyena dutiyatthero kammavaseneva tadārammaṇavisesaṃ āha. Ñāṇassa jaccandhādiduggativipattinimittapaṭipakkhatā viya sugativipattinimittapaṭipakkhatāpi siyāti maññamāno tatiyatthero ‘‘tihetukakammato duhetukapaṭisandhimpi nānujānātī’’ti iminā nayena tesu vādesu adhippāyāvirodhavasena yuttaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Mahāpakaraṇe āgatapāḷiyāti ‘‘sahetuko dhammo ahetukassa dhammassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.1.102) imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘sahetukaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ ahetukassa bhavaṅgassa anantarapaccayena paccayo, sahetukā khandhā vuṭṭhānassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti evamādinā paṭṭhāne sahetukadukādīsu āgatapāḷiyāti attho.
色界与无色界果报的讨论注释巴利
Rūpāvacarārūpāvacaravipākakathāvaṇṇanā
499 在那时存在的欲等(心所)——这句话是为了说明:在果报禅那中,苦行道等状态并不存在。因为果报禅那不像善禅那那样依靠遍作(预备修行)而生起。而且在这里,不能说“如同行道有种种差别那样,随顺善的果报心的所缘差别也非究竟意义上的差别”,因为无色法必定有所缘,且果报心以业相为所缘,这一点在其他情况下也存在。在不同刹那中有不同的主导因素,这是就“在某一刹那,某一禅那以某法为主导,而在另一刹那,该禅那并不一定以该法为主导”而说的。说“唯有第四禅”,正是为了说明:就像行道一样,主导因素也并非固定不变。巴利
499.Tasmiṃ khaṇe vijjamānānaṃ chandādīnanti etena vipākajjhāne dukkhāpaṭipadādibhāvassa avijjamānataṃ dasseti. Na hi kusalajjhānaṃ viya vipākajjhānaṃ parikammavasena nibbattatīti. Na cettha paṭipadābhedo viya kusalānurūpo vipākassa ārammaṇabhedopi na paramatthiko siyāti sakkā vattuṃ ekantena sārammaṇattā arūpadhammānaṃ vipākassa ca kammanimittārammaṇatāya aññatrāpi vijjamānattā. Nānākkhaṇesu nānādhipateyyanti ‘‘yasmiṃ khaṇe yaṃ jhānaṃ yadadhipatikaṃ, tato aññasmiṃ khaṇe taṃ jhānaṃ ekantena tadadhipatikaṃ na hotī’’ti katvā vuttaṃ. Catutthajjhānassevāti ca paṭipadā viya adhipatayo na ekantikāti imamevatthaṃ dasseti.
出世间异熟论的解释巴利
Lokuttaravipākakathāvaṇṇanā
505 世间业由渴爱、无明等赋予特殊性质,能够产生果报,否则就不能,所以说“由渴爱等所造作”。另一种果报,是指没有空、无愿之名的果报。那由纯净修行之道而显现的,以及依经教方式被称为无相的。因此他说“无常随观之后生起的道也”等等。其意趣是:作用的差别是依据道的证得方式而有的。考虑到“唯在道无间果心”这一说法,他带着疑虑说“在获得空等名称时”。其意趣是:之所以也获得无相之名,是因为从道的证得方式来看,果在获得名称上并无差别。正如道中的信那样,果中的信也是如此。巴利
505. Taṇhāvijjādīhi āhitavisesaṃ lokiyakammaṃ vipākuppādanasamatthaṃ hoti, na aññathāti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhādīhi abhisaṅkhata’’nti. Itarassāti suññatāppaṇihitanāmarahitassa. Yo suddhikapaṭipadāya vibhāvito, yo ca suttantapariyāyena animittoti vuccati. Tenevāha ‘‘aniccānupassanānantarassapi maggassā’’tiādi. Vaḷañjana…pe… bhedo hoti maggāgamanavasenāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Maggānantaraphalacittasmiṃ yevā’’ti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘suññatādināmalābhe satī’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ āha. Animittanāmañca labhati maggāgamanato phalassa nāmalābhe visesābhāvatoti adhippāyo. Tādisāya evāti yādisā magge saddhā, tādisāya eva phale saddhāya.
555 哪些法是能导出的?根据“四道”这个说法,以及在解释“非导出”的词条时说“四地中的果报”,可见果报并不是在究竟意义上具有导出的本性;不过,作为具有导出本性的果报,它是通过烦恼的止息与断除这种方式生起的,从方便的角度才那样说,所以论主说“具有导出本性的……”等话。“五支”这一说法,是为了表明:在道的分别中,一切情况下果都被当作道的同义语。因为在那里,虽然在圣道刹那也有诸离,但为了显示其余五支的特殊作用,圣典中才把道举为五支。同样,觉支也是如此,意思是:就像道一样,在道觉支分别和果觉支分别中,果的觉支也被举出来。巴利
555. ‘‘Katame dhammā niyyānikā? Cattāro maggā’’ti vacanato (dha. sa. 1295, 1609) aniyyānikapadaniddese ca ‘‘catūsu bhūmīsu vipāko’’ti (dha. sa. 1610) vuttattā na nippariyāyena phalaṃ niyyānasabhāvaṃ, niyyānasabhāvassa pana vipāko kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānavasena pavattamāno pariyāyato tathā vuccatīti āha ‘‘niyyānikasabhāvassā’’tiādi. Pañcaṅgiko cāti etena maggavibhaṅge sabbavāresupi phalassa maggapariyāyo āgatoti dasseti. Tattha hi ariyamaggakkhaṇe vijjamānāsupi viratīsu tadavasiṭṭhānaṃ pañcannaṃ kārāpakaṅgānaṃ atirekakiccatādassanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ pañcaṅgikopi maggo uddhaṭoti. Evaṃ bojjhaṅgāpīti yathā maggo, evaṃ maggabojjhaṅgavibhaṅgesu phalesu ca bojjhaṅgā uddhaṭāti attho.
由行动宣说的论的注释巴利
Kiriyābyākatakathāvaṇṇanā
568 “先前的转起”说的是大唯作心的转起。漏已尽的人确实是以这种心这样省察的,所以他说“然而此心缺乏审察的智慧”。“如此”是为了表明:就像在耳门那样,在鼻门等处也是如此,由于对各个境域的欲求已被限定,此心就以大唯作心在那些境域中转起。“成为随逐五门而可获得”,是就此心作为五门中转起的大唯作心的随转者而转起来说的;或者这样关联:此心就是在五门中转起。由于说了“贪求……已生起”,看起来表达的意思是:在五门中,先以此心成为喜乐者,然后以大唯作心分别各各义理。不过他们说:对于先前已经以意门心确定了适合精勤的所缘等的人,在五门中,于那样的色等所缘上,这样的心便转起。这个意思也可以这样结合来解释:在五门中转起的、以对贪求与渴爱的断除等之省察为因的、如所说的因性已生起。若如此,则“此心的缘性,是先前的转起”这句话也得到支持。巴利
568.Purimā pavattīti mahākiriyacittappavattiṃ āha. Tāya hi khīṇāsavo evaṃ paccavekkhati. Tenevāha ‘‘idaṃ pana cittaṃ vicāraṇapaññārahita’’nti. Evanti yathā sotadvāre, evaṃ ghānadvārādīsupi mahākiriyacittehi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ visaye idamatthikatāya paricchinnāya idaṃ cittaṃ vattatīti dasseti. Pañcadvārānugataṃ hutvā labbhamānanti pañcadvāre pavattamahākiriyacittānaṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakabhāvena imassa cittassa pavattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pañcadvāre eva vā idameva pavattanti sambandho. ‘‘Loluppa…pe… bhūta’’nti vuttattā pañcadvāre paṭhamaṃ iminā cittena somanassito hutvā pacchā mahākiriyacittehi taṃ taṃ atthaṃ vicinotīti ayamattho vutto viya dissati. Pubbeyeva pana manodvārikacittena padhānasāruppaṭṭhānādiṃ paricchindantassa pañcadvāre tādisasseva tādisesu rūpādīsu idaṃ cittaṃ pavattatīti vadanti. Ayampi attho pañcadvāre eva pavattaṃ loluppataṇhāpahānādipaccavekkhaṇāhetu yathāvuttakāraṇabhūtaṃ jātanti evaṃ yojetvā sakkā vattuṃ. Evañca sati imassa cittassa paccayabhūtā purimā pavattīti idampi vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.
在这里要明白:在五门中,只是以这个心生起喜,而不是生起笑,因为五门心不能产生表色;但在意门中则会生起笑。正因如此,注释书里在五门处只说“成为喜乐者”,而在意门处则说“笑着”。世尊以这个能生笑的心所转起的微笑,因为是随顺宿命智、未来分智和一切知智的,所以只是智的随转而已。然而,在智随转的情况下,与巴利圣典和注释书并无任何矛盾,而且注释书正是这样说的:“在他们的那些智的惯行结束时,这个心生起。”这必定应当如此认可,否则,就连转向心,世尊的转起也不合理。因为转向心能生起表色这一点已经确定,而作为转向的状态并不妨碍由其产生的表色成为身业等。巴利
Ettha ca pañcadvāre iminā cittena somanassuppādanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na hāsuppādanaṃ pañcadvārikacittānaṃ aviññattijanakattā, manodvāre pana hāsuppādanaṃ hoti. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pañcadvāre ‘‘somanassito hotī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ, manodvāre ca ‘‘hāsayamāna’’nti. Iminā hasituppādacittena pavattiyamānampi bhagavato sitakaraṇaṃ pubbenivāsaanāgataṃsasabbaññutaññāṇānaṃ anuvattakattā ñāṇānuparivattiyevāti. Evaṃ pana ñāṇānuparivattibhāve sati na koci pāḷiaṭṭhakathānaṃ virodho, evañca katvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ ciṇṇapariyante idaṃ cittaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avassañca etaṃ evaṃ icchitabbaṃ, aññathā āvajjanacittassapi bhagavato pavatti na yujjeyya. Tassapi hi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakabhāvassa nicchitattā, na ca viññattisamuṭṭhāpakatte taṃsamuṭṭhitāya viññattiyā kāyakammādibhāvaṃ āvajjanabhāvo vibandhatīti.
正因为如此,是因为它没有根、所以没有好好建立起来。“无因的禅支和力”是合在一起说的意思,“禅支和力”里的“和”字就是这个作用。如果因为力的状态不圆满,在这两种无因心里,力没有被列出、也没有被包含进去,那为什么又说出来了呢?所以他说“然而因为……”等话。正如正导向出离的善法有那样的自性,它的对应物——果报,也像果一样具有那样的自性;或者因为是有因的唯作心,所以说了“在大唯作心中”,而没有取有因的果报心。或者应当知道,“在大唯作心中”这个“和”字,也把有因的果报心包含进去了。巴利
Tato evāti mūlābhāvena na suppatiṭṭhitattā eva. ‘‘Ahetukānaṃ jhānaṅgāni balāni cā’’ti sampiṇḍanattho jhānaṅgāni cāti ca-saddo. Yadi aparipuṇṇattā balabhāvassa imasmiṃ ahetukadvaye balāni anuddiṭṭhāni asaṅgahitāni ca, atha kasmā niddiṭṭhānīti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Sammā niyyānikasabhāvānaṃ kusalānaṃ paṭibhāgabhūto vipākopi phalaṃ viya taṃsabhāvo siyāti sahetukavipākacittāni aggahetvā kiriyacittakatattā vā ‘‘mahākiriyacittesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā mahākiriyacittesucāti ca-saddena sahetukavipākacittānipi gahitānīti veditabbāni.
574 说“根……紧接着那之后生起的”,是因为那些智属于欲界。其他的智属于广大界,所以说“在遍作之后”。巴利
574.‘‘Indriya…pe… imassānantaraṃ uppajjamānānī’’ti vuttaṃ tesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kāmāvacarattā. Itaresaṃ mahaggatattā ‘‘parikammānantarānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
577 “我慢被安立于此”,这就是我;它确实存在、生起,不像由他人构想出来的那样是恒常的,所以称为我体。或者说,以邪见者所执取的方式而存在、运作,所以称为我体。巴利
577. Āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, so eva bhavati uppajjati, na paraparikappito viya niccoti attabhāvo. Attāti vā diṭṭhigatikehi gahetabbākārena bhavati pavattatīti attabhāvo.